C. Ordinary Cement-Sand Grout: Prepare design mixes of ordinary cement grout.
1. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type II; or blended hydraulic cement, ASTM C595, Type 1L.
2. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.
a. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains on exposed concrete surfaces.
b. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand, free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
1) Dune sand, bank run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. c. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows:
1) Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2) Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of slag and pit or bank run gravel is not permitted.
3) Coarse Aggregate Size: Coarse aggregate not permitted in ordinary grout.
Packet Pg. 554 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 03600-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER. Refer to Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, for additional admixture requirements.
4. Proportioning and Design of Mixes: Prepare design mixes for grout. Mixes are subject to the following limitations:
a. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi.
b. Minimum amount of water necessary for the mixture to flow under its own weight.
c. Fine Aggregate meeting ASTM C33.
d. Air Content Percentage: ±1.5%.
e. Minimum Cement Content in Pounds per Cubic Yard: 658. f. Slump at point of placement: 5"±1".
5. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with ACI 211.1 and provide a complete report, from an independent testing laboratory, to ENGINEER, at least 30 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin grout production until ENGINEER has approved mixes.
6. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout proportions, prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301, Chapter 3 - Proportioning.
7. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Chapter 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the substrate and conditions under which grout is to be placed with installer and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Mix, place and cure grout as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If manufacturer's instructions conflict with the Specifications, do not proceed until ENGINEER provides clarification.
2. Manufacturers of proprietary products shall make available upon 72 hours notification the services of a qualified, full time employee to aid in assuring proper use of the product under job conditions. The cost of this service, if any, shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
3. When placing grout conform to temperature and weather limitations in Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Through-bolt and form-tie holes: Fill space with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool and hammer. Coordinate dry pack dense grout application with bonding agent in Section 03251 - Concrete Joints.
Packet Pg. 555 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 03600-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Columns, Beams and Equipment Bases: Prepare concrete surface by sandblasting, chipping, or by mechanical means to remove any soft material prior to setting base plates and machinery. After shimming columns, beams and equipment indicated to be grouted on the plans to proper grade, securely tighten anchor bolts. Properly form around the base plates allowing sufficient room around the edges for placing the grout.
Adequate depth between the bottom of the base plate and the top of concrete base must be provided to assure that the void is completely filled with grout.
D. Guardrails and Railings: After posts and rails have been properly inserted into holes or sleeves, fill the annular space between posts and cast-in-place sleeves and/or below base plates with non-shrink grout. Bevel grout at juncture with post so that moisture flows away from posts.
E. Construction Joints: Ordinary cement grout may be used in place of mortar over the contact surface of the old concrete at the interface of horizontal construction joints as outlined in Section 03251 - Concrete Joints, and Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete, of these Specifications.
F. Curing: Cure all grout in accordance with manufacturerís written instructions. Wet cure ordinary cement-sand grout and non-shrink non-metallic grout for a minimum of three (3) days unless directed otherwise by the ENGINEER. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 556 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 04200
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: All masonry work shown on the Drawings. It also includes providing openings in masonry, to accommodate the Work under other Sections, and building into the masonry all items such as sleeves, anchor bolts, inserts and all other embedded items for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)
1. ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A36, Carbon Structural Steel, Standard Specification for.
2. ASTM A82, Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement, Standard Specification for.
3. ASTM A153, Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, Standard Specification for.
4. ASTM A167, Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip, Standard Specification for.
5. ASTM A240, Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels, Standard Specification for.
6. ASTM A366, Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality, Standard Specification for.
7. ASTM A569, Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality, Standard Specification for.
8. ASTM A580, Stainless Steel Wire, Standard Specification for.
9. ASTM A615, Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, Standard Specification for.
10. ASTM A663, Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties, Standard Specification for.
11. ASTM C5, Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
12. ASTM C67, Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick.
13. ASTM C90, Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units, Standard Specification for.
14. ASTM C91, Masonry Cement.
15. ASTM C136, Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
16. ASTM C140, Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units, Standard Test Methods of.
17. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
18. ASTM C150, Portland Cement.
19. ASTM C180, Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
20. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
21. ASTM C270, Mortar for Unit Masonry.
22. ASTM C331, Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units, Standard Specification for.
Packet Pg. 557 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
23. ASTM C404, Aggregates for Masonry Grouts.
24. ASTM C426, Linear Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units, Standard Test Method for.
25. ASTM C476, Grout for Masonry.
26. ASTM C744, Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units, Standard Specification for.
27. ASTM C1019, Standard Test Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
28. ASTM D2240, Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness, Standard Test Method for.
29. ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Standard Test Method for.
30. ASTM E119, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, Standard Test Methods for.
C. Brick Institute of America
1. "Technical Notes on Brick and Tile Construction."
2. Technical Bulletin 1A, "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction."
D. National Concrete Masonry Association,
1. "Guide Specifications"
2. "Technical Bulletins."
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. Design Numbers U901 through U914.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Coordination:
1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the masonry Work.
2. Masonry Work advanced without built-in flashings and other items shall be removed and rebuilt, at no additional cost to OWNER, even if discovered after masonry has been completed.
3. Coordinate the work of other Sections to avoid delay of the masonry Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Complete layout of all masonry walls showing modular planning and all special shapes to be used. Show all details for each condition encountered in the Work.
Provide plans and elevations drawn at 1/4-inch scale and details drawn at 1½-inch scale. Show all items required to be built into masonry.
2. Masonry control joint locations and details.
3. Fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcing bars. Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcing for masonry Work.
4. Explanation of where each masonry accessory will be used in the Work, quantities purchased and intended spacings.
B. Samples:
1. One unit of each type of concrete masonry unit specified.
Packet Pg. 558 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. One unit or one modular length of each accessory item specified.
3. Each type of colored mortar, showing the range of color that can be expected in the Work.
C. Product Data:
1. Complete selection of manufacturerís standard and custom colors.
2. Mix designs for grout and mortar.
3. Manufacturer's specifications and instructions for each manufactured product.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Comply with the applicable requirements of International Building Code, including the requirements for Special Inspection.
2. Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for masonry Work (4-hour, 3-hour, and similar designations), comply with applicable requirements for materials and installation established by UL and other governing authorities.
B. Source Quality Control:
1. Obtain all concrete masonry units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture and color or in an established uniform blend thereof. Cure units by autoclave treatment at minimum temperature of 350°F, and a minimum pressure of 125 psi.
2. Do not change source or brands of materials during the course of the Work.
3. No change shall be made in the proportions for mortar or grout, unless resubmitted and re-approved by the ENGINEER.
C. Construction Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and expansion joints, do not exceed 1/4-inch in 10-feet, or 3/8-inch in one story height or 20-feet maximum, nor ½-inch in 40-feet or more.
2. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4-inch in any bay or 20-feet maximum, nor 1/2-inch in 40-feet or more.
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 3/8-inch in any bay or 20-feet maximum, nor 1/2-inch in 40' or more.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, do not exceed +1/2-inch-1/4-inch from dimensions shown.
D. Preconstruction Conference: Prior to the installation of masonry Work, CONTRACTOR shall schedule a Preconstruction Conference at the project site.
1. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to the masonry Work including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
a. Project requirements, including Contract Documents.
b. Method of sequence of masonry construction.
c. Special masonry details.
d. Required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. e. Standards of workmanship.
f. Quality control requirements.
Packet Pg. 559 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
g. Job organization and availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
h. Modular planning requirements.
i. Weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions.
j. Required inspection, testing and certifying procedures. k. Regulations concerning building code compliance.
2. Attendance is mandatory for the following:
a. CONTRACTOR'S job superintendent.
b. Masonry subcontractor's job superintendent.
c. Masonry subcontractor's foreman.
d. Authorized representative of concrete unit masonry supplier. e. ENGINEER'S authorized representative.
3. Reconvene the meeting at the earliest opportunity if additional information must be developed in order to conclude the subjects under consideration and to resolve any outstanding issues.
4. CONTRACTOR shall record the discussions of the conference and the decisions and agreements (or disagreements) and furnish a copy of the record to each party attending.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials:
1. Deliver concrete masonry units in original, unopened and undamaged packages and pallets, plainly marked with identification of materials and name of approved manufacturer. Delivery shall be by the manufacturer or manufacturerís agent.
2. Deliver reinforcing to the site, bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating size, lengths and other markings shown on approved Shop Drawings.
3. Manufactured materials, such as cement and lime, shall be delivered and stored in their original containers plainly marked with identification of materials and manufacturer.
B. Storage of Materials:
1. Store materials off the ground, protected from dirt, construction traffic and contamination. Cover using tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets to prevent damage such as wetting, staining, and chipping.
2. Do not stack concrete masonry units higher than recommended by manufacturer.
C. Handling Materials:
1. Handle materials in a manner that minimizes chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished Work.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Site Facilities: Supplemental heat sources, as may be required, should CONTRACTOR wish to continue masonry Work in cold weather if not available at the project site. The provision of all supplemental heat energy sources and equipment is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
B. Environmental Requirements:
1. Do not place any masonry Work when air temperature is below 28°F, on rising temperatures or below 36°F, on falling temperatures, without temporary heated Packet Pg. 560 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
enclosures or without heating materials or other precautions necessary to prevent freezing.
2. No frozen materials shall be used, nor shall frozen masonry Work be built upon.
3. Remove and replace all masonry Work damaged by frost or freezing.
C. Protection:
1. Protect all masonry against freezing for at least 48 hours after being placed. a. Mean Daily Air Temperature 40°F to 32°F: Protect masonry from rain for 48 hours after installation.
b. Mean Daily Temperature 32°F to 20°F: Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets for 48 hours.
c. Mean Daily Air Temperature 20°F and Below: Maintain masonry above 32°F for 48 hours by enclosure and supplementary heat.
2. Protect partially completed masonry against rapid heat loss and from water entering it when Work is not in progress, by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, nonstaining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both sides of walls and secure in place using wall cover clamps spaced at intervals of 4' and at each end and joint of covering.
3. Do not apply distributed floor or roof loading for at least 3 days after completing masonry columns or walls.
4. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 7 days after completing masonry columns or walls.
D. Cold Weather Masonry Work:
1. All mortar for use in masonry Work, when the mean daily temperature is below 40°F, shall be portland cement- lime-sand mortars using high early strength portland cement.
2. Air Temperature 40°F to 32°F: Heat sand or mixing water to 70oF-160oF.
3. Air Temperature 32°F to 20oF: Heat sand and mixing water to 70oF-160oF. Provide heat on both sides of wall under construction to heat constructed masonry to 40oF.
Employ wind breakers when wind is in excess of 15 mph.
4. Air Temperature below 20°F: Heat sand and mixing water to 70oF-120oF. Provide enclosure and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32°F. Heat constructed masonry to 40oF. Temperature of masonry units when laid shall not be less than 20°F.
E. Hot Weather Masonry Work:
1. Preparation ñ Prior to conducting masonry work:
a. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100oF, or exceeds 90oF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph:
1) Maintain sand piles in a damp, loose condition.
2) Provide necessary conditions and equipment to produce mortar having a temperature below 120oF.
b. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 115oF, or exceeds 105oF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph implement the requirements above and shade materials and mixing equipment from direct sunlight.
2. Construction ñ While masonry work is in progress:
a. When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100oF, or exceeds 90oF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph:
1) Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 120oF.
Packet Pg. 561 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2) Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool water before they come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar. 3) Maintain mortar consistency by retempering with cool water. 4) Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing.
b. When the ambient temperature exceeds 115oF, or exceeds 105oF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph implement the requirements listed above and use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. Ice is permitted in the mixing water prior to use. Ice is not permitted in the mixing water when added to the other mortar or grout materials.
3. Protection ñ When the mean daily temperature exceeds 100oF, or exceeds 90oF with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, fog spray newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times a day until the masonry is three days old.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. General: Unless specifically modified by other requirements specified, provide concrete masonry units in compliance with the following classifications, weights, grades, colors, textures, scores, thermal resistance values and other features specified.
B. Hollow Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following:
1. ASTM C90 medium weight.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 1,900 pounds per square inch average of three units; 1,700 pounds per square inch minimum for an individual unit. The manufacturer shall certify that the masonry units meet all requirements of ASTM C90 including the moisture content and linear shrinkage requirements for intermediate conditions.
C. Color and Texture: Provide the following:
1. Manufacturer's complete selection of all standard and all custom colors. Submit preliminary color selection for review by ENGINEER.
2. Color, surface texture and aggregate uniform within the normal range established by sample submission and as approved by ENGINEER.
D. Special Shapes: Provide the following where required:
1. Lintels, bond beams, reinforcing units, and flush-end reinforcing units, interior and exterior corner shapes, solid jambs, sash block, coves, premolded control joint blocks, headers, and other special conditions.
2. Split-face, scored, and other facings, and special sizes, as shown on the Drawings.
E. Waterproofing Admixture: Manufacture all types of concrete unit masonry, used in construction of exterior walls with an integral waterproofing admixture as follows:
1. Material: Cross-linking acrylic polymer.
2. Proportion: In strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. DRY-BLOCK Admixture by W. R. Grace & Company Construction Products Division.
Packet Pg. 562 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b. Or equal.
2.2 MORTAR
A. General: Anti-freeze admixture or agents, including calcium chloride are not permitted.
B. Mortar for All Unit Masonry: Type S. Comply with ASTM C270, Table 2, except limit materials to those specified herein.
1. Portland cement-Lime: Provide the following proportions by volume:
a. Portland Cement: 1 part.
b. Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: 1/4 to 1/2.
c. Aggregate (sand in damp, loose condition): 2º to 3 times the sum of cementitious materials.
d. Pigment: as required to match approved sample.
2. Properties:
a. Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 1,900 pounds per square inch. b. Minimum Water Retention, ASTM C270: 75%.
c. Maximum Air Content, ASTM C270: 12% for Portland cement - lime mortars.
2.3 MASONRY GROUT
A. Proportion coarse grout mixes subject to the following limitations:
1. Specified 28-day Compressive Strength: 2,000 psi
2. Minimum Cementitious Content: 550 lb/cu yd
a. Fly ash per ASTM C618 may be used replace cement but shall not exceed 20% by weight of cement plus fly ash.
3. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio by Weight: 0.52
4. Slump at point of placement: 8" ±1"
B. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with ACI 211.1.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C150: Use Type II or ASTM C595 Type 1L
2. Nonstaining and of natural color or as required to be compatible with the approved pigment.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, or lime putty ASTM C5.
C. Aggregates: ASTM C33 and as herein specified.
1. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulfides, pyrite, marcasite, ochre, or other materials that can cause stains on exposed surfaces.
2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand, free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. For mortar, ASTM C144, except for mortar for joints less than 1/4-inch use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
3. Colored/ White Mortar Aggregates: Provide ground marble, granite or other sound stone, as required to match the approved sample.
4. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows:
Packet Pg. 563 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, natural or crushed. Use of slag and pit or bank run gravel is not permitted.
c. Coarse Aggregate Size: ASTM C33, No. 8 or 89.
D. Admixtures:
1. Provide admixtures produced by established reputable manufacturers and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed instruction. Do not use admixtures that have not been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes. Refer to Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for additional admixture requirements.
2. Waterproofing Admixture for Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide a cross-linking acrylic polymer integral waterproofing system, proportioned and mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide one of the following:
a. DRY-BLOCK Mortar Admix by W.R. Grace & Company Construction Products Division.
b. Or equal.
E. Colored Mortar Pigments:
1. Commercial iron oxide, manganese dioxide, ultramarine blue, chromium oxide, or carbon black, compounded for use in mortar mixes.
2. Do not exceed pigment to cement ratios, by weight, of 1 to 35 for carbon black and 1 to 7 for other pigments.
3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Truetone Mortar Colors by Frank D. Davis Co., subsidiary of Rockwood Industries, Inc.
b. Sonobrite by Sonneborn Building Products Division Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.
c. Or equal.
F. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, or organic matter.
2.5 REINFORCING
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for all bars. Shop-fabricate reinforcing bars that are shown or required to be bent or hooked. Comply with ACI 315 for the fabrication of reinforcing steel for masonry Work.
B. Wire products: Ties, and rebar positioners shall be fabricated from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82 and hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces per square foot of zinc coating complying with ASTM A153.
C. Rebar Positioners: Nine gage reinforcing bar positioners which accommodate both horizontal and vertical reinforcing steel. Provide one of the following:
1. #RB Series Rebar Positioners by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Or equal.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Provide watertight joint filler where masonry abuts structural framework members, and as shown. Provide the following:
1. Polyurethane foam strip saturated with polybutylene waterproofing material which when installed at A compression ratio of 2:1 is impermeable to water.
Packet Pg. 564 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-9
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Resilient to -40°F with 100% movement recovery.
3. Elongation of 140% with a tensile strength of not less than 53 psi.
4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Polyseal by Sandell Construction Solutions.
b. Or equal.
B. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Provide complete selection of solid extruded rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 80 to 90 complying with ASTM D2240, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall.
Provide one of the following:
1. #RS Series - Rubber Control Joints by Hohmann & Barnard, Incorporated.
2. Or equal.
C. Sealants: Refer to Section 07900, Joint Sealants.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR and his installer shall examine areas and conditions under which masonry Work is to be installed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions.
Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Special Masonry Inspection:
1. The OWNER will employ a testing laboratory to perform Special Masonry Inspections in accordance with Chapter 17 of the current Building Code.
2. Masonry inspection services will be provided during the following construction activities:
a. During laying of units:
1) During the first day of the masonry construction, inspect proportions of site prepared mortar, construction of mortar joints, location of all reinforcing and connectors, size and location of structural elements, type, size and location of anchors, protection of masonry during cold weather.
2) Inspection to be continuous the first full day of masonry construction which requires special inspection.
a) Thereafter, a minimum of 3 hours every third day of construction until the concrete masonry work is complete.
3) Inspection while laying masonry units may be made concurrently with other inspection duties provided all inspection duties are adequately performed. 4) When deficiencies are found, additional inspection shall be provided as required until deficiencies have been corrected.
5) If masonry crews change, an additional full day of inspection is required during the first day the new crew is on-site.
b. Placement of reinforcing steel:
1) Verification of all reinforcing including size, grade, lap lengths, and type. 2) Inspection may be periodic as required to verify all reinforcing at Risk Category II and III structures. Inspection of all reinforcing shall be continuous at Risk Category IV structures.
3) Inspector to be present during the concrete pour in which any dowels connecting concrete to masonry are cast to verify proper location of dowels.
Packet Pg. 565 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-10
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Prior to each grouting operation, verify that grout space is clean, reinforcing and connectors are properly placed, proportions of site-prepared grout are correct and mortar joints have been properly constructed.
1) Inspection may be periodic as required to verify proper grout space at Risk Category II and III structures.
2) Inspection shall be continuous prior to and during grout placement at Risk Category IV structures.
d. Verify compliance with International Building Code and Specifications continuously during all grouting operations.
e. Provide special inspection in accordance with TMS 602 Tables 3 and 4 for masonry structures including observation of masonry work for conformance to the Contract Documents:
1) Provide inspection reports to the ENGINEER, Building Official and OWNER. a) Notify Contractor of discrepancies for correction.
b) Notify ENGINEER, Building Official and OWNER, in writing, when discrepancies have been satisfactorily corrected.
2) Submit final signed report stating that Work requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance to the Contract Documents and the applicable workmanship previsions of the International Building Code.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build chases and recesses as shown or required by others. Provide not less than 8-inch of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses.
B. Leave openings for equipment, piping, ducts, and other items to be installed subsequent to starting of masonry Work. After installation of said items, complete masonry Work to match Work immediately adjacent to openings.
C. Cut masonry units using motor driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining Work neatly. Use full size units without cutting wherever possible.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. General:
1. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface pattern bond with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, masonry control joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less than half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
2. Lay up walls plumb and true to comply with specified tolerances, with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other Work.
3. Pattern Bond:
a. Lay all concrete masonry Work in running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below unless otherwise shown. b. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. c. Do not use units with less than 8-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
B. Mortar Bedding and Jointing:
Packet Pg. 566 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-11
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout.
a. Lay walls with 3/8-inch joints.
2. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, except paint, unless otherwise shown.
3. Tool exposed joints when mortar is ìthumbprintî hard, slightly concave, unless otherwise required to match existing joint treatment. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where required.
4. Concave-tool exterior joints below grade.
5. Do not use mortar that has begun to set or if more than 30 minutes have elapsed since initial mixing. Do not retemper mortar.
6. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit masonry length in each course, and do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly, if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying new masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As the Work progresses, build in items shown, specified or required by others. Fill cores in one block width solidly with masonry grout around built-in items.
E. Structural Reinforced Masonry:
1. Shape and dimension reinforcement as shown and are required by governing codes.
2. Position reinforcing accurately at the spacing shown. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement with rebar positioners.
3. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as shown, but not less than 1½-inch. Provide lateral ties.
4. For horizontal bars, provide fully-lapped "L" shaped corner bars at corners and intersections.
5. Provide lapped splices with reinforcing steel placed in contact with rebar positioners or tied. Provide 48 bar diameter lap length, unless otherwise shown.
F. Grouting Structural Reinforced Masonry:
1. Place grout within 1.5 hours from introducing water in the mixture and prior to initial set. Discard grout that does not meet the specified slump, has exceeded the 1.5 hour timeframe or has reached initial set.
2. Solid grout all walls, beams, piers and pilasters, unless noted otherwise.
3. Provide temporary dams where required or barriers to control horizontal flow of grout at ends of wall sections. Build dams full height of grout pour. If masonry units are used, do not bond into permanent masonry wythes. Remove temporary dams after completion of grout pour.
4. Grout pour height shall not exceed 5.33 feet for grouting cells of hollow units with dimensions equal to or greater than 2.5îx3î.
5. Grout pour height shall not exceed 1 foot for grouting cells of hollow units with dimensions less than or equal to 1.5îx3î.
6. Terminate pour 1½-inch below top of highest course in pour.
7. Provide metal wall ties, if required, to prevent blow outs.
Packet Pg. 567 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 04200-12
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.4 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK:
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces, such members to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space, not less than 1/2-inch in width, between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise shown.
3. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 8-inch on center vertically and 36-inch on center horizontally.
4. Provide end blocks, where masonry abuts structural support, to facilitate installation of compressible filler, backer rod and sealant.
B. Lintels and Bond Beams: Provide masonry lintels and bond beams where shown. Use specially formed "U" shaped lintel and bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as shown, filled with grout. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels and bond beams.
3.5 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent Work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of sealant compounds.
C. Cleaning Exposed, Unglazed Masonry Surfaces:
1. Wipe off excess mortar as the Work progresses. Dry brush at the end of each day's Work.
2. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean sample wall area of approximately 20-square feet as described below. Obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance of sample cleaning before proceeding to clean remainder of masonry Work. a. Dry clean to remove large particles of mortar using wood paddles and scrappers.
Use chisel or wire brush if required.
b. Presoak wall by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. c. Acid type cleaners shall not be permitted.
d. Protect other Work from cleaning operations.
D. Protection: Protect the masonry Work from deterioration, discoloration or damage during subsequent construction operations.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 568 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05051-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 05051
ANCHORS, INSERTS, AND DOWELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes all post-installed anchors and inserts required to anchor parts of the Work to supporting concrete or masonry construction, and plaster. This Section also includes adhesives for anchoring reinforcing dowels into existing concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.
2. ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
3. ASTM A320, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service.
4. ASTM D746, Standard Test Method for Brittleness of Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact
5. ASTM D1505, Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique
6. ASTM D1525, Standard Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide the size, type, and length of anchor shown on the drawings or, if not shown, as specified in the detailed sections of these specifications.
B. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, expansion anchor, toggle bolt, or concrete insert is not shown or specified, provide the size, length and capacity required to carry the design load times a minimum safety factor of 4.
C. For equipment anchors, if the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide anchors of diameter no less than the diameter of the hole minus 3/16 inch. When the design load is not specified by the manufacturer, provide structural calculations in accordance with Section 01610.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval copies of material certification, manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams and installation instructions for the devices.
B. Installerís Qualifications: When installing adhesive anchors subject to sustained tension loading or when specifically noted in the Drawings, submit for approval copies of the installerís qualifications certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program.
Packet Pg. 569 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05051-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Post-installed concrete anchors shall be ICC approved for seismic applications in cracked concrete and prequalified in accordance with ACI 355.2 or ACI 355.4.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Nonsubmerged Use in areas of wet use, washdown areas, or areas outside heated buildings:
1. Stainless steel Type 316, unless otherwise shown.
2. Diameter, Length and Bend Dimensions: As required by equipment or machinery manufacturer. Unless otherwise required, provide 3/4ñinch minimum diameter by 12- inches long and other geometry as shown.
3. Furnish minimum two A320 nuts and two washers of same material for each bolt, unless otherwise shown.
4. Provide sleeves as required or as shown for location adjustment.
B. Submerged Use:
1. Submerged use is defined as any connection 1 foot 6 inches below the normal water surface elevation in a water holding basin.
2. As specified for nonsubmerged use, for equipment, machinery or other connections except as follows:
a. Coating of anchor bolt threads is not required.
b. Where threads are covered with fusion bonded coating, provide nut of proper size to fit and provide connection of equal strength to embedded bolt.
C. For anchoring fabricated metalwork, structural steel, or other components where connections will be protected or dry:
1. Galvanized Steel, 36 ksi, minimum.
2. Minimum Size: æ-inch diameter by 12-inch long, unless otherwise shown.
3. Furnish two nuts and two washers per bolt of same material as bolt, unless otherwise shown.
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS LUBRICANT (ANTISEIZING)
A. Provide for stainless steel nuts and machined bolts, anchor bolts, concrete anchors, and all other threaded fasteners.
B. Lubricant shall contain substantial amounts of molybdenum disulfide, graphite, mica, talc, or copper as manufactured by:
1. Loc Tite Co., Permatex.
2. Or equal
2.3 ADHESIVE (EPOXY) ANCHORS AND DOWELS
A. Provide adhesive anchors where specifically shown and where adhesive anchors are allowed.
Unless otherwise shown, adhesive anchors are allowed for anchoring:
1. Supports for pipe, conduit, and electrical boxes, devices, and panels, on floors and walls Packet Pg. 570 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05051-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Handrails, guardrails, sunshades, stairs,
3. Fixtures and equipment on floors and walls, and
4. Single pipes and conduits <2 inch in diameter to ceilings and soffits.
B. Adhesive shall be epoxy resin. Vinylester resin anchors are NOT allowed.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. Installation to Concrete:
a. HIT-HY 200 as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.
b. SET-XP as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal meeting ACI 355.4.
2. Installation to solid-grouted Masonry:
a. HIT-HY 70 as manufactured by Hilti, Inc.
b. SET as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal.
2.4 EXPANSION ANCHORS
A. Provide expansion anchors only where specifically shown and where expansion anchors are allowed. Unless otherwise shown, and except as noted below, expansion anchors are allowed for anchoring:
1. Supports for pipe, conduit, and electrical boxes, devices, and panels, to floors and walls.
2. Handrails, guardrails, and sunshades.
3. Fixtures and equipment which have no moving parts, to floors and walls.
B. Expansion anchors are NOT allowed in any submerged or chemical containment areas or for anchoring mechanical equipment, pumps, fans, HVAC or any other rotating or vibrating equipment.
C. Leveling nuts shall not be used with expansion anchors. If leveling nuts are required, provide adhesive anchors, unless otherwise shown.
D. Wedge anchors: Provide one of the following:
1. Installation to Concrete:
a. Hilti Kwik Bolt TZ by Hilti, Inc.
b. Strong-Bolt 2 by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal meeting ACI 355.2.
2. Installation to solid-grouted Masonry:
a. Hilti Kwik Bolt-3 by Hilti, Inc.
b. Wedge-All by Simpson Strong-Tie, Inc.
c. Or approved equal.
2.5 OTHERS
A. Powder actuated fasteners and other types of anchors not specified herein shall not be used, unless approved by ENGINEER.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide Belleville washers, or approved equal, at anchorage connections used to transfer anchorage loads at sheet metal equipment housings.
Packet Pg. 571 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05051-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Obtain anchor bolts in sufficient time so as not to delay concrete or masonry work.
B. Adhesives shall be stored and installed at the service temperature ranges recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Locate and accurately set the anchor bolts using templates or other devices as necessary.
D. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation of equipment and structural steel.
E. Post-installed anchors are NOT acceptable substitutes for cast-in-place anchor bolts.
F. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with concrete.
G. Unless otherwise shown, the minimum diameter of anchor bolts for structural steel is æ inch, and for other applications, 3/8 inch.
H. Unless otherwise shown, provide the following minimum embedment, where ìdî is the nominal anchor diameter:
1. Cast-in-place anchors: 12d.
2. Adhesive anchors: 12d.
3. Expansion anchors: 8d.
I. Unless otherwise shown, provide a minimum edge distance equal to six times the bolt diameter for adhesive anchors, eight times the bolt diameter for expansion anchors and a bolt spacing equal to twelve times the bolt diameter.
J. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi and a minimum age of 21 days at the time of post-installed anchor installation.
1. Concrete temperature at the time of adhesive anchor installation shall be at least 50oF.
K. Existing reinforcing bars in the concrete structure may conflict with specific anchor locations.
Unless noted on the Drawings that the bars can be cut, the contractor shall review the existing structural drawings and shall undertake to locate the position of the reinforcing bars at the locations of the concrete anchors by ferroscan, ground penetrating rebar (GPR), xray, chipping or other means.
L. Drilling equipment used and installation of post-installed anchors shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
M. For the adhesive and expansion anchors, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions on the drilled hole diameter and depth.
N. CONTRACTOR shall properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air in accordance with the manufacturerís printed installation instructions to remove all loose Packet Pg. 572 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05051-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
material from the hole, prior to installing adhesive or expansion anchors. Drilled and cleaned anchor holes shall be protected from contamination until the anchor is installed. A drilled anchor hole shall be re-cleaned assuming the hole was just drilled, if in the opinion of ENGINEER or Inspector that the hole has become contaminated after initial cleaning.
O. Unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer, adhesive shall be dispensed through a tube or cartridge extension, beginning at the maximum depth of the hole and withdrawn as adhesive is injected, followed by insertion and rotating the anchor to the specified depth.
Where necessary, spaces around anchors at the surface shall be sealed at horizontal to vertically overhead locations to prevent loss of the adhesive during curing.
P. Anchors to be installed in the adhesive shall be clean, oil-free, and free of loose rust, paint, or other coatings.
Q. Installed anchors shall be securely fixed in-place to prevent displacement. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, anchors shall be installed perpendicular to the concrete surface.
R. Reinforcing adhesive dowel bars or all-threaded adhesive bars shall not be bent after being adhesively embedded in hardened, sound concrete.
S. In lieu of the use of stacked standard washers, if threads of an anchor bolt protrude beyond the attachment, the installers shall use a fabricated filler plate of equal or greater size of the washer. Hole on the filler plate shall be 1/16" (or 2 to 3 mm) greater than the bolt size.
Coat as appropriate in accordance with the material and installation location requirements.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Anchors shall be installed by qualified personnel in accordance with the manufacturerís printed installation instructions. Installation of adhesive anchors shall be performed by personnel trained to install adhesive anchors.
B. Installation of adhesive anchors horizontally or upwardly inclined to support sustained tension loads shall be performed by personnel certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification program.
C. OWNER shall employ a special inspector to perform field inspection services in accordance with Chapter 17 of the CBC for all post-installed anchors.
1. The special inspector must be periodically on the jobsite during post-installed anchor installation.
2. Adhesive anchors installed to resist sustained tension loads shall be continuously inspected during installation by an inspector specially approved for that purpose by the building official.
D. CONTRACTOR shall correct improper workmanship, remove and replace, or correct as instructed by the ENGINEER, all anchors or bars found unacceptable or deficient, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
Packet Pg. 573 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05051-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. The independent testing and inspection agency shall complete a report on each area. The report should summarize the observations made by the inspector and be submitted to ENGINEER.
F. Provide access for the testing agency to places where Work is being produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 574 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05500-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 05500
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work necessary to furnish and install, complete, fabricated metalwork and castings as shown or as required to secure various parts together and provide a complete installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for the fabrication and erection of the miscellaneous metal Work. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Clearly show all field connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimensions, diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions for manufactured products.
C. Samples: Submit representative samples of manufactured products.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting of the Work.
B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units to the extent necessary for shipping limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Qualifications: Qualify welding operators in accordance with requirements of current AWS Standard Qualification Procedure D1.1, Chapter 5.
1. Qualification Tests: Performed by a recognized testing laboratory.
D. Certification: Certify welders of structural and reinforcing steel for all positions of welding in accordance with such procedure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Like Items of Materials: Provide end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, replacement, and manufacturerís service.
B. Lifting Lugs: Provide on equipment and equipment components weighing over 100 pounds.
Packet Pg. 575 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05500-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Furnish miscellaneous items:
1. Miscellaneous metalwork and castings as shown, or as required to secure various parts together and provide a complete installation.
2. Items specified herein are not intended to be all-inclusive. Provide metalwork and castings shown, specified, or which can reasonably be inferred as necessary to complete the project.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Carbon steel structural shapes:
1. Wide flange sections: ASTM A992 Grade 50.
2. Steel pipe columns: ASTM A53 Grade B.
3. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): ASTM A500 Grade C.
4. Plates, Angles, Channels, and S Shapes: ASTM A36.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Plates and Sheets: ASTM A240, Type 304L or 316
2. Structural shapes: ASTM A479, Type 304L or 316.
3. Fasteners and fittings: ASTM A320, Type 316
a. Where stainless steel bolts are in contact with dissimilar metals provide insulating sleeves and phenolic washers to electrically isolate the bolts and nuts.
C. Aluminum, Structural Shapes and Plates: Alloy 6061-T6, meeting Aluminum Assoc.
Specification for Aluminum Structures
D. Cast Iron: A48, Class 30
E. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows:
1. Quenched and tempered medium carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A325 or:
2. Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A490.
3. Provide two ASTM F436 washers for all bolts.
4. Provide beveled washers at connections of sloped/tapered sections.
5. Unless noted otherwise, high-strength fasteners shall be used for all non-stainless steel fasteners.
F. Cast-in-Place Anchor Rods:
1. ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with weldability supplement S1, galvanized, unless shown otherwise.
2. Provide ASTM F436 washers at all nuts unless shown otherwise.
3. Provide anchor bolt sleeves as required or as shown for location adjustment.
4. Provide stainless steel anchors where shown on the Drawings or listed in another specific specification section.
G. Galvanizing:
1. Zinc coated hardware: ASTM A153.
2. Fabrications: ASTM A123.
H. Surface preparation and Finish:
Packet Pg. 576 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05500-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Steel: Where not indicated to be galvanized, steel shall be primed in the shop.
Comply with Section 09900, Painting.
2.3 ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE
A. High Density Polyethylene Plastic:
1. Single unit construction with deformed sidewalls such that the concrete and grout lock in place.
2. The top of the sleeve shall be self-threading to provide adjustment of the threaded anchor blot projection.
3. Material requirements shall conform to the following:
a. Plastic: High density polyethylene.
b. Density: 0.956, ASTM D1505.
c. Vicant Softening Point: 256oF, ASTM D1525
d. Brittleness Temperature: -180oF, ASTM D746
B. Fabricated Steel Sleeve:
1. Material: A36 steel.
2. Dimensions, welding, and sizes as shown.
2.4 FABRICATIONS
A. Miscellaneous Framings and Supports:
1. Fabricate units to the sizes, shapes, and profiles shown, or if not shown, of the required dimensions to receive the adjacent gratings, plates, tanks, doors, or other work to be retained by the framing.
2. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural shapes, plates, and bars of compatible material, all-welded construction, using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum number of joints for field connection.
Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and other items to be anchored to the work.
3. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or integrating into masonry. Furnish inserts for casting in, if units must be installed after concrete or grout is placed. Anchor spacing shall be 24" on-center, unless otherwise shown.
4. Galvanize where shown.
B. Miscellaneous Fabricated Metals:
1. The following additional items are listed as a guide. Some items on list may not be required, and list may not be all-inclusive. Submittal data for materials and products must be approved before they are incorporated in the work. a. Lifting Eyes.
b. Pipe Supports.
c. Steel Bases and Anchors.
C. Anchors, Fasteners, and Fittings: Provide zinc-coated carbon steel for steel fabrications, and stainless steel for aluminum and stainless steel fabrications, unless shown otherwise.
D. Pipe Sleeves
1. Provide as follows:
a. Hot-dip galvanized, Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves where shown for piping passing through concrete or masonry.
b. Holes drilled with rotary drill may be provided in lieu of sleeves in existing walls.
Packet Pg. 577 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05500-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Provide a center flange for water stoppage on sleeves in exterior or waterbearing walls. d. Provide a rubber caulking sealant or a modular mechanical unit to form a watertight seal in the annular space between pipes and sleeves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Exposed Surfaces Finish: Smooth, sharp, well-defined lines.
2. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled in neat, substantial manner.
3. Conceal fastenings where practical.
4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials.
5. Fabricate materials as specified.
6. Weld connections, except where bolting is directed.
7. Methods of fabrication not otherwise specified or shown shall be adequate for stress and as approved.
8. Grind exposed edges of welds smooth on walkways, guardrails, handrails, stairways, channel door frames, steel column bases and where shown.
9. Round sharp edges to 1/8-inch minimum radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth.
B. Aluminum:
1. Fabricate as shown, and in accordance with the Aluminum Association Standards and manufacturerís recommendations as approved.
2. Grind smooth sheared edges exposed in finished work.
3.2 WELDING
A. General
1. Meet codes for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and AISC for techniques of welding employed, appearance, quality of welds made, and the methods of correcting defective work.
2. Welding Surfaces: Free from loose scale, rust, grease, paint, and other foreign material, except mill scale which will withstand vigorous wire brushing may remain.
3. A light film of linseed oil may likewise be disregarded.
4. Do not weld when temperature of base metal is lower than zero degrees F.
5. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists.
6. Prepare welds and adjacent areas such that there is:
a. No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead.
b. No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted. c. No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead.
7. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead.
B. Welding Operators: As specified in PART 1, Article 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
Packet Pg. 578 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05500-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, level, plumb, true, and square, measured from established lines and levels. Brace or anchor temporarily in formwork where units are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
B. Anchor securely as shown or as required for the intended use, using concealed anchors wherever possible.
C. Fit exposed edges accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of galvanized or anodized units which are intended for bolted or screwed connections.
D. Field Welding: Where field welding is necessary, grind joints smooth and touch-up the shop paint. Comply with the applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 for the procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used in correcting welding.
E. Field Coat all miscellaneous ferrous and steel metals per Specification Section 09900 - Painting, System 300.
F. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, or embedded in masonry or concrete, protect surfaces as specified in Section 09900 - Painting, System 305. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 579 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 05500-
6 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 580 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06100-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Lumber, plywood, and other wood products for building framing and sheathing and miscellaneous supports. Items include wood blocking, framing, sheathing, furring, nailers, sub-flooring, rough hardware, and light wood construction.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA):
1. National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS) B. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC):
1. A190.1 Structural Glued Laminated Timber
C. The Engineered Wood Association (APA):
1. E30 ñ APA Engineered Wood Construction Guide
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B18.2.1A Square and Hex Bolts and Screws
2. B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts
3. B18.6.1 Wood Screws
4. B18.6.4 Thread Forming and Thread Cutting Tapping Screws and Metallic Drive Screws
E. American Society for Testing And Materials (ASTM):
1. A47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
2. A48 Gray Iron Castings
3. A653 Steel Sheet Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process
4. C954 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch to 0.112-inch in thickness
5. C1002 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases
6. D143 Small Clear Specimens of Timber, Method of Testing
7. D1760 Pressure Treatment of Timber Products
8. D2559 Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions
9. D3498 Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems
10. E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
11. F844 Washers, Steel, Plan (Flat) Unhardened for General Use
12. F1667 Nails, Spikes, and Staples
F. American Wood Preservers Association(AWPA):
1. AWPA Book of Standards
Packet Pg. 581 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06100-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.):
1. MM-L-736C Lumber; Hardwood H. Commercial Item Description (CID):
2. TT-W-571 Wood Preservation Treating Practices
3. A-A-55615 Shield, Expansion (Wood Screw and Lag Bolt Self Threading Anchors)
H. International Code Council (ICC):
1. California Building Code (CBC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product data for fasteners, connectors, adhesives, fire-retardant treatment, and preservative treatment.
1. Certification: Submit certificates of compliance for preservative treated lumber, fire retardant treated lumber and lumber grades.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection: Store lumber indoors at the site on raised platforms. If outdoor storage is temporarily incorporated, set the material on raised platforms and cover with suitable weatherproof protective coverings, such as tarpaulins or heavy polyethylene film. Batten down covers with sufficient weights, ties or anchors to prevent blowoffs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER:
A. Product Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, provide materials conforming to the requirements of the National Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber as recommended by the National Forest Products Association.
B. Maximum Moisture Content: 19%.
C. Grading: Provide visually graded dimension lumber, timbers and decking of the following minimum grades unless otherwise shown or specified.
Minimum Grade
Studs, Plates & Sills:
Douglas Fir-Larch 2x4
Douglas Fir-Larch 2x6 and larger
No. 2
No. 1
Joists, Rafters & Ledgers, 2x and 4x:
Douglas Fir-Larch No. 1
Decking:
Douglas Fir-Larch Select Dex
D. Preservative Treatment:
1. Do not treat Heart Redwood and Western Red Cedar.
2. Treat wood members and plywood exposed to weather or in contact with plaster, masonry or concrete, including framing of open roofed structures; sills, sole plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than 24 inch from ground; nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members used in connection with roofing and flashing materials.
Packet Pg. 582 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06100-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Treat other members specified as preservative treated (PT).
4. Provide pressure-treated lumber complying with the requirements established in the latest AWPA P5. Use water-borne preservative with 0.25% retainage. Brand all lumber accordingly.
2.2 PLYWOOD AND STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
A. Product Standards: Provide material conforming to the requirements of The Engineered Wood Association (APA), with the appropriate DFPA grade mark.
B. Temporary Protection: APA rated Exposure 1 or Exterior; panel grade DD or better, 23/32" thick.
2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Structural Glued Laminated Timber:
1. See Section 06200 for glued laminated timber.
2.4 FASTENERS:
A. Nails:
1. Size and type best suited for purpose unless noted otherwise.
2. Use zinc-coated or stainless steel nails, for nailing wood work exposed to weather and on roof blocking.
3. Wood-wood: Common nails (ASTM F1667, Type I, Style 10) unless otherwise noted.
B. Screws: ANSI B18.6.1 (Wood screws) or ASTM C1002 (Drywall Screws).
C. Framing and Timber Connectors:
1. Provide connectors as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. (Simpson) or approved equal. Designations on the drawings are those of Simpson.
2. Use the number and type of fastener recommended by the connector manufacturer for full load value, unless otherwise shown.
D. Anchor Bolts, Bolts, Nuts, & Washers:
1. Anchor Bolts - F1554, galvanized where exposed to weather. a. Provide 3î square by 0.229î minimum thickness washers at all anchor bolts.
2. Common Bolts - A307.
a. Provide standard cut washers where nut and bolt head contacts wood.
3. Square-headed bolts, or "L" anchors with bend of 5 times bolt diameter.
4. Embed a minimum of 12 times the bolt diameter, unless otherwise shown.
5. Size: 5/8 inch diameter unless otherwise shown.
E. Wedge Anchors and other post-installed anchoring devices.
1. As required by Section 05051 - Anchors, Inserts, and Dowels.
2. Post-installed anchors shall not replace cast-in-place anchors.
Packet Pg. 583 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06100-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Conform to applicable requirements of the following:
1. AFPA National Design Specification for Wood Construction for timber connectors.
2. AITC Timber Construction Manual for heavy timber construction.
3. IBC, International Building Code for nailing and framing unless specified otherwise.
4. APA for installation of plywood or structural use panels.
5. ASTM F 499 for wood underlayment.
6. TPI for metal plate connected wood trusses.
B. Fasteners:
1. Nails. Nail in accordance with CBC Table 2304.10.1, unless otherwise shown.
2. Bolts:
a. Fit bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood with washers. b. Countersink bolt heads flush with the surface of nailers. c. Embed in concrete and solid masonry.
d. Use toggle bolts to hollow masonry or sheet metal.
e. Use bolts to steel over 11 gage in thickness. Secure wood nailers to vertical structural steel members with bolts, placed one at ends of nailer and 24 inch intervals between end bolts.
3. Screws
a. Use to join wood to steel less than 11 gage thick.
b. May be used instead of nails to join wood to wood, at same spacing as nails. c. Provide minimum 1 inch penetration into anchorage member.
4. Powder actuated drive pins may be used where practical to anchor to solid masonry, concrete, or steel.
5. Do not anchor to wood plugs or nailing blocks in masonry or concrete. Use metal inserts or similar fastening.
C. Set sills or plates level in full bed of mortar on masonry or concrete walls.
1. Space anchor bolts within 9 inch of ends and 4 feet on center unless shown otherwise. Stagger bolts from side to side on plates over 6 inch in width.
2. Use shims of slate, tile or similar approved material to level wood members resting on concrete or masonry. Do not use wood shims or wedges.
3. Closely fit, and set to required lines.
3.2 BLOCKING NAILERS, AND FURRING:
A. Use longest lengths practicable.
B. Blocking: Furnish blocking required for the attachment of ADA appurtenances, copings, roof ventilators, ducts and other sheet metal work and wood grounds for other work and as shown and required.
C. Layers of Blocking or Plates:
1. Stagger end joints between upper and lower pieces.
2. Nail at ends and 16 inch on center.
3. Stagger nails from side to side of wood member over 4 inch in width.
Packet Pg. 584 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06100-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Furring: Unless otherwise shown, use 1"x3" continuous wood strips installed plumb on walls, using wood shims where necessary so face of furring forms a true, even plane.
Space furring 16 inch on center, butt joints over bearings and rigidly secure in place.
Anchor furring on 16 inch centers.
E. Preservative Coating: Liberally coat all field-cut edges and surfaces of treated lumber with a concentrated solution of preservative.
3.3 ROOF FRAMING:
A. Set rafters with crown edge up.
B. Form a true plane at tops of rafters.
C. Connect rafters to wall plate with framing connectors.
D. Frame openings in roof with headers and trimmer rafters. Double headers carrying more than 2 rafters unless shown otherwise.
3.4 DECKING
A. Install decking with joints staggered, and over rafters.
B. Nail decking to rafters with 2-16d nails at each rafter and 8d toe-nails at 12 inch on center.
C. Provide a bead of joint sealant as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants, under each tongue and groove at outside wall supports, to seal airtight.
D. Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking prior to application of finished roofing.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 585 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06100-
6 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 586 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06200-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 06200
GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Structural glued laminated timber beams and columns.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA):
1. National Design Specification for Wood Construction (NDS) B. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC):
1. A190.1 ñ Structural Glued Laminated Timber
2. AITC 110 ñ Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber C. The Engineered Wood Association (APA):
1. E30 ñ APA Engineered Wood Construction Guide
D. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):
1. AWPA Book of Standards
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Plan of structural glulam system with actual dimensions and camber of each member. Large-scale details of connections, connectors, and accessories. Indicate species and laminating combination and adhesive type required for Work.
B. Product Data:
1. Lumber.
2. Adhesives.
3. Fabrication process.
4. Accessories.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's Instructions.
2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance indicating conformance of glulam units with ANSI/AITC A190.1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: AITC licensed; qualified to apply the AITC ìQuality Inspectedî mark.
Packet Pg. 587 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06200-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Delivery:
1. Wrap each member with a moisture resistant paper before shipment.
2. Time delivery and installation of glulams to avoid extended onsite storage.
B. Storage:
1. Keep glued laminated structural units dry during delivery, storage, handling, and erection by maintaining factory applied protective covering in weathertight and light-proof condition. Maintain protective covering until building enclosure is completed to extent necessary for protection of interior glulam Work, and until final finishing of exterior Work is ready to proceed. Do not store glulam units in areas of either excessively high or excessively low relative humidity; comply with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Place individual or bundle wrapped units on blocks off ground with individual members separated for air circulation. Leave wrappings intact, but slit or puncture lower side to permit drainage of water which may otherwise accumulate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLUED LAMINATED UNITS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1 ìStructural Glued Laminated Timberî.
2. Factory mark each piece of glulam structural units with an AITC Quality Inspected mark.
3. Place AITC mark on timber surfaces which will not be exposed in completed Work.
B. Lumber Species: Douglas Fir-Larch.
C. Grade: 24F-1.8E
1. Simple span members: 24F-V4.
D. Appearance Grade: Industrial, Architectural, or Premium Appearance Grade E. Adhesives: Conform to ASTM D2559, for exterior (wet use) exposure conditions for all glulam units regardless of actual use. Comply with wet use adhesive requirements of ANSI/AITC A190.1.
F. Connectors, Anchors, Accessories: Fabricated steel shapes, plates and bars, welded into assemblies of types and sizes as shown on Drawings in accordance with ASTM A36. Steel bolts in accordance with ASTM A307.
1. Coat surfaces of connectors, anchors, and accessories with rust-inhibitive primer.
G. Fabrication:
1. Comply with ANSI/AITC A190.1 for furnishing units; where dimensions are not completely documented, provide manufacturer's standard sizes and shapes. Shop fabricate connections and connecting hardware to greatest extent feasible, including drilling of bolt holes.
Packet Pg. 588 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06200-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Preservative Treatment: Where required, after laminating, dressing, sanding, and end cutting each member to final size and shape, pressure treat fabricated glued laminated members in accordance with AWPA C28 with creosote or pentachlorophenalin AWPA Type A, C, or D solvent preservatives.
3. End Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces ìflood coatedî for not less than 10 minutes.
4. Seal Coat: After fabrication and sanding of each unit, and end coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit, except for treated wood where treatment has included a water repellent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide steel connectors, anchors, and accessories as necessary for a complete installation.
B. Install such that joints provide a close fit and neat appearance.
C. When hoisting members into place, use padded or nonmarring slings, and protect corners with wood blocking. Handle and temporarily support members to prevent visible surface damage.
D. Adequately brace members as they are placed to maintain safe position until full stability is provided.
E. Avoid cutting glulam members during erection, to greatest extent possible. Except for fastener drilling and other minor cutting, coat cuts with end sealer. Where treated members must be cut during erection, apply a heavy brush coat of the same preservative treatment, complying with AWPA M4.
F. Maintain expansion spaces as shown and as recommended by decking manufacturer. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 589 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06200-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 590 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06610-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 06610
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) fabrications including:
1. Grating
2. Prefabricated Parshall Flume Metering Manhole
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide detailed layout and installation drawings.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide complete specifications and data describing the materials to be furnished.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Per Manufacturer’s standard instructions, specifications and recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRATING AND COVERED GRATING
A. General:
1. Provide either grating or covered grating as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Strongwell, Duradek/Duragrid.
2. Fibergrate Composite Structures, Pultruded Grating.
3. McNichols Co., Pultruded Grating.
4. Or Equal.
C. Materials:
1. Core: Unidirectionally aligned glass fibers.
2. Mat: Submit standard corrosion liner.
3. Veil: Submit standard corrosion liner.
4. Ultra Violet Stabilizer: Added to the exterior surfaces in the type and amount recommended by the resin manufacturer.
5. Resin: Fire retardant premium vinyl ester, antimony trioxide or pentoxide added to meet Class I flame spread rating of ASTM E 84 and self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D 625, as manufactured by one of the following or equal as recommended by the resin manufacturer for the specific operating environment:
a. Dow Derakane 530.
b. Ashland Hetron 992.
c. Interplastic VE 8400.
Packet Pg. 591 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06610-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
d. Reichhold Dion VER 9300FR.
6. Color: Grey or as indicated on the Drawings.
7. Anti-Slip Coating: Permanently bonded grit of selected color. Apply to grating or cover plate.
D. Design Criteria and Chemical Exposure, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:
1. Deflection and Concentrated Load: Maximum 0.15 inches at span of 48 inches under concentrated load of 250 pounds.
2. Deflection and Uniform Distributed Load: Capable of carrying uniform distributed load of 100 pounds per square foot on simple span of 64 inches without deflecting more than 0.25 inches.
3. Suitability: Use stairs and grating suitable for use in environments containing chlorine and sulfuric acid solutions at the temperatures and concentrations specified for the application.
E. Components:
1. Bearing Bars: I-bars, 2 inch high, spaced at 1-1/2 inches on center.
2. Cross Bars: 3/8 inch diameter spaced at 6 inches on center.
3. Hold Downs, Connectors and Accessories: As recommended by grating manufacturer.
4. Covering Plate: Integral molded cover plate with a minimum of 1/8 inch thick.
5. Embedded Supports: FRP EZ Angle Embed.
F. Fabrication:
1. Produce grating, bearing, and cross bars and cover plate when used by pultrusion process. Do not use hand lay-up construction methods.
2. Coat ends of grating with resin.
3. Fabricate single sections for each span. Do not clamp 2 or more grating sections together within spans.
4. Type 316 Stainless Steel Plates And Angles At Openings:
a. Install 5/8 inch thick plate or angle where required to fill openings at changes in elevation and at openings between equipment and grating. b. Install angle stops at ends of grating to prevent grating from sliding.
5. Maximum 1/8 inch clearance allowed between ends of grating and inside face of vertical leg of support angles.
6. Covered Grating:
a. Provide with integral molded cover.
b. Provide anti-slip grit as specified in Section 2.3.C.7.
G. Cutouts:
1. Provide where required for equipment access or penetrations, including valve operators, stems, and gate frames.
2. Seal cut edges with resin.
2.2 PREFABRICATED FRP PARSHALL FLUME METERING MANHOLE
A. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. Tracom Inc., Packaged Metering Manhole
2. Warminster Fiberglass, Metering Manhole
3. Or Equal.
B. Design
Packet Pg. 592 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06610-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. The manhole shall be 48 inch in diameter by 4-ft high from invert of pipe.
2. Construction:
a. Fiberglass reinforced plastic, complying with ASTM D 3753-81. b. Factory-assembled, ready for installation except for field-installed equipment. c. The exterior surface shall be relatively smooth with no sharp projections. The surface shall be free of blisters larger than 0.5 inch in diameter, delamination and fiber show.
d. The interior surfaces shall be resin rich with no exposed fibers. The interior surface shall be smooth for improved corrosion resistance and reduced sludge build-up. The surface shall be free of crazing, delamination, blisters larger than
0.5 inch in diameter, and wrinkles of 0.125 inch or greater in depth. e. Minimum 0.480 inches wall thickness.
f. Integral fiberglass ladder bolted and glassed to the manhole wall with 1 ½ inch by 1 1/2 inch pultruded fiberglass rungs with a photoluminescent high visibility non-slip top surface and reinforced with threaded T-304 5/6 inch diameter stainless steel rods.
g. Integrally molded inlet and outlet flat-faced fiberglass flanges, size to match inlet and outlet piping shown on drawings (ANSI 150 pound standard). h. A ¾ inch thick expanded polystyrene bead board shall be supplied to place under the manhole on the concrete hold-down pad.
i. A four (4) inch integrally mounted flange shall be molded around the circumference of the manhole for anchoring to concrete. j. An OSHA approved “Confined Space Entry” sign shall be applied to the interior of surface of the manhole above the first ladder rung.
k. One (1) 2 inch NPT coupling to facilitate the installation of sample or bubble tubing, electrical power, or other cabling into the manhole.
C. Materials
1. The resins used shall be unsaturated, supplier certified, isophthalic polyester resins. Mixing lots of resin from different manufacturers, or “odd-lotting” of resins shall not be permitted. Quality assurance records on the resin shall be maintained. Non-pigmented resin is required to allow for light or “sand” color of manhole surface in order to facilitate easy from grade interior inspection.
U.V. inhibitors shall be added directly to the resin to prevent photodegradation.
2. 15 mil Isophthalic U.V. resistant gel coat on all exterior surfaces.
3. Reinforcing materials shall be commercial grade E-glass with a coupling agent that will provide a suitable bond between the glass reinforcement and the resin.
4. The laminate shall consist of multiple layers of glass matting and resin. The surface exposed to the sewer/chemical environment shall be resin rich and shall have no exposed fibers.
5. Tensile strength (ASTM D 638): 14,000 psi.
6. Flexural strength (ASTM D 790):25,000 psi.
7. Flexural modulus (ASTM D 790):1,000,000 psi.
8. Barcol hardness (ASTM D 2583): 40.
9. Stiffness (ASTM D2412):
Manhole Length (ft.) PSI
3-6 0.72
7-12 1.26
13-20 2.01
21-25 3.02
26-35 5.24
Packet Pg. 593 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06610-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Manhole Type: Provide metering manholes of the following type:
1. Fiberglass Dome Top
a. Full diameter access
b. Stainless steel hinge and lockable hasp
c. Stainless steel locking lifting arm
2. Height:
a. The manhole shall be 4-ft high from pipe invert.
3. Construction
a. One-piece construction
b. Fiberglass instrument shelf 12 inches deep by 18 inches wide. c. Fiberglass instrument mounting plate 18 inches high by 24 inches wide.
E. Flume Type:
1. Parshall flume, 3 inch throat width with integral inlet and outlet end adapters.
2. Parshall flume hydraulic capacity range of 7 gpm to 835 gpm F. Flume Options:
1. 5-mil mylar, laminated, high visibility staff gauge:
a. Graduated in tenth and hundredths of a foot.
2. 2 inch bushing for ultrasonic mounting stand.
3. 1 ¾ inch T-304 stainless steel ultrasonic mounting stand (for ¾ inch NPT sensor).
4. FRP grating over flume.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Install plumb, level, rigid and neat, as applicable.
C. Furnish and install all required fasteners and anchors for a complete installation.
3.2 GRATING AND COVERED GRATING
A. Install hold downs per manufacturer.
B. Provide cutouts at all penetrating and seal edges as specified
3.3 PREFABRICATED PARSHALL FLUME MANHOLE
A. Examination
1. Verify that the flume dimensions are correct and project conditions are suitable for installation. Do not proceed with installation until condition deficiencies have been corrected.
B. Installation
1. Install products in accordance with engineer’s instructions, plans, blueprints, etc, local codes, and in a manner consistent with the installation instruction and recommendation of the manufacturer.
Packet Pg. 594 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06610-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Ensure that the product is installed plumb and true, free of twist or warp, within the tolerances specified by the manufacturer and as indicated in the contract documents.
3. Nylon or fabric slings should be used in conjunction with a spreader bar to lift or move the manhole.
4. UNDER NO CONDITIONS SHALL CHAINS OR CABLES BE USED.
5. Excavate an area large enough to contain the manhole and the concrete hold-down slab while allowing for sufficient space to allow for a safe work environment.
6. Follow all OSHA requirements for open trench construction.
7. Clean the hold-down slab of all sharp objects and debris before laying the foam pad provided with the manhole.
8. Lower the manhole onto the concrete hold-down pad.
9. Drill holes in the foam and concrete hold-down pads to accept the stainless steel anchor bolts supplied by others.
10.Check to ensure that the flume is level form side to side and from front to back, adjust the hold-dwon pad and anchor bolts as necessary.
11.Connect and secure piping.
12. Grout under all section of the manhole above the concrete hold-down pad.
13.Backfill with pea gravel, ¼ inch to ¾ inch in diameter, using uniform lifts of no more than 12 inches.
14. WARNING : METERING MANHOLES MAY BE CLASSIFIED AS CONFINED SPACE ENTRY LOCATIONS. CONSULT ALL APPROPRIATE LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS BEFORE ENTERING.
C. Adjust and clean
1. Clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Remove trash and debris, and leave the site in a clean condition. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 595 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 06610-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 596 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 07211
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all building insulation.
2. Extent of each type of building insulation is shown.
3. Types of products required include the following:
a. Extruded polystyrene plastic insulation.
b. Miscellaneous materials and accessories.
B. Coordination:
1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the building insulations.
2. Notify other contractors in advance of the installation of the building insulations to provide other contractors with sufficient time for the installation of items included in their contracts that must be installed before the building insulations.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications:
1. Engage single installers for each type of building insulation who are skilled, trained and have a record of successful experience in the application of each product and who have a successful record of performing work in accordance with the recommendations and requirements of the manufacturer or who can submit evidence in writing of being acceptable to the manufacturer for production of guaranteed construction and who agree to employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in each type of Work.
2. Submit names and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects:
Packet Pg. 597 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
a. Names and telephone numbers of OWNERS, architects or ENGINEERs responsible for projects.
b. Approximate contract cost of the building insulation system installed.
c. Amount of area installed.
B. Source Quality Control:
1. Obtain building insulations, requiring a hydrochlorofluorocarbon blowing agent, from manufacturers who manufacture specified insulation using a blowing agent acceptable for use until the year 2020 complying with the requirements of the Copenhagen Amendments to the Montreal Protocol in all ways.
2. Provide a manufacturer who will provide complete technical services including preparation and review of Shop Drawings, installation methods and proposed detailing for the Work.
C. Performance Criteria:
1. Thermal Conductivity: The thicknesses shown are for the thermal conductivity, k-value at 75 F, specified for each material.
2. Provide adjusted thicknesses, based on thicknesses shown or specified for building insulations, as required to comply with required thermal resistances for use of material having a different thermal conductivity.
D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with fire-resistance and flammability ratings as shown and specified; and comply with code interpretations by governing authorities.
E. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified:
1. ASTM C 165, Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations, Test Method for.
2. ASTM C 177, Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus, Standard Test Methods for.
3. ASTM C 203, Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation, Test Method for.
4. ASTM C 236, Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box, Standard Test Method for.
5. ASTM C 272, Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions, Standard Test Method for.
6. ASTM C 303, Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block-Type Thermal Insulation, Standard Test Method for.
Packet Pg. 598 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
7. ASTM C 518, Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of Heat Flow Meter Apparatus, Standard Test Method for.
8. ASTM C 520, Density of Granular Loose Fill Insulations, Standard Test Method for.
9. ASTM C 531, Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concrete, Standard Test Method for.
10. ASTM C 549, Perlite Loose Fill Insulation, Standard Specification for.
11. ASTM C 553, Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Specifiction for.
12. ASTM C 578, Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation, Standard Specification for.
13. ASTM C 612, Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation, Specification for.
14. ASTM C 665, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing, Standard Specification for.
15. ASTM C 764, Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation, Specification for.
16. ASTM D 696, Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics between -30 Degrees C and 30 Degrees C, Standard Test Method for.
17. ASTM D 1621, Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics, Standard Test Method for.
18. ASTM D 1622, Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics, Standard Test Method for.
19. ASTM D 2126, Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging, Standard Test Method for.
20. ASTM D 2842, Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics, Standard Test Method for.
21. ASTM E 84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Standard Test Method for.
22. ASTM E 96, Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form, Standard Test Method for.
23. ASTM E 119, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
24. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated, UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
F. Codes: Comply with the applicable requirements of the 2006 International Building Code for types of building insulation work specified.
Packet Pg. 599 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of material specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations from the building insulation manufacturers, for each type of building insulation product. Include manufacturerís data substantiating that the materials comply with specified requirements.
2. Indicate by copy of transmittal form that installer has received copy of manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Test Reports: Submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of test reports verifying compliance with physical properties and environmental features specified herein.
2. Copies of testing agencies background and experience in preforming similar tests to those specified.
C. Certificates: Submit for approval copies of certificates stating that the manufacturer of the foam-type rigid board insulation has used an environmentally safe blowing agent complying with specified requirements.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials:
1. Deliver building insulation products in manufacturerís original, unopened, factory-sealed containers, bearing manufacturerís name and labels, accurately representing container contents as shown on approved Shop Drawings.
2. Damaged materials shall be permanently removed from Site by CONTRACTOR.
3. Do not deliver insulation materials to the Site before the time of installation.
4. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow uninterrupted continuity of the Work.
B. Storage of Materials:
1. Store materials in original, undamaged containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.
2. Store all materials in a dry, enclosed area, off the ground and away form all possible contact with water, ice or snow.
Packet Pg. 600 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Prevent damage to materials during storage, primarily by minimizing the amount of time they are stored on-Site before being incorporated into construction systems. Store only sufficient quantity of building insulation materials on-Site as necessary for the continuous advancement of the Work without causing delay.
C. Handling of Materials:
1. Handle materials carefully in order to avoid damage and breakage or compressing of boards to less than their specified thickness, or other damage.
2. Do not open containers, or expose materials to detrimental conditions or physical damage. Materials which are so exposed shall be removed from the Site and shall not be incorporated into the Work. If incorporated into the Work they shall be removed at no additional expense to OWNER.
3. Handle materials in a manner which prevents inclusion of foreign materials.
4. Do not open packages or containers until all necessary preparatory Work is complete and installation will begin immediately.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection:
1. Do not allow building insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Provide continuous protection of materials against damage, wetting and moisture absorption primarily by storing materials under cover and above ground and away from all other construction traffic.
2. Protect foam plastic building insulation from exposure to sunlight.
3. Do not allow building insulations to come into contact with welding operations or other fire or ignition sources.
4. Do not overload the building structure or damage in-place construction system with the weight of stored materials or use of equipment.
5. Protect materials against damage by construction activities.
B. Scheduling:
1. Proceed with building insulation Work only when preceding Work is ready to receive the Work of this Section.
2. Proceed with the building insulation and associated Work only after Packet Pg. 601 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
curbs, blocking, substrate board, nailer strips, vents, drains and other projections through the substrates have been installed, and when the substrate construction and framing of openings is complete.
3. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and tradesmen required for the installation of the building insulation and backfilling operations are at the Site and are ready to follow with the Work in a manner which will not leave the Work vulnerable to damage or deterioration.
4. Do not advance the installation of building insulation materials beyond that which is necessary for proper sequencing of the Work. Do not advance Work when there is no proper and secure protection from damaging weather and construction activities.
C. Environmental Conditions:
1. Complete the installation and concealment of building insulation materials as rapidly as possible in order to avoid damage from adjacent construction operations and adverse weather conditions.
2. Install building insulations only when weather and temperature conditions comply with building insulations manufacturersí written recommendations.
3. Install building insulations only when damaging environmental condition are not forecasted for the time when exposed systems materials components would be exposed to potential damage.
4. Protect Work from precipitation, frost and direct sun.
5. Do not apply pressure sensitive tape when temperature is below 35 F or above 110 F.
6. Record decisions, conditions and agreements to proceed with the Work when weather conditions might be unfavorable. State the reasons for proceeding, along with the names of persons involved, and any changes or revisions, if required, to allow the Work to proceed.
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Do not change products, system components, or manufacturers after Shop Drawing approval by ENGINEER.
B. Clearly identify, in a manner which is highlighted to ENGINEER, all proposed substitutions, modifications, variations and unspecified features.
Provide complete comparative data with specified products at time of Shop Drawing submission.
Packet Pg. 602 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Foam Plastic Insulations: Provide the following types:
1. General: Rigid, closed-cell, thermally stabilized, extruded, hydrochloroflurocarbon blown, foam board insulation consisting of 100 percent virgin extruded polystyrene modified resin complying with ASTM C 578.
2. Provide a blowing agent with lowest available ozone depletion potential, such as HCFC-142b, or better. HCFC-141b will not be approved by ENGINEER.
3. Perimeter Foundation Insulations: Provide very high-load-resisting, rigid foam board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type V. a. Physical Properties: Provide the following:
1) Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C 177 and ASTM C 518: 0.20 Btu/in./hr./sf/°F.
2) Compressive Strength (psi at 5% deformation) ASTM D 1621:
100 psi minimum.
3) Flexural Strength, ASTM C 203: 100 psi minimum.
4) Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, ASTM D 696: 3.5 x 10-5 inches/in./°F.
5) Water Vapor Absorption, ASTM C 272: Less than 0.1% by volume maximum.
6) Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96: 0.3-0.8 perms/inch maximum.
7) Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: 5.
8) Smoke Developed, ASTM E 84: 165 maximum.
b. Thickness: 1 layer each 2-inches.
c. Width: 24-inches.
d. Length: 96-inches.
e. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1) STYROFOAM 100 HIGH LOAD by The Dow Chemical Company. 2) Foamular 1000 by Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. 3) Or equal.
4. Cavity Wall Rigid Insulation Board: Provide the following:
a. Rigid, rectangular boards of extruded polystyrene complying with ASTM C 578, Type X and IV.
b. Physical Properties: Provide the following:
Packet Pg. 603 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1) Minimum Compressive Strength, (at 10 percent deformation), ASTM D 1621: 25 psi.
2) Flame Spread, ASTM E 84: 10 maximum.
3) Smoke Development, ASTM E 84: 165 maximum.
4) Vapor Transmission, ASTM E 96: 1.1 perms/inch.
5) Thermal Resistance, ASTM C 177: 5.0/inch.
6) Maximum Water Absorption, ASTM C 272: 0.10% by volume. c. Size: 1 layer of 16-inches by 96-inches by 2-inches thick. d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1) CAVITYMATE Plus by The Dow Chemical Company.
2) Foamular 250 Square Edge by Owens-Corning Fiberglas
Corporation.
3) Or equal.
B. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: Provide the following:
1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: The type recommended by the insulation manufacturer, and complying with fire-resistance requirements.
2. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the type of application shown and condition of substrate.
3. Protection Board: Fiberboard sheathing or heavy duty asphaltic panels as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
4. Adhesive Tapes: Complete selection of insulation manufacturer's recommended taping materials.
5. Bitumen: Asphalt, ASTM D 449.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR and his installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the building insulation Work is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER.
Packet Pg. 604 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-9
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Verify that surfaces to receive building insulation are clean of all debris, dirt and other contamination before installation begins in any area.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to Site conditions, submit to ENGINEER specific recommendations from manufacturer for approval before proceeding with the Work.
2. Extend all insulations full thickness over entire surface to be insulated.
Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation.
3. Apply the number of layers of insulation specified, each of the required thickness, or the required thickness to provide the thermal value indicated, unless otherwise shown or required, to make up the total thickness.
B. Unit-Type Building Insulation:
1. Apply insulation units of the type shown to the substrate by the method indicated. If not otherwise indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
2. Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying mastic or sealant, of the type recommended by the manufacturer, to the edge of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with mastic or sealant.
3. Exercise extreme care to avoid damage and soiling of faces on insulation units which will remain exposed-to-view. Align joints accurately, with adjoining surfaces set flush.
4. Set vapor barrier faced units with vapor barrier to warm side of construction, (usually toward inside), except as otherwise shown. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
5. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barriers, using adhesive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and seal each continuous Packet Pg. 605 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-10
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
area of insulation to surrounding construction so as to ensure vapor-tight installation of the units.
6. Set reflective foil-faced units accurately with air space in front of foil as shown. Provide not less than 0.75 inch air space wherever possible.
7. Support underfloor blanket insulation with vapor barrier up (if any). In wood frame construction, support by continuous wire mesh stapled to bottom of joists, or on wire arches impaled into joist walls, at 12 inch spacing near bottom of joists; or provide type of blanket insulation which has permeable kraft paper face with nailing flanges.
C. Cavity Wall Rigid Insulation Board:
1. Install exterior wall rigid insulation board after all concrete unit masonry Work is complete.
2. Apply a single layer of insulation cut to fit snugly and uniformly and in continuous contact with edges of continuous masonry horizontal joint reinforcement over the entire plane of the wall.
3. Set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of board-type cavity wall insulation.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. All components of the Work shall be protected from detrimental weather conditions and until construction operations including, but not limited to, backfilling, framing and sheathing, aluminum siding and concrete unit masonry Work, is completed and acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Work which cannot for reasons acceptable to ENGINEER be covered with complete construction system before onset of weather detrimental to the Work, shall be completely covered and protected in such a manner as to deflect precipation from the installation without damaging adjacent Work.
C. Protect building insulations from all damage and abuse from all other contractors and installers involved on the Site until final acceptance by OWNER.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submit results of all testing to ENGINEER along with recommendations for remedial Work. Do not delay job progress. Coordinate the submission of tests and remedial Work in a manner which does not impact the Packet Pg. 606 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07211-11
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
acceptability of substrate and which permits expeditious completion of finishing Work.
3.6 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. System components which are dislodged, damaged, expanded, broken, penetrated, or crushed by subsequent installation operations or damaged by detrimental weather shall be immediately replaced with undamaged material in compliance with the Specifications and properly protected as specified.
B. Only the original installer shall repair or replace deteriorated or defective Work.
3.7 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Do not allow construction traffic which is not associated with the installation of building insulation in the area of Work. Protect the area from access by other installers and contractors until the Work of this Section has been incorporated into finished construction systems.
B. Building insulations which have become wet, damaged, or deteriorated shall be promptly removed from the Site and replaced with materials meeting the requirements of this Specification.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 607 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 608 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07320-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 07320
STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This Section applies to design, manufacture and installation of standing seam metal roof paneling and associated materials.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A653: Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot Dip Process b. ASTM A792: Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process c. ASTM B209: Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate
2. Underwriters Laboratory
a. UL Building Materials Directory
3. Sheet Metal and Air Condition Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) a. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 1993 Edition
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
a. AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Manual
5. Aluminum Association
a. Aluminum Design Manual
6. Metal Construction Association (MCA)
a. Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines
7. Code References:
a. ASCE 7, Minimum Loads for Buildings and Other Structures b. CBC, California Building Code
B. Experience:
1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in manufacturing standing seam metal roofing.
2. Panel installer shall have a minimum of two (2) years experience in the installation of standing seam metal roofing and shall show evidence of successful completion of at least three (3) projects of similar size, scope, and complexity.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing roof plan with layout of panels, clips, clip attachment, underlayment and sections of each flashing/trim condition for approval prior to fabrication. Drawings shall contain material type, metal thickness and finish. Drawings shall distinguish between factory and field fabrication.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturerís specifications, standard profile sheet, product data brochure and finish warranty.
C. Samples:
Packet Pg. 609 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07320-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Submit sample 12î long x full panel width showing proposed metal gauge, seam profile and specified finish.
2. Submit manufacturerís standard colors for OWNERís selection. Color shall match the existing pump station building roofing.
D. Test Reports: Submit the test reports prepared by Underwriters Laboratory indicating wind uplift rating of the proposed roof system. The manufacturer must be listed by name in the UL Directory.
E. Certification: Submit manufacturerís certification that materials and finishes meet specification requirements.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Panels and flashings shall be protected and properly packaged to protect against transportation damage in transit to the jobsite.
B. Upon delivery, exercise care in unloading, stacking, moving, storing and erecting panels and flashings to prevent twisting, bending, scratching or denting.
C. Store panels and flashings in a safe, dry environment under a waterproof covering to prevent water damage. Allow adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. Panels and flashings with strippable film shall not be stored in direct sunlight.
D. Upon installation immediately remove strippable film from panels and flashings. Protect panels and flashings from foot traffic and from all other trades.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Standing seam metal roof manufacturer shall provide a twenty (20) year warranty on the paint finish covering chalking, cracking, checking, chipping, blistering, peeling, flaking, and fading.
B. Applicator shall furnish written warranty for a two (2) year period from date of substantial completion of building covering repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
A. Roofing shall match the color and profile of the existing pump station building roofing.
B. Performance Requirements: Provide factory formed, prefinished, concealed clip structural standing seam metal roof system that has been pretested and certified by manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under installed conditions.
1. Roof system shall meet the wind uplift test requirements in accordance with UL 580 Class 90 when the panels are attached to a substructure meeting the assembly requirements of UL 580.
Packet Pg. 610 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07320-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Structural Requirements: Engineer panels for structural properties in accordance with the latest edition of American Iron and Steel Instituteís Cold Formed Steel Design Manual using ìeffective widthî concept and Aluminum Associationís Aluminum Design Manual.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. System shall be designed to withstand service conditions described in 01610 ñ General Equipment Requirements and be in compliance with all applicable codes and regulations.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Roof Panels:
1. Panels shall be constructed from 24 gauge minimum, Grade 50 (50 ksi yield strength) structural steel with AZ50 (0.50 oz./ft.2) aluminum-zinc alloy coating, both conforming to ASTM A792.
2. Each panel shall be formed with a ±1-1/2î seam height
3. Panel width will be 18-inches from seam to seam.
4. Each panel shall be designed to be screwed to the roof substrate, then have the adjacent panel snapped together or mechanically seamed, with a field-operated electric- seaming machine provided by the manufacturer, in such a way that all screws are concealed.
5. Roof panels shall use a standard UL 90 one-piece roof clip allowing for thermal movement of the panel system.
6. Panels shall be designed for use on roofs with pitch as shallow as 3-inch per foot
7. The panel system shall be a true standing seam shape requiring no trapezoidal foam closures, plugs, or fillers at eaves.
8. Texture: panels shall be smooth or have striations to eliminate oil canning potential.
B. Underlayment:
1. Asphalt-saturated organic felt meeting ASTM D226, Type II (No. 3).
2. Ice and Water Shield Waterproofing Membrane: 40 mil self-adhered roofing underlayment meeting ASTM E96.
C. Flashing, Roof Jacks, and Trim
1. All flashing, roof jacks, and trim shall be of the same material, gauge, finish, and color as the roof panels and fabricated in accordance with standard SMACNA procedure and details.
2. Provide transition rib covers where roofing changes pitch or Z-closure made from the same material.
3. Provide rake and eave trim at the roof perimeter.
4. Provide roof jacks at all roof penetrations.
5. Fabricate gutters and downspouts in the same gauge, material, finish and color as the roof panels.
6. Flashings shall be designed and installed to allow thermal expansion of the roofing system.
D. Closures:
1. Ridge and hip closures shall be protected and supported by a formed metal closure manufactured from the same material, color and finish as the panels.
2. Metal closures shall be factory fabricated and field-cut as needed.
E. Finish:
Packet Pg. 611 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07320-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Metal Preparation: all metal shall have the surfaces carefully prepared for painting on a continuous process coil coating line by alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of chemical conversion coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with an acid rinse, and thorough drying.
2. Prime Coating: a base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to interact with the top-coat, shall be applied to the prepared surfaces by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.20 ± 0.05 mils. This prime coat shall be oven cured prior to application of finish coat.
3. Exterior Coating: a KynarÆ 500/HylarÆ 5000 finish coating shall be applied over the primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.80 ± 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of 1.00 ± 0.10. This finish coating shall be oven-cured.
4. Interior Finish Coating: a washcoat shall be applied on the reverse side over the primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.30 ± 0.05 mils for a total dry film thickness of 0.50 ± 0.10 mils. The washcoat shall be oven-cured.
5. Color: Color shall be as noted on Drawings, or as selected by OWNER.
F. Fasteners:
1. Clips to Substrate: screws shall be #10 diameter, self-tapping type, zinc-plated steel, with Phillips style pancake head.
2. Flashings to Panels: exposed screws shall be zinc plated with a #14 x 1" combination steel and neoprene washer, color to match panel.
G. Sealants:
1. Shall not contain oil, asbestos or asphalt.
2. Field applied panel end sealant shall be mastic tape sealant.
3. Exposed sealant shall be one-part polyurethane joint sealant, color to coordinate with roof panels.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Field dimensions shall be taken prior to fabrication to verity jobsite conditions.
B. Roof panels shall be formed in continuous lengths. End-laps will not be allowed.
C. Panels shall be roll formed on a stationary industrial type rolling mill. Portable roll formers, rented or owned by the installer, are not acceptable.
D. Fabricate flashings from the same material as the roof system.
E. Follow tolerances in MCAís Preformed Metal Wall Guidelines.
2.5 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER:
A. ATAS International: Dutch Seam
B. Fabral: Thin Seam
C. MBCI: LokSeam
D. Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 612 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07320-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine roof deck for conditions that would prevent proper application of roofing.
Immediately notify Contractor and Engineer of defects, and do not proceed with roofing operation until defects are corrected.
B. Verify that surfaces to receive roofing are smooth, sound, clean and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to manufacturers written instructions, the standard set forth in the SMACNA architectural sheet metal manuals and the approved shop drawings detailed for the project.
B. Underlayment:
1. Provide a double layer of underlayment.
2. Provide 18î wide starter strip of underlayment at the eaves, followed by a 36î wide strip of underlayment which completely overlaps the 18î wide starter strip.
3. Continue with consecutive 36î wide strips of underlayment, overlapping 19î at each course, shingle-style.
4. Total of a double layer of underlayment plus 2î overlap at the horizontal seams is required.
5. Overlap vertical seams 6î and minimize their occurrence.
6. Provide ice and water shield membrane at all valley and eave conditions as well as any area at less than a 3:12 slope.
C. Panel Installation:
1. Install panels straight with the seams parallel, conforming to the design as indicated.
2. Install panel system so it is watertight, without waves, warps, buckles or distortions, and allow for thermal movement considerations.
3. Abrasive devices shall not be used to cut on or near the roof panel system.
4. Apply sealant tape or caulking as necessary at flashing and panel joints to prevent water penetration.
5. Remove any strippable film immediately upon exposure to direct sunlight.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Dispose of any excess materials and debris from jobsite.
B. Remove filings, grease, stains, marks, or excess sealants from roof panel system to prevent staining.
C. Protect work from damage from other trades until final acceptance. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 613 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 614 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07600-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 07600
METAL FLASHING, GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS AND OTHER ROOFING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show joints, types and location of fasteners, and special shapes.
1.2 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Package and protect during shipment.
B. Inspect for damage, dampness, and wet storage stains upon delivery to the Work site.
C. Remove and replace damaged or permanently stained materials that cannot be restored to like-new condition.
D. Carefully handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends.
E. Do not open packages until ready for use.
F. Store materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated areas until immediately prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, G90, commercial quality copper bearing steel, thickness 24 gauge, unless otherwise shown.
2.2 DOWNSPOUTS AND GUTTERS
A. Same as galvanized metal flashing.
Packet Pg. 615 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07600-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.3 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Solder: ASTM B32, alloy composition Sn 50.
B. Soldering Flux: ASTM B32, Type RA.
C. Sealer Tape: Polyisobutylene sealer tape as specified in Section 07900, JOINT SEALANTS.
D. Isolation Paint: As specified in Section 09900, PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS, System No. 27.
E. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20-mil thick minimum polyester.
F. Plastic Roof Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.
G. Fasteners:
1. For Galvanized Steelwork: Steel, galvanized per ASTM A153 or stainless steel fasteners.
2. Nails: Roofing nailhead, 10-gauge spiral or ring shank, lengths as required to penetrate wood at least 3/4-inch.
H. Gutter Guard (Cover): Provide low profile perforated metal gutter guards compatible with the gutter style supplied. Gutter guards shall be riveted or screwed to the lip of the gutter.
2.4 FABRICATION OF FLASHING
A. Field measure prior to fabrication.
B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
C. Accurately form flashings to shapes shown and detailed, with angles and lines in true alignment.
D. Form angles true to line and surfaces free of waves and buckles.
E. Form bends to 1/16-inch inside radius.
Packet Pg. 616 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07600-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Hem exposed edges.
G. Reinforcements and Supports: Provide same material as flashing unless other material is shown. Steel, where shown or required, shall be galvanized or stainless.
H. Rigid Joints and Seams: Make mechanically strong. Solder galvanized and stainless steel metal joints. Do not use solder to transmit stress.
I. At exposed ends of counterflashing furnish weathertight closures.
J. Neutralize soldering flux.
K. Solvent clean sheet metal. Surfaces to be in contact with roofing or otherwise concealed shall be coated with isolation paint.
2.5 FABRICATION OF DOWNSPOUTS AND GUTTERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
B. Form downspouts and gutters in maximum lengths as practicable to sizes and shapes indicated on Drawings or to field-fit the locations shown on the drawings.
C. Telescope end joints 1-1/2 inches and lock longitudinal joints of downspouts.
D. Furnish elbows at bottom where downspouts empty onto splash blocks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Flashing:
1. Coordinate flashing Work with roofing Work for weathertight and watertight assembly.
2. Isolate metal from wood and concrete and from dissimilar metal with isolation tape or two coats of isolation paint.
3. Use only stainless steel fasteners to connect isolated dissimilar metals.
Packet Pg. 617 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07600-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. Set flanges of flashings and roof accessories on continuous sealer tape or in plastic roof cement on top of deck. Nail flanges through sealer tape and at 3-inch maximum spacing. Touch up isolation paint on flanges.
5. Joints, Fastenings, Reinforcements, and Supports: Sized and located as required to preclude distortion or displacement due to thermal expansion and contraction.
6. Provide continuous holddown clips at counterflashing and edge drips.
7. Conceal fastenings wherever possible.
8. Set flashing and sheet metal to straight, true lines with exposed faces aligned in proper plane without bulges or waves.
B. Downspouts and Gutters: Anchor downspouts to wall with straps of same material as downspouts. Install gutters, scuppers, and conductor heads as indicated on Drawings.
3.2 FINISH
A. Exposed Surfaces of Flashing and Sheet Metalwork: Free of dents, scratches, abrasions, or other visible defects, and clean and ready for painting where applicable. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 618 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07900-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation and installation instructions. Indicate where each product is proposed to be used. Provide sealant certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 where sealant is in direct contact with potable water.
B. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Applicator Qualification: Documentation showing minimum of 5 years' experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope.
2. Certificates of Compliance: Proposed materials meet Specification requirements.
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 and 80 degrees F (4 and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant Characteristics:
1. Uniform, homogeneous.
2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed.
3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding.
4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661 method.
5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible.
B. Sealant Color: To match adjacent surfaces or as selected by ENGINEER.
C. One-Part Polyurethane, Immersible:
1. Polyurethane base, single-component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25.
2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water.
3. Designed to be used where the maximum depth of sealant will not exceed 1/2 inch.
4. Provide sealant certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61 where sealant is in direct contact with potable water.
5. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-1a.
b. Tremco: Vulkem 116.
c. Or approved equal.
Packet Pg. 619 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07900-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
6. Manufacturers and Products for Self-Leveling:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-1C SL.
b. Tremco: Vulkem 45 SSL.
c. Or approved equal.
D. Two-Part Polyurethane, Immersible:
1. Polyurethane elastomeric, two-part, self leveling (or gun grade), non-staining, which cures at ambient temperature and conforms to ASTM C920.
2. Designed to be used where the maximum depth of sealant will exceed 1/2 inch or where chemical curing is required.
3. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Sika Construction: Sikaflex-2C.
b. Tremco: Dymeric 240FC.
c. Or approved equal.
2.2 BACKUP MATERIAL
A. Nongassing, extruded, closed-cell round polyethylene foam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Provide for joints greater than 1/2-inch deep. Backup material should be sized to maintain 2:1 width to depth ratio to the greatest extent possible.
C. Manufacturers and Products:
1. Dow Corning; Ethafoam SB.
2. Sonneborn; Sonofoam.
3. Or approved equal.
2.3 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Provide bond breaker tape in the bottom of joints to prevent 3-sided joint sealant adhesion when backup material is not used.
B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unless approved by the sealant manufacturer.
B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193.
Packet Pg. 620 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07900-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints of 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self-leveling (Grade P) joint sealant.
D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag (Grade NS) joint sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, are acceptable to receive sealant.
B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, and other foreign materials.
1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge.
2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
C. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
E. Carefully follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing multi-component products.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform intended function.
1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize number of splices.
3. Tape sealant may be used as joint filler if approved by sealant manufacturer.
B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer and in the bottom of joints to prevent 3-sided joint sealant adhesion.
C. Seal joints around window, door and louver frames, expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer's recommendation and instructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids.
E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed.
1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool.
2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of sealing application.
Packet Pg. 621 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 07900-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 622 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08100-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 08100
METAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide and install metal doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Applicable information for each type of door and frame, including:
1. Frame conditions, complete anchorage details, dimensions, glazing, fire ratings, etc.
2. Reference door numbers used on Drawings and in Door Schedule on shop drawings.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Identify each door with number used on Drawings and in Door Schedule.
B. Store doors upright, in protected dry area and provide for air circulation around each door. Store doors at least 4-inches off of the floor to prevent water damage and wear of door bottom on floor. Do not cover doors in plastic tarps or other storage provisions which promote water damage and rust. If door packaging becomes wet, remove it immediately.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOLLOW STEEL DOORS
A. General:
1. Doors and Frames shall conform to SDI 100, except as modified herein.
2. Doors and Frame cutouts, anchors and reinforcement shall conform to SDI 107 and ANSI A115 to receive hardware as specified elsewhere.
B. Materials:
1. Doors, frames and frame components shall be manufactured from commercial quality carbon steel conforming to ASTM designation A366, with an A60 zinc-iron alloy coating conforming to ASTM designation A653.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Flush Panel Doors: 16-gauge, Grade III, Model 1, with honeycomb or polyurethane core.
2. Trim for doors with glass cutouts shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel. If the trim is installed using screws, screws shall be only visible from the non-secure side of the door. Trim shall be flush or shall protrude no more than 1/16î from the door face, and shall be the same on both sides of the door.
3. All doors shall have flush end closure at top of doors to eliminate moisture penetration. Door tops shall no have holes or openings.
Packet Pg. 623 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08100-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. All doors shall include a self-adjusting, concealed door sweep installed in the bottom channel. The bottom seal shall not include springs.
5. Glass Lites
a. Provide door with a narrow lite (N) located along the lock edge of the door with exposed glass dimensions of approximately 4î x 25î where indicated in the door schedule.
b. Provide door with a half glass (G) where indicated in the door schedule. c. Glazing:
1) All glass shall be ºî thick fully tempered safety glass, manufactured by a horizontal process.
2) The tempered glass shall meet, at the time of installation, quality and strength requirements of ASTM C-1036 and ASTM C-1048 and the safety criteria of CPSC 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1-1984.
3) Glass shall be appropriate for service in environmental conditions from -10 degrees Fahrenheit air temperature to 130 degrees Fahrenheit air temperature.
4) Glass shall be labeled as follows: Each pane of safety glass shall be identified by a label specifying the labeler, whether the manufacturer or installer, the type and thickness of glass, and the safety glazing standard with which it complies. Label shall be acid etched, sand blasted, ceramic fired or an embossed mark or otherwise written so that it cannot be removed without destroying the glass.
6. Door swing shall be as shown on Drawings.
D. Metal Frames:
1. Products of hollow metal door manufacturer, constructed to coordinate with hollow metal door.
2. Frames for Doors 14-Gauge: Welded type, of cross-section shown.
3. Finished size, shape, and profile of frame members as shown.
4. Concealed fasteners or welding are preferred to through-the-face fasteners.
5. Identification: Stamp opening number, as shown on Drawings and in Door Schedule, on center hinge reinforcement of each frame.
E. Finish:
1. Doors and frames shall be cleaned and phosphate treated.
2. Doors and frames shall be galvanized with A60 or G60 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525 (Wipe Coat galvanized coating is not acceptable).
3. Doors and frames shall be finished with a baked-on rust-inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.3. Doors shall be field finished in accordance with Section 09900.
F. Manufacturers and Models:
1. Steelcraft L series with F series frame
2. Curries 727 series with M type frame
3. Or equal.
Packet Pg. 624 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08100-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare rough opening to accept metal frame. Identify and report any deficiencies in rough opening to Engineer prior to installing metal frame.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Frames:
1. Set all frames in accordance with SDI 105.
2. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work.
3. Brace frames until permanent anchors are set.
4. Set anchors for frames as work progresses.
5. Install anchors at hinge and strike levels.
6. Use temporary setting spreaders at all locations.
7. Use intermediate spreaders to assure proper door clearances and header braces for grouted frames.
8. Install frames in prepared openings in concrete and masonry walls using countersunk bolts and expansion shields.
B. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Install hollow metal doors in frames using hardware specified in Section 08700 Door Hardware.
2. Clearances at edge of doors
a. Between door and frame at head and jambs: 1/8 inch.
b. At meeting edges pairs of doors and at mullions: 1/8 inch. c. At transom panels, without transom bars: 1/8 inch.
d. At sills without thresholds: 5/8 inch maximum above finish floor. e. At sills with thresholds: 1/8 inch above threshold.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Remove dirt and excess sealants, mortar or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces.
B. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Use shims if necessary to allow for proper closing.
C. Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces - Reprime/paint to match finish.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 625 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08100-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 626 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08700-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 08700
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide all materials, equipment, and accessories to furnish and install door hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Product Data: Manufacturersí literature for each item of finish hardware required herein, clearly marked.
2. Finish Hardware Schedule: Furnish complete and detailed schedule, show product items, numbers, and finishes for all hardware for each separate opening.
3. Special Tools: Provide listing and description of usage.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Supplier: A recognized supplier of architectural finish hardware, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the vicinity of the Project for not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs, an architectural hardware consultant.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide secure storage for all finish hardware until installation is made.
B. Before delivery, clearly identify and tag each item of hardware with respect to specified description and location of installation.
1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Provide two sets of special tools for installation and maintenance of hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide all door hardware from a single manufacturer in order to have consistency in appearance, function and maintenance procedures.
B. Fasteners:
1. All fasteners shall be type 304 stainless steel.
Packet Pg. 627 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08700-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Butt Hinges:
1. Conforming to ANSI A156.1-88.
2. Quantity per Door Leaf (Minimum):
DOOR HEIGHT MINIMUM NUMBER OF HINGES PER LEAF
Up to 5í-0î 2 ea
5í-0î to 7í-7î 3 ea
7í-7î to 10í-0î 4 ea
10í-0î to 12í-6î 5 ea
Over 12í-6î One for every 30î of door height, rounding up
3. Hinge Size: Except as otherwise specified or as required to comply with UL and NFPA, provide hinges of the following sizes:
a. Up to 36" wide: 4½" heavy weight.
b. Over 36î to 48" wide: 5" heavy weight.
c. Over 48" wide: 6" heavy weight.
4. Types of Hinges: Full-mortise type, ball-bearing hinges swaged for mortise applications, inner leaf beveled, square cornered.
5. Width: Minimum for clearance of trim and 180-degree swing.
6. Exterior Hinges: Non-removable pin.
7. Joint Tolerance: 0.012-inch maximum, gauged in CLOSED position.
8. Material: type 304 stainless steel.
a. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630.
9. Hinge Manufacturers and Models:
a. Stanley FBB191-32D
b. McKinney TB2314
c. Or Equal.
D. Exit Devices
1. Provide exit devices on all exit doors complying with ANSI A156.3.
2. Furnish cylinder where required.
3. Trim:
a. Levers: Sargent LNL; Von Duprin 06, or equal.
b. Strikes: Use open back strike.
4. Finish: Satin chromium-plated No. 626.
5. Exit Device Manufacturers and Models:
a. Sargent 8313ET X LNL
b. Von Duprin 9975L-996-06
c. Or Equal.
E. Closers:
1. Provide closers on all exterior doors or as indicated in the door schedule which comply with ANSI A156.4.
2. Size closers in accordance with manufacturerís standards. Mount regular arm closers on pull side of doors. Mount parallel arm closers on push side of doors. On pair of doors provide closer on active leaf only, unless noted otherwise.
3. Closer Manufacturers and Models:
a. LCN 4110 Series
b. Sargent 351 Series
c. Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 628 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08700-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Thresholds:
1. Provide threshold at each door: One-piece full width of opening; extend beyond jamb where indicated.
2. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors at concrete.
3. Finish: Mill finish aluminum, unless indicated otherwise.
4. Threshold Manufacturers and Models:
a. Pemko 274X4AFG
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. S407A
c. Or Equal.
G. Weatherstrip:
1. Provide complete weatherstrip system at exterior doors, including rubber or vinyl at jambs and head, door sweep, rain drip, astragal seal for 2-leaf doors, and all other weatherstripping necessary to provide a weather-sealed door system which does not allow air or moisture movement through the gap between the door and frame.
H. Stops and Holders:
1. Provide stops and holders for all doors in accordance with ANSI A156.16.
2. Finish: Satin chromium-plated No. 626.
3. Stop/Holder Manufacturers and Models:
a. Ives WS445
b. Hager Companies 256
c. Or Equal.
2.2 KEYING
A. Coordinate Keying System with OWNER. Provide master-keying and local-keying to match OWNERís keying system.
B. Provide removable construction core system for use during construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. In accordance with manufacturerís written instructions.
B. Make Work neat and secure, develop full strength of components, and provide proper function.
C. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes during hardware installation.
D. Latchbolts: Install to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers or manually. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage latchbolt in strike.
E. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid structural backing or solid blocking in hollow walls.
Packet Pg. 629 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 08700-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Thresholds:
1. Cope ends neatly to profile of jamb.
2. Set in sealant and seal ends to jambs.
G. Hardware: Adjust for easy, noise-free operation.
H. Replace damaged hardware items.
3.2 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as noted or detailed otherwise.
B. Door Silencers: Install 3 inches from top and bottom of jamb and 1 inch above strike at single doors, and 3 inches from edges of doors in head for pairs of doors.
3.3 MANUFACTURERíS SERVICES
A. Deliver permanent lock cores to the site.
B. Remove temporary construction cores and insert permanent cores.
C. Inspect each lock set to ensure permanent cores are operating satisfactorily.
D. Deliver to OWNER change and control keys for the permanent system.
E. Return temporary construction cores to the manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until Substantial Completion.
B. Fit, dismantle, and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting work.
C. Protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations.
D. Remove protective measures and permanent lock cylinders installed prior to final cleaning.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 630 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09890-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 09890
CHEMICAL RESISTANT CONCRETE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section covers the supply and application of chemical-resistant coatings for the protection of concrete surfaces from corrosive chemicals.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall have been manufacturing proposed coating system for a minimum of five (5) years. Upon request, manufacturer shall provide a minimum of ten (10) reference installations where the coating system has been used in a similar application.
B. Applicator shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience applying similar coating systems.
C. Coating system manufacturer shall provide extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary. Guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the OWNER, removal and replacement of coating system if it is found defective within 2 years of initial application.
D. Provide detailed information on all materials in the proposed coating system, including:
1. MSDS
2. Detailed product specification
3. Test results for chemical services listed herein
4. Complete application instructions including detailed information on application of coating system around drains and at concrete joints.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Coatings Manufacturer shall submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of manufacturer's technical information and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Specify exactly which product is being proposed for each coating type (as specified below). This may be accomplished through a reference table along with information on the various products, or by a separate, tabbed section with information on products being submitted for each system in a separate tab of a binder. Submittal of general manufacturerís literature without detailing which product is proposed for each paint system will be unacceptable.
2. Letter from the Coatings Manufacturer certifying the Coatings Installer as factory trained and qualified.
3. Furnish copies of the final, approved submittal to the coatings installer so that it is clear which product is to be used for which each system.
4. Test reports from an independent testing laboratory confirming chemical resistance of coating for chemicals contained in chemical service areas, described below.
Packet Pg. 631 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09890-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered in original factory packaging, clearly marked.
B. Materials shall be stored according to manufacturerís written storage instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER: PROVIDE:
A. General Polymers Brands, The Sherwin-Williams Co., Tom Jakubik, (208) 520-1010 B. Or equal.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Coating system shall be applied to outdoor chemical containment area. Area will be subjected to light foot traffic and maintenance equipment.
1. Chemical containment area: concrete floors, walls, and sump
2. Chemical Service Areas:
a. 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite
b. 38% Ferric Chloride
2.3 COATING SYSTEM
A. Flexible Epoxy/Urethane System (System CRC-1):
1. Primer: 100% solids penetrating epoxy primer.
a. General Polymers 3579 Standard Primer/Binder.
b. Or Equal.
2. Basecoat: 100% elastomeric epoxy. Fillers may be required by the coating manufacturer for application of basecoat to vertical surfaces.
a. General Polymers 3555 Epo-Flex HD Epoxy Coating.
b. Or Equal.
3. Horizontal Surface Wear Coat: 100% solids elastomeric epoxy. 60-mesh sand shall be provided for slip resistance.
a. General Polymers 3555 Epo-Flex HD Epoxy Coating.
b. Or Equal.
4. Topcoat: General Polymers 4685 100% solids aliphatic urethane, zero VOC, suitable to 72- hour exposure to chemical services listed herein.
5. Colors: As selected by OWNER.
B. Provide 2 gallons of unopened top-coating material for future use by OWNER.
Packet Pg. 632 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09890-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Surfaces to be coated shall be prepared per coating system manufacturer.
2. Provide ENGINEER minimum 3 days notice prior to start of surface preparation and coating system application.
3. Perform surface preparation in the presence of ENGINEER, unless ENGINEER grants prior approval to perform the work in ENGINEERís absence.
4. Schedule inspection with ENGINEER for both surface preparation and coatings system application.
B. Concrete Surfaces:
1. Allow concrete 30 days cure time prior to application
2. Remove all foreign substances from the surface using solvent, detergent, or other suitable means.
3. Brush-Off Blast Clean surface to remove all laitance, curing compounds, contaminants, loose concrete, and provide a surface similar to 20-40 grit sandpaper.
4. Secure coating manufacturerís recommendations for additional preparation as required for excessive bug holes exposed after blast cleaning.
5. Apply fillers/surfaces as required by the coating systems manufacturer.
6. Ensure surfaces are dry prior to coating.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Application of coating system shall comply with manufacturerís written instructions.
B. Apply coating system to areas shown in the Drawings.
1. Where equipment is shown within the area to be coated, coatings shall be applied prior to equipment installation.
2. Coatings shall be applied to all construction joints, drains, and other fittings within the designated application area.
C. Components shall be mixed per manufacturerís instructions until homogeneous.
D. Temperature: Apply coating only when substrate, ambient air, and coating material are 65 degrees F or above.
E. Ventilation: Adequately ventilate application area to comply with all health and safety regulations.
F. Coating System Application:
1. Primer: Single coat to all surfaces, 250 square feet per gallon.
2. Base Coat:
a. Vertical surfaces: Two coats, 10 mils minimum dry thickness per coat. Recommended fillers shall be used as necessary for correct application. b. Horizontal surfaces: Single coat, 25 to 30 mils minimum dry film thickness. c. Wear Coat: Single coat to horizontal surfaces, 20 mils minimum dry film thickness.
Broadcast 60-mesh sand to refusal for slip-resistance.
d. Topcoat: Two coats to all surfaces, 7 mils minimum dry film thickness per coat.
Packet Pg. 633 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09890-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 INSPECTION
A. Coating system shall be inspected for complete and uniform application. All evident defects, including but not limited to uneven application, improper tie-in with fittings or joints, and appearance defects, shall be corrected.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 634 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide and install coatings on all exposed surfaces as indicated herein, in other Specification Sections, and on the Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Experience: Both Coatings Manufacturer and Coatings Installer shall have a minimum 5 yearsí experience in production and application, respectively, of specified products.
Coatings Installer shall be approved and endorsed, in writing, by Coatings Manufacturer.
B. Regulations: Meet federal, state, and local requirements which apply to the work, including, but not limited to those regulations limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds.
C. Coatings Manufacturer Recommendations: Coatings Installer shall follow all recommendations of the Coatings Manufacturer regarding storage, handling, surface preparation, application of coatings, recoat times, environmental conditions during storage, preparation and application of coatings, and all other Coatings Manufacturer recommendations.
D. Warranty: Both Coatings Manufacturer and Coatings Installer shall provide a 1-year complete replacement warranty for all coatings. Manufacturer shall provide 5-year warranty for long-term performance of coatings in addition to 1-year warranty.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Coatings Manufacturer shall submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of Manufacturer's technical information and application instructions for each material proposed for use. Specify exactly which product is being proposed for each coating type (as specified below). This may be accomplished through a reference table along with information on the various products, or by a separate, tabbed section with information on products being submitted for each system in a separate tab of a binder. Submittal of general Manufacturerís literature without detailing which product is proposed for each paint system will be unacceptable.
2. Copies of Manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system.
3. Letter from the Coatings Manufacturer approving and endorsing Coatings Installer.
4. Furnish copies of the final, approved submittal to the Coatings Installer so that it is clear which product is to be used for which each system.
B. Reference Samples:
1. Provide reference samples of paint colors and textures as required by the ENGINEER.
Reference samples will show the color and texture of the final paint to be applied and shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to painting. Reference samples should be applied to similar substrates to the final surfaces to be painted. If ENGINEER chooses Packet Pg. 635 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
to forego reference samples, CONTRACTOR must receive the allowance to forego reference samples before painting begins or all painted surfaces will be re-painted at the ENGINEERís discretion and at no additional cost to the OWNER.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect all pre-coated items from coating damage during shipping.
B. Store products in accordance with Manufacturerís directions.
C. Store products in a neat, orderly fashion. Protect products from damage. Protect storage area from damage from stored products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Provide coating types as listed in the following table. The systems referenced in the table are those provided by Tnemec. Sherwin-Williams, or Equal are also acceptable manufacturers. If manufacturers other than Tnemec are desired, the CONTRACTOR shall submit equivalent paint systems.
COATING TYPE DESCRIPTION TNEMEC SERIES
Clear Polyamine
Epoxy
Clear Polyamine Epoxy, high solids, moisture
resistant, designed as a one-coat wood sealer.
Series 201,
Epoxoprime
Acrylic Filler Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic designed for application on porous surfaces such as rough-faced
concrete masonry units
Series 130,
Envirofill
Acrylic Latex Single component, finish as required N/A
Latex Primer/
Sealer
Waterborne vinyl acrylic primer/sealer for interior
gypsum wallboard/plaster. Capable of providing
uniform seal and suitable for use with specified finish coats.
N/A
Polyamine Epoxy Waterborne Polyamine Epoxy, penetrating, flexible and low-odor primer designed for sealing porous
substrates.
Series 151, ElastoGrip FC
Acrylate Modified Waterborne Acrylate designed for
application on porous surfaces such as rough-faced
concrete masonry units or wood surfaces. Flexible
and breathable, moisture and UV resistant. Matte
Finish
Series 156, Envirocrete
Polyamidoamine Epoxy designed for use on steel or
other ferrous metals not in contact with potable
water.
Series V69, HiBuild Epoxoline IIPolyamidoamine
Epoxy
Polyamidoamine Epoxy designed for use on steel or
other ferrous metals in contact with potable water.
Series 140, PotaPox Plus
Polyurethane Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane designed for exterior weathering, abrasion and corrosion resistance
Series 750, EnduraShield
Silicone Sealant Silane/Siloxane penetrating water repellent blend designed for application on above-grade concrete,
stucco, block, masonry and stone surfaces
Series 636, Dur A
Pell 20
Packet Pg. 636 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 COLOR
A. Color Pigments: Pure, nonfading, lead-free applicable types to suit the substrates and service indicated.
B. Provide colors as described in the drawings or specifications, or as selected by ENGINEER from standard color palette. For piping system colors, reference pipe schedule.
C. Where existing colors are to be matched or satisfactory color is not available from standard color palette, provide custom-mixed colors.
D. Provide samples of each color on the substrate to be coated for approval by the ENGINEER prior to beginning coating application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Coatings Installer shall prepare all surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with Coatings Manufacturerís recommendations.
B. Coatings Manufacturer representative shall observe Coatings Installerís methods of preparing surfaces and approve of the work prior to Coatings Installer beginning coating installation. If, after a period of time, Coatings Manufacturer is satisfied with Coatings Installers methods, Coatings Manufacturer can allow Coatings Installer to proceed without inspection following surface preparation. Coatings Manufacturer and installer will still both be held equally accountable for any coatings failure.
C. Wood surface preparation
1. Coatings Installer shall clean and prepare all wood surfaces in accordance with the Coating Manufacturerís recommendations. Patching may be required where approved by the Engineer. All joints in wood members including trim, siding, soffits, and joints between wood and dissimilar materials shall be filled with joint sealant prior to coating.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect all adjacent surfaces from overspray, dripping or other transfer of coatings not intended for those surfaces. Use masking, tape, drop cloths, plastic and other protective materials as appropriate.
1. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, stainless steel surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted.
2. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors, fan housings, etc. to prevent coatings from falling inside.
3. Correct all damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to ENGINEER.
Packet Pg. 637 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Completely remove all masking, tape, drop cloths, plastic and other protective materials within 48 hours of completion of application of finish coat. Take special care to remove masking and plastic which cover tank vent openings, HVAC registers, vents, motor vents, and other areas where airflow is critical to proper operation.
C.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Paint all exposed surfaces not specifically excluded in 3.3.C, below. Provide and install Coatings in accordance with the following Table, unless otherwise specified in other Sections:
COATING
SYSTEM
NO.
SURFACE TO BE
COATED
PRIMER
COATING
NO OF
PRIMER
COATS
PRIME COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
FINISH
COATING
NO OF
FINISH
COATS
FINISH COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
100 Concrete
Masonry
Units
(Interior)
Acrylic Filler 1 70 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
Acrylate 2 135 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
101 Concrete
Masonry
Units
(Exterior)
Silicone Sealant 1 250
SF / Gal
Application
Rate
None
102 Concrete
Roof Slab
(Exterior)
Silicone Sealant 1 250
SF/Gal
Application
Rate
None
200 Wood
(Interior and
Exterior)
Polyamine Epoxy 1 250
SF/Gal
Application
Rate
Acrylate 2 135 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
201 Wood
(Interior,
where
noted)
No primer Clear
Polyamine
Epoxy
1 350 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
202 Gypsum
Board
(Interior)
Latex
Primer/Sealer
1 350
SF/Gal
Application
Rate
Acrylic Latex
(Semigloss)
2 400 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
300 Exposed
Ferrous Pipe
Systems and
Exposed
Steel Items
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
2 4-6 MDFT Polyurethane 2 2-3 MDFT
301 Exposed,
Non-metallic
Pipe
Systems
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 350
SF/Gal
Application
Rate
Polyurethane 2 350 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
Packet Pg. 638 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
COATING
SYSTEM
NO.
SURFACE TO BE
COATED
PRIMER
COATING
NO OF
PRIMER
COATS
PRIME COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
FINISH
COATING
NO OF
FINISH
COATS
FINISH COAT
THICKNESS
(EACH COAT)
302 Immersed
Ferrous Pipe
Systems and
Steel Items
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy*
1 4-6 MDFT Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 4-6 MDFT
303 Immersed
Non-metallic
Pipe
Systems
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 350
SF/Gal
Application
Rate
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 350 SF/Gal
Application
Rate
304 Buried
Ferrous and
Steel Items
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 8-10 MDFT Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 8-10 MDFT
305 Aluminum
Surfaces in
Contact with
Concrete
Polyamidoamine
Epoxy
1 4-6 MDFT None
Steel Tank Per 09871, Coating of Steel Water Storage Tank Pumps Touch up factory applied coatings, per Pump Specifications * Where in contact with potable water, coating shall be NSF-61 certified.
B. Items Delivered with Factory Applied Primer:
1. For items delivered with a factory applied primer and requiring painting under this Section, the factory applied primer may be used in lieu of field applied primer only under the following conditions:
a. The ENGINEER approves the use of the factory applied primer in lieu of field applied primer.
b. The factory applied primer is certified by the Coatings Manufacturer as compatible with the field applied finish coat.
c. The Coatings Manufacturerís recommended recoat time for the factory applied primer has not been exceeded.
2. If all of the above conditions are not met, the Coatings Installer shall re-prepare all surfaces to be painted in strict accordance with Coatings Manufacturerís recommendations and primer applied, in accordance with this Section.
C. Table Definitions:
1. SF/Gal: Square foot of coverage per gallon of coating used.
2. MDFT: mil dry film thickness
3. mil: 1/1000 of an inch paint thickness
4. Ferrous Pipe: Includes Ductile Iron, Cast Iron, Steel, and Galvanized Steel piping
5. Steel Items: Includes steel and galvanized steel items such as structural steel, doors, window frames, overhead coiling doors, bollard posts, steel gates, steel fences, and all other steel and galvanized steel items.
6. Non-Metallic Pipe: Polyvinyl Chloride, Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic, High Density Polyethylene
7. Exposed: Located above grade, exposed to the atmosphere not submerged. Includes surfaces inside and outside of buildings.
Packet Pg. 639 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
8. Submerged: In an area which normally is under water or other liquid or is intermittently under water or other liquid.
9. Buried: Located below grade, surrounded by backfill.
D. Surfaces Not Requiring Painting:
1. Unless otherwise stated or shown below or in other sections, the following areas or items will not require painting or coating:
a. Concrete surfaces.
b. Reinforcing steel.
c. Copper, bronze, brass, Monel, aluminum, chromium plate, and stainless steel surfaces, except where:
1) Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals. 2) Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry.
3) Color coding of equipment and piping is required.
d. Pipe unions or portions of piping systems where painting would make disassembly difficult or impossible.
e. Prefinished electrical, mechanical and architectural items such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, HVAC equipment enclosures, ductwork, acoustical tile, cabinets, louvers, and wall panels.
f. Electrical conduits.
g. Cathodic protection anodes.
h. Insulated piping and insulated piping with jacket will require prime coat only. i. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) surfaces with an integral ultra-violet resistant colored gel coat do not require painting, provided the color is as selected. j. Glass, plexiglass or other transparent or translucent material intended to allow passage of light.
k. Civil/site materials such as asphalt, gravel, rock, chain-link fence, and plantings.
3.4 RECOAT TIMES:
A. Coatings Installer shall observe all requirements of the Coatings Manufacturer regarding recoat times.
3.5 PAINT LOG
A. Coatings Installer shall keep a paint log
1. Specific details of the contents and format paint log shall be determined by the Coatings Installer and approved by the ENGINEER.
2. At a minimum, paint log shall record, on a daily basis for any day when coating work is performed:
a. Weather conditions, including 3-day forecast
b. Which surfaces were prepared for coating
c. Approval of surface preparation by the Coatings Manufacturer representative d. Which surfaces or systems were coated that day
e. Who the installer was (specific names of persons on crew) f. Which coating type was used
Packet Pg. 640 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
g. Which coat was installed
h. What the application rate or MDFT was (as approved by ENGINEER)
3. Paint log shall be kept on-site. Paint log shall be signed on a daily basis, for any day when coating work is performed, by the supervisor of the coatings installer field crew and by the ENGINEER.
4. Any painted surface which was not recorded in the paint log shall be stripped, reprepared, and recoated at the ENGINEERís discretion.
3.6 WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. Warranty inspection shall be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of the Work. All defective Work shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with this Specification and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER and at the CONTRACTOR'S expense.
B. Any location where paint has peeled, bubbled, or cracked and any location where rusting is evident shall be considered to be a failure of the system. The CONTRACTOR shall make repair at all points where failures are observed by removing the deteriorated paint, cleaning the surface, and recoating or repainting with the same system. If the area of failure exceeds 25 percent of the total coated or painted surface, the entire coating or paint system may be required to be removed and repainted in accordance with this specification as determined by the ENGINEER.
C. All costs for CONTRACTOR'S inspection, Manufacturer's inspection and all costs for repair shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 641 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 09900-
8 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 642 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10400-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 10400
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Furnish and install signs, placards, and labels for safety equipment, hazards, and equipment and piping identification.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide manufacturer's literature showing available letter sizes and styles, standard and custom colors, and standard mounting details.
2. Provide drawings showing layouts, actual letter sizes and styles, colors, and projectspecific mounting details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATION SIGNS
A. Material:
1. Subsurface silkscreened graphics on a transparent acrylic sheet, 0.08" thick with Helvetica Medium alphabet and matching arrows type face.
2. Provide 2" high upper case letters and 1" high lower case letters.
B. Fire Extinguisher Identification Sign:
1. Provide 15"x 15" with 1" radiused corners, unframed.
2. Provide one for each surface mounted fire extinguisher.
3. Background color shall be red with white lettering.
4. Signs shall incorporate a white directional arrow as located by ENGINEER.
C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. ASI/SPE MH (Four Corners) Plaque by ASI Sign Systems, Incorporated.
2. Or equal.
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION PLACARDS
A. Fire Protection Placards:
1. Provide diamond-shaped placards: 15" square of 0.125" rigid polyethylene.
2. The placard shall meet NFPA 704.
B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. W.H. Brady Company
2. Seton Name Plate Company
3. Or Equal
Packet Pg. 643 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10400-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Provide fire protection placards in accordance with the following schedule:
DRAWING REFERENCE NUMBER MATERIAL HEALTH FLAMMABILITY REACTIVITY SYMBOL S-302 Ferric Chloride 2 0 0 COR
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY SIGNAGE
A. Safety signs shall comply with the following standards:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Standards for General Industry, Subparts 1910.200 Hazard Communication (July, 1986).
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard No. 704 - Label System.
3. Uniform Fire Code, Latest Edition.
4. Uniform Fire Code Standard 79-3.
B. Safety signs shall be of height and width required by layout and shall be formed from semirigid butyrate, polyethylene or fiberglass. Lettering shall be 3-inches high and 1/2-inch in stroke.
C. Provide the following safety signs:
DRAWING REFERENCE
NUMBER
TEXT BACKGROUND
COLOR
LETTERING
COLOR
S-303 SAFETY SHOWER/ EYEWASH Green White
S-304 CAUTION:
EQUIPMENT STARTS
AUTOMATICALLY
Yellow Black
S-305 CAUTION:WEAR EAR
PROTECTION
Yellow Black
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. Material: Plastic, 1/8-inch minimum thickness.
B. Lettering: 6 inches high, 3/4-inch stroke, white letters on red background.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Pipe Labels and Flow Direction Arrows:
1. Label, Lettering Color, Size and Placement: In accordance with ANSI A13.1, and as listed below.
Packet Pg. 644 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10400-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Label Colors:
Fluid Service Background Color Letter Color
Fire quenching fluids Safety red White
Toxic and corrosive fluids Safety orange Black
Flammable fluids Safety yellow Black
Combustible fluids Safety brown White
Potable, cooling, boiler feed,
and other water
Safety green White
Compressed air Safety blue White
3. Label Size:
Outside Diameter of
Pipe Covering, inches
Length of Color Field,
inches
Size of Letters,
inches
3/4 to 1-1/4 8 ½
1-1/2 to 2 8 3/4
2-1/2 to 6 12 1-1/4
8 to 10 24 2-1/2
Over 10 32 3-1/2
4. Label Placement:
a. Labels shall be positioned on the pipes so they can be easily read. Proper label placement is on the lower side of the pipe if the employee has to look up to the pipe, on the upper side of the pipe if the employee has to look down towards the pipe, or directly facing the employee if on the same level as the pipe. Labels should be located near valves, branches, where a change in direction occurs, on entry/re-entry points through walls or floors, and on straight segments with spacing between labels that allows for easy identification.
5. Material: Manufacture from or encase in outdoor grade plastic or vinyl that will resist damage or fading from washdown, sunlight, mildly corrosive atmosphere, dirt, grease, and abrasion.
6. Message: See Piping Schedule.
7. Labels:
a. Snap-Around Type: Size for finished outside diameter of pipe and insulation. b. For 6 Inches and Over Diameter Pipe: May furnish strap-on type fastened without use of tools with plastic or stainless steel straps.
c. Firmly grip pipe so labels remain fixed in vertical pipe runs.
8. Manufacturers and Products:
a. T & B/Westline, Rariton, NJ, Model WSS Snap-Around.
b. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven, CT, Setmark Series. c. Or equal.
B. Equipment Labels:
1. Applies to equipment with assigned tag numbers wherever specified.
2. Lettering: Black bold face, 3/4-inch minimum high.
3. Background: OSHA safety yellow.
4. Materials: Either of the following:
a. Aluminum or stainless steel base with a baked-on finish that is suitable for use on wet, oily, exposed, abrasive, and corrosive areas.
b. Fiberglass with fiberglass-encased lettering.
Packet Pg. 645 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10400-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. Furnish 1-inch margin on each end of label for mounting. On fiberglass labels furnish grommets at each end for mounting.
6. Size:
a. As appropriate for lettering provided.
b. Provide same-size labels for equipment series which are adjacent.
7. Message: Equipment names and tag numbers as used in Sections where equipment is specified and/or on Drawings.
8. Manufacturers and Products:
a. T & B/Westline Co., Rariton, NJ; Type KQ.
b. Seton Name Plate Corp., New Haven, CT; Style EB.
c. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SIGNS
A. Install Fire Extinguisher location signs at all fire extinguisher locations, approximately 12î above fire extinguisher mounting bracket.
B. Install Exit Signs mounted to each door which leads to the outside of the building, on the panic bar side of the door, mounted to the door approximately 5í-6î above finished floor.
C. Install all other signs at locations as shown on the drawings. Signs should be installed approximately 5í-6î off of finished floor, attached to doors where appropriate. Where two signs are indicated in the same location, signs should be mounted side-by-side, where possible.
D. Install all signs plumb and level. They shall be attached with four stainless steel screws or anchor bolts as required for substrate. Provide theft/tamper-resistant fasteners on all signs.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Provide pipe identification label with flow arrows on all exposed piping systems as follows:
1. At all connections to equipment, valves, tees or wall penetrations.
2. At intervals along piping not greater than 18 feet on center with at least one label applied to each exposed horizontal and vertical run of pipe.
B. Install pipe identification labels after all painting has been completed.
Packet Pg. 646 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10400-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Install equipment identification labels on all equipment which has been given an equipment number in the Drawings or Specifications. Provide identification label which includes equipment name and tag number.
B. Where no damage will be caused to equipment, mount equipment identification label directly to equipment. Otherwise, mount equipment identification labels to concrete equipment base or wall space. Install equipment identification label such that it is clear which piece of equipment is being labeled.
C. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with ordinary hand tools. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 647 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10400-
6 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 648 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10520-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 10520
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. The following safety equipment is to be provided and installed by CONTRACTOR so that it may be integrated into OWNERís safety program for operation of the facility into which it is installed.
2. The following safety equipment does not represent a complete package of safety equipment required to operate the facility. Refer to OWNERís safety program for all required safety equipment and procedures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer's product data for each item including sizes, ratings, UL listings, OSHA certifications or other certifications, and mounting/installation information.
B. Warranty: Provide manufacturerís 5-year warranty on all products provided.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect all equipment provided from all damage until such time as it is turned over to the OWNER.
B. Safety equipment provided under this specification shall not be used by the CONTRACTOR in the construction of the facility. Safety equipment shall be turned over to the OWNER in new condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Provide at all locations labeled ìFEXTî on Drawings.
B. Provide Fire Extinguishers which Conform to NFPA-10 and as follows:
1. Tri-class dry chemical extinguishing agent.
2. Pressurized, red enameled steel shell cylinder.
3. Activated by top squeeze handle.
4. Agent propelled through hose or opening at top of unit.
5. For use on A, B, and C class fires.
6. Minimum UL Rating: 4A-60B:C, 10-pound capacity.
C. Mounting Hardware:
1. Furnish heavy-duty brackets with clip-together strap for wall mounting.
2. Use all stainless steel fasteners for attaching brackets to wall.
Packet Pg. 649 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 10520-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Manufacturers:
1. Walter Kidde.
2. Master Protection Enterprises.
3. Or Equal.
2.2 FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Hatch Safety Net:
1. Standards:
a. Comply with all applicable OSHA, UL, ANSI and other applicable standards. 1) Including, but not limited to, OSHA 1926.502(c), safety net systems
2. General Purpose:
a. Designed to allow visual inspection and wash down of confined space through net while preventing falls into open hatches. Designed to be easily removed for confined space entry once entrant is properly harnessed and utilizing proper retrieval system.
3. Features:
a. Materials:
1) Metallic parts shall be Aluminum and/or stainless steel 2) Netting shall by UV-resistant, highly visible synthetic netting (polyester, or equal) in safety orange or safety yellow.
3) Netting shall be stitched with UV-resistant PTFE thread. b. Netting shall have approximately 4-inch openings to allow for visual inspection and wash-down through netting.
4. Manufacturer and Product:
a. U.S. Netting, Hatch Net 121
b. U.S.F. Fabrication, Hatch Safety Net
c. Or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all safety equipment per manufacturers written instructions.
B. Install fire extinguishers where ìFEXTî is called out on the drawings, 48î above finished floor or adjacent grade.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 650 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 11205
END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section includes the manufacture, supply, testing and installation of End Suction Centrifugal Pumps complete and operational. Contractor shall coordinate pump and adjustable speed drive systems, where specified.
B. The following Equipment Identification Numbers have been assigned to the equipment that shall be provided under this specification section:
1. EW12_PMP_04160 Surface Wash Booster Pump
2. EW12_PMP_02170 Backwash Reclaim Pump
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with requirements and recommendations of the following references, except as otherwise specified:
1. Hydraulic Institute (HI)
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
3. National Electric Code (NEC)
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
6. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA)
7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
8. ASTM International (ASTM)
9. Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA)
10. American Petroleum Institute (API)
B. All pumping equipment furnished under this Section shall be of a design and manufacture that has been used in similar applications and it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner that the quality is equal to equipment made by that manufacturer specifically named herein.
C. Unit responsibility: All equipment specified herein shall be furnished by one pump manufacturer to insure compatibility and integrity of the individual components, and provide the specified warranty for all components.
D. Pump(s) are to be engineered and manufactured under the certification of ISO-9001.
E. Pump(s) shall be NSF-61 approved/certified.
F. Factory Tests: The selected manufacturer shall provide the following factory tests for approval upon acceptance of shop drawings:
1. Provide manufacturerís standard functional test on all equipment. a. At minimum, functional test shall include hydrostatic testing at 250 PSIG in accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards.
Packet Pg. 651 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Performance Test:
a. Conduct on each pump in conformance with the test standards and procedures specified in the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
b. Conduct the test using complete assembly at manufacturerís minimum NPSHa, from shut-off head to 140% of design flow. Record resulting curve showing head, flow, brake horsepower, speed, pump efficiency, and net positive suction head required (NPSHr). Plot results for a minimum of seven (7) evenly spaced measurements, including shut-off head, primary design point, best efficiency point, and maximum capacity. At least one point of the six shall be taken as near as possible to each specified section.
c. Pump performance results compared to rated speed and capacity at the primary design point shall be within tolerances specified by Hydraulic Institute Standards.
d. Pumps shall not be shipped prior to ENGINEERís approval of test results.
3. Hydrostatic Test: test at either twice the total dynamic head or one and a half times the shutoff head, whichever is greater.
4. Motor Test: Provide short commercial motor test per IEEE 115.
G. Warranty: Provide a 1-yr warranty on all equipment from date of start-up. Warranty shall cover defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any component should fail during the warranty period, it shall be corrected and the unit restored to service at no expense to the OWNER.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330 and as specified herein.
B. Submit the following items to the ENGINEER for approval:
1. Shop drawings:
a. Detailed drawings showing component and assembly dimensions, location of mechanical and electrical connections, weights of all equipment, installation details, and accessory details.
b. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. c. Drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts.
2. Product data:
a. Descriptive literature, specifications, and engineering data. b. Materials of construction for all components and accessories. c. Impeller type and diameter, including rated diameter and minimum and maximum diameter available for the pump model.
d. Pump weight, motor weight, and complete assembly weight. e. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA.
f. Where specified, complete variable frequency drive information. g. Factory finish system description.
h. Critical speeds of the pumps supplied.
3. Performance data:
a. Pump rated speed.
b. Rated and maximum pump horsepower, and driver horsepower. c. Minimum NPSHr.
d. Maximum down and up thrust.
e. Submit Pump Performance Curves:
1) Provide pump curves showing head, brake horsepower, pump efficiency, and NPSHr and capacity, for the entire operating range of the pump.
Packet Pg. 652 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2) Correct curves for pump losses and shaft friction horsepower losses. Include pump losses, column and discharge head losses.
3) All curves shall clearly display the specified operating conditions and the manufacturers Allowable Operating Region (AOR) and Preferred Operating Region (POR) as defined under ANSI/HI 9.6.3.
4) Where variable speed drives are specified, curves shall have at least five (5) speeds plotted between maximum and minimum speed.
5) Speed shall be clearly shown on all curves.
4. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: The selected manufacturer shall provide six sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the equipment provided. The manuals shall contain the following information at minimum:
a. Equipment description.
b. Recommended and limiting operational range.
c. Installation instructions including assembly, alignment, and adjustment procedures.
d. Operation instructions including start-up and shutdown procedures, and troubleshooting guide.
e. Lubrication and regular maintenance instructions.
f. Shop drawings.
g. Parts list with catalog numbers.
h. Performance curves.
i. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 2 years. Include any special tools required to maintain or test the equipment.
5. Quality Control Submittals:
a. A list of any and all instances where the equipment proposed deviates from these specifications.
b. Names and addresses of the factory authorized service organization nearest to project site.
c. Guarantee pump efficiency and NPSHr at the specified operating points. d. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide certified copies of factory test reports for functional, performance and hydrostatic tests. e. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide printed installation instructions.
f. Upon completed installation, manufacturer shall provide Certificate of Proper Installation.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All equipment and accessories shall be properly protected during shipment such that no damage or deterioration shall occur between shipment and installation.
1. Finished surfaces shall be protected by wooden blanks.
2. Finished ferrous metal surfaces not painted shall be protected from corrosion.
3. Each box and package shall be clearly marked with the contents and total weight.
B. Manufacturer shall provide any special storage and handling instructions.
Packet Pg. 653 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER: PROVIDE:
A. 05_PMP_70 Surface Wash Pump
1. Goulds Model 3656/3756 M&L Group, Constant Speed, Model Number:
14BF2M9H0
2. Or Equal
B. 06_PMP_10 Backwash Reclaim Pump
1. Goulds Model 3656/3756 M&L Group, Variable Speed, Model Number: 8BF1R9A0.
2. Or Equal
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Service Conditions: As shown in the attached Pump and Drive Data Sheet.
B. Performance Requirements: As shown in the attached Pump and Drive Data Sheet.
2.3 COMPONENTS:
A. General:
1. Provide two (2) horizontal closed-coupled, end suction centrifugal pumps complete with driver.
2. Provide pumps with performance curves with constantly increasing head from maximum capacity to shut-off head.
3. Balancing: Pump assemblies shall be dynamically and statically balanced. Vibration at any point of pumps operation shall not exceed the upper limits of the Hydraulic Institute Standards.
B. Casing:
1. 05_PMP_70
a. Spiral volute type, back pull-out design with ANSI Class 150 flat faced flanged suction and discharge connections.
2. 06_PMP_10
a. NPT suction and discharge connections.
3. Material: Close grained ASTM A48 CL30 cast iron.
4. Discharge nozzle shall be tangentially oriented.
5. Complete unit shall be supported by power frame.
6. Pump casing shall have drain with zinc-plated steel pipe plug.
C. Wear Ring:
1. Replaceable casing and seal housing wear ring.
2. Material: Lead free Bismuth Bronze.
3. Interference fit.
D. Impeller:
1. Enclosed design.
2. Material: ASTM B584 Lead Free Sil-Brass
Packet Pg. 654 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Key driven.
4. Impeller shall be bolted to motor shaft. Bolt and washer shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
E. Seal Housing:
1. 1-piece design.
2. Material: ASTM A48 CL20 cast iron.
3. Registered mating fits to pump casing and power frame shall maintain positive alignment and support.
4. Sealing of casing pressure shall be by Buna-N or viton O-ring.
5. Motor and casing connection shall be by grade 5 high strength hex cap screws.
Bottom drainage port shall be provided.
F. Mechanical Seal:
1. General purpose elastomer bellows type.
2. Materials:
a. Elastomers: Buna-N or Viton
b. Rotating face: Carbon
c. Stationary face: Ceramic
d. Metal components: Type 316 stainless steel
e. 250 PSIG pressure rating
3. Manufacturer:
a. John Crane Type 21
b. Or Equal
G. Shaft Sleeve:
1. Hook-type, locked in place by impeller.
2. AISI Type 300 stainless steel.
H. Power Frame Assembly:
1. The pump unit shall be supported by means of a foot-mounted frame. Frame shall carry all thrust and radial loads imposed by the pump during operation.
2. Bearings:
a. Ball-type, grease lubricated thrust and radial bearings. b. Outboard bearing shall carry all pump thrust load and shall be locked in place on the pump shaft by means of a bearing locknut and locking washer. c. Minimum B-10 life of 50,000 hours.
d. Provide grease fitting.
3. Pump shaft:
a. Material: AISI 4140
4. Bearing Assembly and Shaft Seals:
a. Protect inboard and outboard bearings from entry of pumpage, washdown water and grit with Buna-N lip seals.
b. Inboard bearing end shall have an additional Buna-N deflector ring.
I. Bedplate:
1. Rigid channel steel
2. Shall maintain support and alignment of the complete pump and drive motor assembly.
Bedplate shall be suitable for anchor bolt mounting to concrete floor with provisions for grout-in-place.
Packet Pg. 655 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
J. Drive Coupling:
1. Spacer-type, key-driven allowing back pull-out
2. 1.5 minimum safety factor over motor nameplate rating
3. Manufacturer:
a. T.B. Woods Type SC
b. Or Equal
K. Coupling Guard:
1. Rotating components of drive assembly shall be protected by formed metal coupling guard in compliance with OSHA standards and bolted in place to the unit bedplate.
L. Electric Motor:
1. Non-overloading NEMA standard design T-frame suitable for horizontal mounting and coupling connection to the pump.
2. Motors shall be solid shaft, squirrel-cage induction motors meeting the requirements of NEMA MG 1.
3. Motor manufacturer shall be ISO9000 certified.
4. Continuous duty for constant speed pump. Inverter duty for variable speed pump.
5. Motors shall be adequately sized to prevent overload above nameplate horsepower at maximum pump brake horsepower.
6. Motors shall be 460V, 3 PH, 60 Hz
7. Motor Speed shall be:
a. 3600 rpm (06_PMP_10)
b. 1800 rpm (05_PMP_70)
8. Motor Power shall be:
a. 40 hp (06_PMP_10)
b. 15 hp (05_PMP_70)
9. Motors shall have the following guaranteed minimum efficiencies at full load as determined by IEEE 112-B:
a. 50 hp: 88%
b. 100 hp and above: 92%
10. Motors shall have minimum power factor of 87%.
11. Service factor on all motors shall be 1.15.
12. Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled enclosures shall be provided.
13. Manufacturerís recommended bearing lubrication shall be provided.
14. Provide oversized terminal box with terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire.
15. Provide stainless steel nameplate with the following information, at minimum:
a. Manufacturerís name, make, and serial number
b. Type
c. Voltage
d. Frame
e. Insulation
f. Class
g. HP
h. Full load amps
i. RPM
M. Spare Parts: Provide the following:
Packet Pg. 656 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Mechanical seal.
2. Impeller wear ring.
3. Drive coupling.
4. Complete set of gaskets and O-ring seals.
5. Complete set of bearings.
6. Complete set of keys, screws, plugs, etc.
7. Any special tools required to dismantle the pump.
N. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with º-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in an easily visible location.
O. Lifting Lugs: For all equipment assemblies weighing in excess of 100 pounds.
P. Anchor Bolts:
1. Type 304 stainless steel, sized by equipment manufacturer.
2. ½-inch diameter minimum.
Q. Factory Finish: Manufacturerís standard enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturerís printed instructions.
B. Level base using steel plates and shims with taper no greater than º inch per foot.
Adjustment shall be made to prevent changing in level or springing of the baseplate when anchor bolts are tightened.
C. Adjust pump assemblies such that driving units are properly aligned with shafts and all couplings. The use of flexible couplings for misalignment correction will not be accepted.
D. Grout the bedplate to floor slab after anchor bolts have been tightened. Grout shall be non-shrinking. Remove wedges after grout is set and grout voids left by wedges.
E. Connect suction and discharge piping without imposing strain to the pump flanges.
F. Accurately place anchor bolts using equipment templates.
G. Upon complete installation, test assemblies for proper alignment, rotation, connection, and quiet operation.
3.2 FIELD FINISHING
A. Finish equipment as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING.
3.3 SUPPLEMENTS
A. Pump and Drive Data Sheets
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 657 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Section 11205
Pump and Drive Data Sheet
Project City of Redding Well 12 WTP
Equipment Number 05_PMP_70
Equipment Location Surface Wash Booster Pump
Drive Description:
Drive Type Constant Speed
Motor 3 PH 460V 60 HZ
Motor Horsepower 15 hp
Pump Description:
Pump Type End Suction Centrifugal
Impeller Type Enclosed Radial Impeller
Maximum Impeller Diameter 13 1/16 in
Design Impeller Diameter 10 1/8 in
Suction Diameter 4 in
Discharge Diameter 3 in
Operating Conditions:
Liquid Pumped Potable water
Temperature 50 to 80 degrees F, 60 deg average
Specific Gravity 1.0
pH 6.5 to 8.5
Site Altitude 500 ft
Pump Operating Conditions:
Pump Rated Speed 1800 rpm
Minimum NPSHa 296 ft
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow 150 gpm
Minimum Shutoff Head 108 ft
Pump Design Points:
1st Operating Point:
Capacity (gpm) 200 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (ft) 105 ft
Minimum Efficiency 65%
2nd Operating Point:
Capacity (gpm) 423 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (ft) 87 ft
Minimum Efficiency 75%
3rd Operating Point:
Capacity (gpm) 600 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (ft) 60 ft
Minimum Efficiency 60%
Appurtenances:
Motor Winding Thermostat Yes
Bearing Thermostat Switch No
Vibration Switch No
Packet Pg. 658 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011205-9
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Section 11205
Pump and Drive Data Sheet
Project City of Redding Well 12 WTP
Equipment Number 06_PMP_10
Equipment Location Backwash Reclaim Pump
Drive Description:
Drive Type Variable Frequency Drive
Motor 3 PH 460V 60 HZ
Motor Horsepower 40 hp
Pump Description:
Pump Type End Suction Centrifugal
Impeller Type Enclosed Radial
Maximum Impeller Diameter 10 1/16 in
Design Impeller Diameter 10 1/16 in
Suction Diameter 2 in
Discharge Diameter 1 ½ in
Operating Conditions:
Liquid Pumped Potable water
Temperature 50 to 80 degrees F, 60 deg average
Specific Gravity 1.0
pH 6.5 to 8.5
Site Altitude 500 ft
Pump Operating Conditions:
Pump Rated Speed 3600 rpm
Minimum NPSHa 27 ft
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow 40 gpm
Minimum Shutoff Head 400 ft
Pump Design Points:
1st Operating Point:
Capacity (gpm) 150 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (ft) 459 ft
Minimum Efficiency 54%
2nd Operating Point:
Capacity (gpm) 200 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (ft) 420 ft
Minimum Efficiency 59%
3rd Operating Point:
Capacity (gpm) 253 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (ft) 364 ft
Minimum Efficiency 57%
Appurtenances:
Motor Winding Thermostat Yes
Bearing Thermostat Switch No
Vibration Switch No
Packet Pg. 659 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 660 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 11400
CHEMICAL METERING PUMP SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: This specification covers the supply and testing of completely functional, skid-mounted chemical metering pump systems. The chemical metering pump system shall include skid assembly containing chemical metering pumps, all necessary piping, valves, fittings, supports, electrical controls and accessories as shown on the drawings and the attached schematic, and specified herein. The chemical metering pump system supplier shall be responsible for supplying all components of the skid-mounted chemical metering pump system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 13006 ñ Pre-Engineered FRP Enclosure
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. A single metering pump system supplier shall be responsible for the assembly, supply and coordination of all equipment and appurtenances specified herein.
B. System supplier shall provide reference list of no less than three installations where fully integrated chemical metering pump systems were provided.
C. Provide a factory operational and performance test on the pre-assembled system and documentation of results prior to shipment.
D. Provide operational and performance field test.
E. Warranty: The chemical metering pump system supplier shall provide a two-year warranty on the metering pump mechanical drive and a one-year warranty on the liquid end, pump accessories, and the skid-mounted system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Detailed metering pump diagram
2. Control and power wiring diagrams
3. Enclosure dimensions
4. Connection point locations and sizes
5. Skid mounting details
6. Piping and fittings details
7. Control panel dimensions, connection details, and wiring diagrams
8. Location of all specified appurtenances
Packet Pg. 661 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Product Data:
1. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, and specifications, including but not limited to the following:
a. Total assembly weight
b. Materials of construction
1) Confirmation that all wetted parts are compatible with specified service chemical
c. Control system details
d. Appurtenance details
e. Hydraulic calculations confirming pump sizing and range for service conditions f. Documentation of accuracy over flowrate range specified herein
2. Recommended spare parts list
3. Complete motor nameplate data
4. Factory finish system
5. Complete O&M manual for each pump model and control system D. Quality Assurance Submittals
1. Factory operational and performance testing results
2. System Suppliers certificate of compliance with these specifications
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. System supplier shall provide special shipping, handling, and storage instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND SYSTEM SUPPLIER: PROVIDE:
A. LMI (Milton Roy)
B. Classic Engineering (Pulsafeeder)
C. Or Equal
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Ferric Chloride Metering Pump System
1. Location: As shown on Drawings
2. Equipment Identification Numbers:
a. Ferric Chloride Pump No. 1: EW12_PMP_7210
b. Ferric Chloride Pump No. 2: EW12_PMP_7220
3. Service Chemical: 38% Ferric Chloride
a. Specific Gravity: 1.26-1.48
b. Temperature: 50 to 100 deg F
4. Flowrate Range:
a. EW12_PMP_7210: 2.6 to 4.4 gph
b. EW12_PMP_7220: 2.6 to 4.4 gph
5. Rated Pressure: 150 psig
6. Minimum NPSHa: 31 FT
7. Piping/pump arrangement: Reference Detail 11280 ñ METERING PUMP SCHEMATIC, attached.
Packet Pg. 662 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.3 SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
A. System Design:
1. Chemical Metering Pump System supplier shall provide completely assembled, rack-mounted Chemical Metering Pump Systems.
2. The Chemical Metering Pump Systems shall not include any loose-shipped parts. It shall be completely shop or factory assembled and shall require no field assembly other than field connections of piping and wire.
3. The Chemical Metering Pump Systems shall be designed in accordance with the attached system schematics, providing the shown inlet and outlet connections, features and appurtenances.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. General: All wetted materials shall be specifically selected for resistance to specified service chemical.
B. Piping: CPVC conforming to ASTM D2846
1. Socket welded pipe fittings with solvent weld cement specific for specified service chemical compatibility.
C. Calibration column:
1. Provide calibration column on the common suction header for each pump skid assembly.
2. Column shall be sized for a minimum 30-second draw down test.
3. Scale shall indicate both milliliters and gallons in 0.01-gallon increments printed on the side of the column.
4. Calibration chamber shall be piped and valved such that each pump may be calibrated without interfering the operation of other pumps.
5. Column to be clear PVC or equal translucent material suitable for specified service chemical.
6. Provide threaded connection at top of column for connection to common vent.
D. Strainer: Provide y-strainer as shown on the system schematic. a. 100-mesh basket, all CPVC construction.
b. Hex cap clean-out
c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psi
d. FPM seals
e. Manufacturer:
1) Hayward Flow Control Systems
2) Or Equal
E. Diaphragm Valves (DIA-01): Provide diaphragm valves for all shut-off, isolation, and flow control applications. Ball valves will not be accepted.
1. Features:
a. PVC body and bonnet
b. Flanged or true union as shown on the Drawings
c. Diaphragms shall be three-piece:
1) PTFE
2) PVDF gas barrier
3) EPDM backing
Packet Pg. 663 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
d. EPDM o-rings
e. Bubble-tight sealing
f. Travel stop for over-tightening prevention
g. Position indication
h. 115 psi minimum pressure rating
2. Manufacturers:
a. Asahi/America Inc. Type 14
b. Or Equal
F. Metering Pumps:
1. 07_PMP_21, 07_PMP_22: Positive Displacement, motor driven, mechanically actuated diaphragm type.
a. Simplex pumping head with double suction and discharge valves. b. Pumps shall include integral motor, oil-lubricated or permanent grease lubricated bearings gear reducer and cam-and-spring drive mounted in aluminum housing. Aluminum housing shall be sealed into an outer corrosion resistant housing with heat sink fins.
2. Features:
a. The liquid end shall be fully separated from the drive unit by a back plate with weep hole creating an air gap. An elastomer shaft wiper seal shall prevent contamination of the drive if the primary diaphragm fails. Sodium Hypochlorite pumps shall have integral design features to prevent the build-up of vapor in the pump head.
b. Diaphragm shall be Fluorofilm.
c. Liquid end shall be PVC.
d. Suction and discharge check valves shall be PVDF with PTFE faced Viton gaskets and ceramic ball valves.
e. Pumps shall have integral design features to prevent the build-up of vapor in the pump head.
f. A manually actuated bypass feature shall be provided to allow gas purging and instantaneous priming.
g. Power input shall be single phase 120V, 60 hz.
h. Remote Input/Output signal shall be 4-20 mA.
i. Control: Pump shall be capable of both AUTO and MANUAL stroke length and stroke speed adjustment.
j. Minimum guaranteed accuracy shall be ±1% at 3:1 turndown to steady state accuracy of the pump, and ±2% over 50:1 turndown.
k. Maximum NPSHr shall be 3 psi
3. Products:
a. 07_PMP_21, 07_PMP_22:
1) LMI Series SD Model SD42-282
2) Blackline Series MD Model MD1A
3) Or Equal
G. Pressure Gauge: Provide pressure gauges for the discharge of each pump.
1. Pressure gauge shall indicate pressure in psi.
2. Gauge shall accurately indicate pressure from 0 to 150 psi.
3. Gauge shall have diaphragm seal isolation.
H. Pressure Relief Valve: Provide adjustable pressure relief valve for each pump discharge.
Packet Pg. 664 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Sized for the maximum pump flow and initially set at pressure recommended by pump manufacturer.
I. Pulsation dampeners: Provide pulsation dampener for each pump discharge.
1. Single diaphragm type
2. Pulsation dampener shall be air-filled and shall have a Schraeder valve fitting at the fill port.
3. Pulsation dampener shall be sized by the Manufacturer to reduce pulsation by a minimum of 97%. The dampener volume shall be a minimum of 26 times the stroke displacement volume.
4. The Manufacturer shall provide calculations to the Engineer showing the method used to calculate the pulsation dampener volume.
J. Backpressure Valves: Provide adjustable diaphragm backpressure sustaining type for each pump discharge.
1. Initial setpoint shall be as recommended by pump manufacturer.
K. Equipment Identification: Provide stainless steel plate with º-inch die-stamped equipment identification numbers mounted in a visible location.
L. Lifting lugs: Provide for equipment weighing over 100 pounds.
M. Anchor Bolts: Provide all anchor bolts necessary for proper installation of the metering pump system frame or rack.
1. All metals shall be Type 316 stainless steel
2. Sized by equipment manufacturer
N. Skid-Mount: Each Chemical Metering Pump System shall be completely assembled, calibrated, tested mounted and shipped on a single skid.
1. Components to be mounted include metering pumps, piping, valves, and all piping appurtenances specified herein. Vertical back panels and frame-mounted enclosures shall be provided as required to fully support all equipment and appurtenances.
2. Forklift truck cut-outs shall be provided.
3. The strength of the skid and supporting frame shall be suitable for shipping, offloading, installation and long-term support of the metering pumps.
4. Frame or rack shall have accommodations for concrete floor mounting.
5. No bare metal parts shall be allowed.
O. Spare Parts
1. Provide a spare chemical metering pump separate from each of the Chemical Metering Pump Systems.
2. Loosely shipped, separate from the skids.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Chemical Metering Pump System shall be capable of receiving 4-20 mA signals from Plant SCADA system for stroke and speed control of each pump. The signals may be received and processed at the pump. Each pump shall have an integral microprocessor/keypad/LCD display having the following control features:
1. Each pump shall have the following:
a. Manual ON/OFF/AUTO switch
b. Membrane keypad and LCD display:
Packet Pg. 665 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1) Manual ON/OFF/AUTO switch
2) Stroke length indication
3) Speed indication
4) Manual stroke length adjustment
5) Manual speed adjustment
6) Access code shall be required to prevent unauthorized adjustments to pump operation
2. Each pumps controls/display shall be clearly marked with the pump equipment number
B. Provide all cables, connectors, and a terminal junction box for termination of remote signal circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in complete accordance with manufacturerís instructions.
B. Installation shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of any pump spare parts, lubricants, rebuild kits, etc, recommended by manufacturer.
C. Check and align all pumps, motors, valves, piping, etc. after pump assemblies have been installed to ensure alignment and assembly has been unchanged from factory assembly conditions. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition.
D. Install chemical metering skid in to Pre-Engineered FRP enclosure per Specification 13006. Contractor to coordinate installation with FRP enclosure supplier.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test services, and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The serviceman shall make three (3) visits to the site. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. The second visit shall be for checking the completed installation and start-up of the system. The third visit shall be for instruction of operations personnel.
3.3 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The following supplements are attached to this Specification section and incorporated herein by reference:
1. Detail 11280 ñ METERING PUMP SCHEMATIC
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 666 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
FECLEW12_PMP_7210 EW12_PMP_7220
Packet Pg. 667 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11400-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 668 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11405-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 11405
FILTER ROLL-OFF CONTAINER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Work of this Section includes providing the following:
1. Three (3) - 15 cubic yard Filter Roll-Off Containers with cover.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Filter Roll-Off Container Manufacturer must be actively engaged in the manufacture of the type of equipment specified, and shall submit a minimum of five (5) references for installations of similar equipment of their own design and manufacture in actual service for a period of not less than five (5) years.
B. Warranty:
1. Provide a one (1) year warranty on all equipment from date of start-up. Warranty shall cover defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any component should fail during the warranty period, it shall be corrected and the unit restored to service at no expense to the OWNER.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings showing all dimensional information, piping connection sizes and type, interior configuration, filter cloth details, and equipment weights.
B. Product Data:
1. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, and specifications, including but not limited to the following:
a. Total assembly weight.
b. Materials of Construction:
1) Provide details on materials of construction for container and all appurtenances. 2) Confirmation that all wetted parts and coatings are compatible with specified service chemicals.
c. Complete O&M manual.
C. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Factory performance testing results. Manufacturer shall test the unit for complete water tightness before shipping, and submit documentation of test results prior to shipment.
2. Names and addresses of the factory authorized service organization nearest the project site.
3. Manufacturerís certificate of compliance with these Specifications.
Packet Pg. 669 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11405-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer shall provide special shipping, handling, and storage instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER: PROVIDE:
A. Flo Trend Systems, Inc.
1. 15 cu. yd Roll-Off Sludge MateTM Model SM-15-O-RB
B. Or Equal.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Design Criteria:
Sludge Description Ferric Hydroxide and Manganese Dioxide Greensand Filter Backwash Waste Sludge
Sludge Origin Drain From Backwash Waste Equalization /
Settling Tank
Average Filter Backwash Waste Sludge Volume
(@ 0.5% solids) 286 lbs/day (solids), 6,700 gal/day (@0.5%) Sludge Temperature Ambient
Filter Roll-Off Container Location Outdoors
2.3 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. The Filter Roll-Off Container shall be an epoxy-coated carbon steel container with filter panels that retain solids in the container with supernatant drained through the filter cloth and out of the container. Solids shall be dewatered to the point that they are able to pass EPA Method 9095A: Paint Filter Liquids Test.
B. Filter Roll-Off Container:
1. Minimum quantity and volume for each container shall be 15 cu yd with a 12 cu yd minimum useable capacity.
2. Dimensions of each unit shall not exceed 13í-1 0î L x 8í-6î W x 6í-4î H, and the maximum empty weight shall be 7,000 lb.
3. Filter Roll-Off Container drainage system shall be constructed in such a way so the side walls and vertical center panel drain into a common cavity with drainage ports.
4. Filter Roll-Off Container shall be specifically designed and fabricated for compatibility with OWNERís roll-off truck. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for verifying necessary information regarding OWNERís roll-off truck system required by the Manufacturer during the ordering process to ensure compatibility of the Filter Roll-Off Container with the truck.
5. Materials:
a. Structural Members:
1) Floor shall be A-36 carbon steel minimum 7-gauge plate. Floor cross members are structural channels spaced on 24î centers.
2) Walls shall be A-36 carbon steel minimum 10-gauge plate. Wall gussets are 7 gauge formed plate.
Packet Pg. 670 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11405-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3) Door sealing face will be totally watertight and have an SBR/neoprene blend gasket on the surface area. Door frame shall be made of 4î x 3î x 3/16î structural tubing and with three steel hinges located on the side. Door sealing shall have 1î ratchet chain binders, one on each side and one in the middle of the door. Hinges shall be constructed of 1/2î wall steel tubing and 1î diameter hot-rolled bar pins with welded retainer washers.
4) Internal filter system shall be comprised of a support structure constructed of 1/4î angles, cold formed channels and removable filter support panels with frames made from 1-1/2 No. 9, flat both sides, A-36 carbon steel expanded metal and reinforced with flat bars. The vertical center panel will be self supporting and made with 1/4î structural angels and flat bars.
5) Rails shall be constructed of 6î x 2î x 3/16î structural tubing with 36-1/2î inside spacing.
b. Container shall be seal-welded on all interior surfaces and seal welded on top of all exterior surfaces. Welded and seamless steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A53 grade B. Hot-formed welded and seamless carbon steel tubing shall conform to ASTM A500 grade.
c. All fasteners that may contact sludge shall be 316 stainless steel.
6. Door:
a. Door sealing face will be totally watertight and have an EPDM gasket on the surface area. Door frame shall be made of 4î x 3î x 3/16î structural tubing and with three steel hinges located on the side. Door sealing shall have 1î ratchet chain binders, one on each side and one in the middle of the door. Hinges are constructed of ½î wall steel tubing and 1î diameter hot rolled bar pins with welded retainer washers.
7. Wheels:
a. The Filter Roll-Off Container shall be equipped with 4 wheels, 8î diameter x 8î wide, diagonally braced. Tracking wheels shall be 4î diameter x 6î wide.
8. Filter Panels:
a. Filter media shall be installed on each long side wall and both faces of the vertical center panel. The filter media shall be 57 ½î minimum in vertical height on all faces.
All filter panel supports, bars and media are bolted into place with stainless steel fasteners consisting of studs, flat washers, and acorn nuts. b. All removable filter panels shall have a ºî x 2î wide neoprene gasket installed between the panel and framework.
c. Each filter panel shall be covered with a filter cloth:
1) Polyester-nylon blend with cross-pattern and maximum 600 x 800 micron openings.
2) Minimum 26% open area.
3) Minimum thickness: 0.047î.
4) Tensile Strength: 747 pounds per linear inch.
9. Paint:
a. All exposed welds shall be cleaned of welding slag and rounded. All exposed sharp edges and corners shall be rounded.
b. All steel metal surfaces shall be sandblasted to near white metal and commercially coated with a two-part epoxy primer.
c. The external final surface shall receive 5 mils dry Urethane enamel coating. d. Interior surfaces will have a final coating of epoxy mastic totaling 5 mils dry. e. Filter support panels and tie-down bars shall be hot-dipped galvanized as a protective coating.
Packet Pg. 671 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11405-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
10. Connections:
a. Single point inlet connection at the top shall be 3î NPT and equipped with femal cam hose connector.
b. Two 3î drain outlets with Type A camlock fittings with caps on each side of the container at opposing ends (four total outlets). Drainage system shall be constructed in such a way so the side walls and vertical center panel drain into a common cavity.
Drainage can be either by gravity of by a pump assist.
c. Two 3î clean-out ports with Type A camlock fittings and caps located on front end of container.
d. Two sight gauges.
e. One 2î sample port.
f. Three 2î x 12î removable clean-out panels at the door end.
11. Access Ladders:
One ladder, located on side of the container.
12. Cover:
a. Side to side 18 oz. rolling tarp with tarp supports and hardware to fasten to container to be provided. Provide tarp ratchets and tarp hooks to secure cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in complete accordance with manufacturerís instructions. Unit shall be water tested for complete water tightness.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. A factory trained Manufacturerís Representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test services, and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The serviceman shall make one (1) visit to the site to inspect the installation, assist with startup, and instruct operations and maintenance personnel.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 672 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 11540
GREENSAND FILTRATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. This Section specifies the requirements for the design, fabrication, shipment, installation, startup and performance-testing of a Greensand Filtration System (GFS) for the removal of iron, manganese and arsenic from groundwater by oxidation/filtration.
B. Design Configurations:
1. The GFS configurations are as follows:
a. Single Multi-Cell Horizontal Pressure Filter Tank
C. System Description:
1. The GFS shall be a fully engineered pressure filtration system designed to continuously remove iron, manganese and arsenic from groundwater using greensand media.
2. The GFS will receive groundwater from Well 12, operated by the OWNER. The raw water supply will be pre-chlorinated with sodium hypochlorite to oxidize the soluble iron, manganese and arsenic, and to continuously regenerate the greensand.
3. The raw water supply will be coagulated with ferric chloride upstream of the GFS to allow for arsenic co-precipitation.
4. The GFS shall include, at a minimum, pressure vessel, media, filter internals, piping, valves, instrumentation and controls for a fully automated system.
5. The GFS shall be capable of manual or automatic operation, including the complete control of the backwash and backwash recycle systems.
6. The GFS shall include provisions to recycle backwash water from an external backwash tank (backwash tank separate from GFS) to minimize backwash waste disposal.
7. The GFS system shall use internal filtered water for backwash. No backwash supply water shall be supplemented from an outside source.
8. System components shall be as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
D. Equipment Numbers:
1. Major Equipment: Equipment numbers have been assigned for the major mechanical equipment included as part of the GFS, as shown on the Drawings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: The GFS shall be supplied by a single system supplier who shall be fully responsible for the design, fabrication, coordination, and testing of the GFS.
B. Qualification: The GFS system supplier shall have provided a minimum of five (5) GFS systems of similar size, service conditions, and loading rates, with a satisfactory performance record. References for such installations shall be provided.
Packet Pg. 673 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Field Representative
1. The GFS system supplier’s trained field representative shall meet the following experience requirements:
a. Have overseen the installation and start-up of not less than five pressure filters including three using surface wash.
b. Have overseen the start-up of not less than three water treatment facilities removing iron and manganese.
D. Pressure Vessel
1. The filter pressure vessel shall be fabricated in an ASME Code certified manufacturing facility.
E. Filter System Control Supplier
1. The filter system control supplier shall meet the following technical qualifications. a. The control panel shall be designed, fabricated and programmed in house as a UL508 listed panel shop.
b. The filter system control supplier shall maintain on call technicians and provide control systems with remove access capability.
F. Performance Guarantee:
1. A system performance guarantee shall be provided with the bid to ensure the system and media consistently produce a plant effluent having maximum concentrations of iron, manganese and arsenic as noted below:
a. Iron: 0.3 ppm
b. Manganese: 0.02 ppm
c. Arsenic: 0.08 ppb
2. Samples for determining performance will be the responsibility of the OWNER and will be reported to the GFS supplier at least quarterly during the first year of operation.
At a minimum, the system must attain less than the treatment goals for the first year of operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop drawings showing fabrication, assembly, installation, and wiring diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. A title page, drawing index, and legend/symbols/abbreviation sheet. b. A General Arrangement drawing of the GFS
c. A Process and Instrumentation diagram of the GFS.
d. Electrical control schematics and system wiring diagram. e. Control panel drawings (including annotated panel front view and internal layout/wiring diagrams).
2. Manufacturer’s list of recommended spare parts.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, and engineering data, including dimensions, materials, size, weight, and performance data.
2. Oxidation/Filtration media manufacturer’s technical information, including physical and chemical characteristics, volume and weight to be provided in each contactor vessel, and empty bed contact time at service conditions.
Packet Pg. 674 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Spent media disposal methods, procedures and costs, including analytical methods used to assure disposal in accordance with the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act for hazardous wastes.
C. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.
D. Operations and Maintenance Manuals:
1. The selected manufacturer shall provide six sets of operation and maintenance manuals for the equipment provided. The manuals shall contain the following information at minimum, and shall be in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures:
a. Equipment description.
b. Recommended and limiting operational range.
c. Installation instructions including assembly, alignment, and adjustment procedures.
d. Operation instructions including start-up and shutdown procedures, and troubleshooting guide.
e. Lubrication and regular maintenance instructions.
f. Shop drawings.
g. Parts list with catalog numbers.
E. Quality Control Submittals:
1. A list of any and all instances where the equipment proposed deviates from these specifications.
2. Names and addresses of the factory authorized service organization nearest to project site.
3. Performance Guarantee.
4. Certification that pressure vessels were designed and fabricated in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, latest edition.
5. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide certified copies of factory test reports for functional, performance and hydrostatic tests as specified.
6. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide printed installation instructions.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All equipment and accessories shall be properly protected during shipment such that no damage or deterioration shall occur between shipment and installation:
1. Finished surfaces shall be protected by wooden blanks.
2. Finished ferrous metal surfaces not painted shall be protected from corrosion.
3. Each box and package shall be clearly marked with the contents and total weight.
B. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment until permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER.
C. Manufacturer shall provide any special storage and handling instructions.
Packet Pg. 675 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER
A. Single Multi-Cell Horizontal Pressure Filter Tank
1. Loprest Water Treatment Company; 12-ft diameter x 45.5-ft sideshell 3-cell filter.
2. Or Equal; to be considered for substitution, submittals and sufficient demonstration for ENGINEER’s evaluation and consideration of acceptance must be provided and approved a minimum of 10 days before bid due date.
2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design Flow: 2330 gpm (2563 gpm with recycle).
B. Influent Water Quality:
1. The system shall be designed based on the influent water quality data listed in the following table:
Constituent Well 12
Flow (gpm) 2330
Iron (ug/L) 100
Manganese (ug/L) 130
Arsenic (ug/L) 25
pH 7.6
C. The filter shall be designed to consistently meet the following effluent water quality requirements:
1. Iron: 0.3 ppm, maximum
2. Manganese: 0.02 ppm, maximum
3. Arsenic: 0.08 ppb, maximum
D. Maximum Filter Loading Rate: 4.4 gpm/sq. ft at maximum design flow rate.
E. Maximum Backwash Rate: 12 gpm/sq. ft.
F. Maximum Operating Pressure: 150 psi.
G. Maximum headloss: 10 psi above clean filter headloss.
H. Supplemental Backwash Water Available: None.
I. Filter Vessel Design Requirements:
1. Fabricate tanks in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, latest edition.
2. Plate Thicknesses: Determine in accordance with allowable stresses listed in the Code for material, pressure, and temperature specified.
3. Heads: As specified in ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
Packet Pg. 676 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. System shall consist of one (1) horizontal 3-cell horizontal pressure vessel, filtration media, face piping, valves, instrumentation, and controls.
2. Maximum Operating Weight: 300,000 lbs.
B. Filter Tank:
1. System will consist of one (1) horizontal 3-cell pressure filter, 12' O.D. by 45.5' straight shell for the 2330 GPM unit. The system will be designed for complete filter backwash approximately once every 24 hours of filter runtime or as scheduled by the OWNER.
2. The filter tank shall be of welded steel construction using SA-516 Grade 70 steel, and shall be tested to withstand a hydrostatic pressure 30% in excess of the designed maximum operating pressure. The tank shall be designed with a safety factor and shall be constructed per ASME code section VIII, including stamp.
3. Tank shall include the following features:
a. One (1) 24" round and One (1) 12" x 16" elliptical manhole per cell. b. Flanged nozzles and coupling connections as shown on the drawings. c. Two (2) lifting lugs.
d. Two (2) structural steel I-beam type saddle support legs. e. NSF/ANSI certified manway gaskets.
4. Tank interior shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt, grease, etc. prior to sand blasting and coating, see specification on filter tank paint system.
5. Tank exteriors shall be commercial sandblasted per SSPC-SP6, and painted with one (1) shop coat (2-4 mils DFT) of white oxide primer, see Paint System.
6. Finish painting of the tank exterior shall be field applied by the equipment installer in accordance with Section 09900, Painting of these Specifications.
7. Each filter tank shall be designed to be installed in a seismic region in accordance with the ASCE-7-10 Chapter 15 and local seismic requirements (provided by others).
Site Class D and occupancy category III shall be used. All calculations shall be signed by a Structural of Civil Engineering licensed in the State of California.
C. Filter Inlet Distributor:
1. Each filter cell shall be furnished with a 12-inch full-length header inlet distributor/backwash collector system, constructed of 316L S.S. SCH 10 pipe. The distributing system shall be designed for uniform distribution of inlet water over the entire filter bed and for the uniform collection of the backwash water during the backwash operation.
D. Underdrain System:
1. Filter shall be furnished with a header lateral underdrain system designed to uniformly distribute backwash water and for collection of filtered water. The header shall be a 12-inch SCH 10 316L Stainless Steel. The header shall have 2-inch 3000 lb Stainless Steel couplings welded in place for lateral connection. The laterals shall be of 316L S.S. constructions and shall be the slotted, wedge wire, pipe based design. Slot size shall be a maximum of 0.01 inches.
E. Surface Wash System:
1. The filter shall be furnished with a header lateral surface wash system designed to uniformly distribute surface wash water. The header shall be constructed of 6-inch Packet Pg. 677 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
316L Stainless Steel and laterals shall be constructed of 1½-inch Stainless Steel and shall contain 316 SS spray nozzles.
2. The surface wash supply system shall require pressure at a maximum of 30 psi above the backwash supply water pressure. A small booster pump is to be provided by the CONTRACTOR and in accordance with Section 11205 of these Specifications.
3. CONTRACTOR to provide a backflow prevention device in accordance with Section 15200 of these Specifications to allow connection of surface wash supply system to distribution water.
F. Sampling cocks and valves, including filter inlet, filter outlet and individual cell outlet ports shall be furnished.
G. Gravel Supporting Bed:
1. Concrete
a. Place lean concrete (1000 psi) in the bottom of the vessel up to the base of the gravel support bed (18"). Concrete shall be supplied and installed by equipment installer.
b. Concrete used for filter gravel supporting bed shall be NSF/ANSI Certified in accordance with the following:
1) Cement shall be NSF/ANSI 61 certified.
2) Admixtures shall be NSF/ANSI 61 certified.
3) Aggregates shall be tested and approved by one of the following methods:
a) Provide test cylinders using the proposed mix designs for the concrete that come in direct contact with potable and test as a Barrier Material per Chapter 5 of NSF/ANSI 61 – 2005. Concrete shall be tested for all CA title 22 radionuclides listed in table 64442.
b) Gross Alpha radionuclides testing of the dry aggregates using test procedures acceptable to the California Department of Public Health. 4) Testing shall be conducted by an ANSI or ELAP accredited product certification body for Drinking Water Quality.
5) If NSF/ANSI 61 certified cement and admixtures are not available the following testing procedure shall be required:
a) Provide concrete test cylinders for each mix design that will come in direct contact with potable water to an approved testing laboratory. b) Concrete specimens shall be soak-tested to verify water quality is in compliance with NSF/ANSI 61-2011 Chapter 5 – Barrier Materials.
Concrete specimens shall be tested for the items listed in NSF/ANSI 61 Table 3.1 – Portland and Hydraulic Cements.
c) Testing shall be conducted by an ANSI or ELAP accredited product certification body for Drinking Water Quality.
6) If it is impractical to provide NSF-61 certified concrete for the filter gravel supporting bed, alternately an NSF-61 concrete coating can be applied on top of the concrete to separate the concrete from the potable water within the filter. Follow all manufacturer recommendations for product preparation and application.
a) Product: Masterseal 581. 2 coats at a 2 lb/sq yd application rate for each coat., or equal.
2. Gravel
a. A gravel support bed shall be incorporated in the bottom of each vessel, consisting of two (2) layers of graded gravel, with the largest size gravel loaded into the filter first and the succeeding smaller sizes placed on top. The gravel graduations shall be as follows:
Packet Pg. 678 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
6 x 12.......................................... (3.0) inches 1/8" x 1/4”......................................... (6.0) inches b. The gravel shall be "Water Treatment" quality, washed and screened, and shipped in clearly marked one hundred (100#) pound bags. The gravel must meet the requirements of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) Specification number B-100-89 and be NSF/ANSI 61 Certified. c. All gravel shall be installed by the equipment installer.
H. Filtration Media:
1. Provide filter with Manganese Greensand filter media to form an 18-inch bed depth.
2. In addition to the Greensand filter media, the equipment supplier shall furnish specifically graded Anthracite to form a 12-inch bed depth. The Anthracite is to meet the following criteria:
a. Specific Gravity: Approx 1.6.
b. Effective Size: 0.6 to 0.8 mm.
c. Uniformity Coefficient: Less than 1.6.
3. The combined Greensand and Anthracite bed depth shall total 30-inches.
4. All filtration media shall be shipped in one (1) cubic foot bags on pallets.
5. Greensand shall be loaded into the filter and conditioned in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Greensand fines must be removed from the filter prior to loading the Anthracite.
6. All filter media shall be installed by equipment installer.
7. All filter media must meet the requirements of the AWWA specification number B100-89 and be NSF/ANSI 61 certified.
I. Filter Exterior Valving: The filter shall be furnished with an exterior automatic valve nest consisting of the following:
1. Butterfly Valves:
a. Butterfly Valves:
1) Pressure Class: 125/150 lb.
2) Fittings: Wafer-style ends
3) Body: Polyester coated cast iron
4) Disk: Ductile iron nylon 11 coated
5) Stem: 416 stainless steel.
6) Seat: EPDM.
7) The valves shall be bi-directional with removal seats to provide a bubble tight shutoff pressure at 175 psi.
8) Each valve shall be equipped with electric motor operators for actuation. 9) Provide automatic valves for the following filter sequences:
a) Tank Cell Inlets: 12-inch.
b) Tank Outlet: 12-inch.
c) Tank Cell Backwash Outlets: 12-inch.
d) Tank Rinse Outlet: 12-inch.
e) Surface Wash Inlets: 6-inch.
10)Manufacturer and Product:
a) Bray; Series 30/31 with electric actuators
b) Or equal.
b. Electric Actuators
1) General
a) Control drive shall have integrated electronics and be able to operate in ambient temperatures of -40°F. (-40°C.) to 185°F. (85°C.).
Packet Pg. 679 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b) The drive shall be furnished with a 120 volt AC, single phase, 60 Hz, synchronous motor. Motor shall be capable of withstanding 60 starts / stops per minute or a temporary stall condition without overheating.
Design of the motor shall be such that electrical and thermal overloads are not required.
c) Motor bearings shall be maintenance-free. Motor shall be non-coasting with instant magnetic braking, and shall be self-locking and selfreleasing without the use of a separate brake winding, mechanical brake or worm gear mechanism. Control drive shall be designed to stay in place upon loss of power and shall be capable of holding a load equal to at least 200% of the model’s rated output without AC power. The drive motor shall be a TENV with Class H insulation.
d) Control drive shall be rated for torque output as required by and coordinated with the valve manufacturer. Stall torque shall be selflimiting, not exceeding two and one half times the rated torque; torque switches shall not be required. Drive shall operate CCW on increasing signal, with timing as required by the process function of the valve installation and dictated by the filter system manufacturer. Gear train shall have high efficiency spur gears constructed of heat treated alloy steel or ductile iron only. Readily available gear modules shall provide for a range of torque and timing combinations within the drive’s rated capacity, and shall be field interchangeable. Drive train parts shall be lubricated with a premium, heavy-duty lithium-based lubricant. No oil baths shall be used for lubrication. Control drives shall be able to operate in any mounting orientation.
e) Two SPDT over-travel limit switches shall be provided for over-travel protection. In addition, the drive shall have auxiliary SPDT switches which are infinitely adjustable over the full range of travel. Switches shall be rated for 6 amps at 120 volts AC. Drive shall have integral mechanical stops capable of limiting travel of the drive and load. f) A low-speed, disc-type motor Handwheel shall permit manual operation of the drive without electrical power and without a declutching mechanism. g) A five-position, drive-mounted electric Handswitch shall be provided to permit local electrical operation of the unit for control adjustment or operation on loss of control signal. With the Handswitch in AUTO mode, drives shall respond to control signals automatically. Additional dry contact to be provided to the PC to indicate that the actuator is in “Remote”.
h) Enclosure shall be totally enclosed, cast, weatherproof, dust-tight, NEMA 4X construction. All field connections shall be made in one terminal compartment. Separate conduit entrances shall be available for power and control wiring.
2) Controls:
a) Where modulating control is required, drive shall meet the following requirements:
1. Drive shall provide modulating control through an integral, digital control module which positions the drive in proportion to the 4-20 mA range control input signal.
2. The control module shall be capable of initiating shaft movement in steps down to 0.1°.
3. Upon loss of input signal, the drive shall be field configurable to move to any predetermined position.
Packet Pg. 680 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
4. Standard control features should include:
Field-configurable, pre-determined action upon loss of input signal Stall protection
Split signal operation for control of multiple drives
External position feedback signal
b) Where only open/close control is required, drive shall meet the following requirements:
1. Drive shall provide open / close operation to pre-set travel limits upon closure of an automatic controller or by a manually operated switch, and have a 0.1% position repeatability, with end-of-travel limits adjustable over the full range of travel of the drive. c) Position Feedback
1. Drive shall be equipped with a contactless position sensing device and be capable of providing an isolated feedback signal with a 4–20 mA or 1–5 V dc range. The sensing device shall have infinite resolution.
3) Manufacturer and Product
a) Beck Electric Actuators Group 11 Quarter-Turn Rotary Actuator b) No Equal
2. Combination Air Valves:
a. Body: Cast iron.
b. Floats: Stainless steel.
c. Connections: 1-inch, threaded
d. Manufacturer and Product:
1) ARI, Model 40.
2) Or equal.
3. Rate of Flow Control Valve (Field Adjustable):
a. Sized based on maximum flow rates required.
b. Backwash Flow Control Valve:
1) The size of the filter backwash flow control valve shall be based on the maximum backwash flow rate required, with a maximum pressure loss of three (3) psi through the globe valve excluding the loss caused by the orifice plate.
2) Filter backwash rate of flow control valve shall be a 12", 125# class connection with reduced port, Y-strainer and isolation valves where necessary on the copper tubing.
3) Valves shall be flanged flat face, ductile iron main body and cover, epoxy coated, bronze trim, O-ring of Buna-N and pilot control valves. 4) Furnish stainless steel tubing pilot lines with stainless steel fittings. 5) Manufacturer and Product:
a) Cla-Val Company; Model 640.
b) Or equal.
4. Manual Valves:
a. Filter Drain:
1) Size: 4-inch.
2) Type: Same as automatic valves specified above.
3) Ends: Flanged.
4) Manufacturer and Product:
a) Bray; Series 30/31.
b) Or equal.
b. Air Vent Valves:
1) Size: 1-1/2 inch.
Packet Pg. 681 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2) Type: 316 S.S ball valves.
3) Manufacturer and Product:
a) Nibco; Model T585-70.
b) Or equal.
J. Filter System Piping:
1. General:
a. All pipe supports for face and interconnecting piping shall be furnished by the equipment installer.
b. All system face and interconnecting pipe shall be furnished with the required bolts, studs, nuts, and gaskets as follows:
1) Bolts: 316 Stainless Steel.
2) Studs: 316 Stainless Steel.
3) Nuts: 316 Stainless Steel.
4) Gaskets: NSF/ANSI 61 Certified, 1/8” thick.
2. All filter face piping 4-inches and above is to consist of schedule 40 ASTM-A53 steel pipe with 150# flanges (flat face) and 125# flanged cast iron fittings.
3. All filter face piping 3-inches and below shall be 316L stainless steel pipe and fittings (no paint).
4. All fabricated steel piping shall be sandblasted per SSPC SP-10 and shop applied NSF epoxy. Cast iron fittings are AWWA cement lined.
5. All piping exterior surfaces shall be sandblasted per SSPC SP-6 and shop applied primer plus top coat.
6. Finish painting of the filter system exterior piping shall be field applied by the equipment installer.
K. Paint System:
1. Filter Tank Internal:
a. Surface preparation shall be an abrasive blast. Conform to the requirements of SSPC-SP10 "Near White Blast Cleaning". Paint all blasted surfaces within 8 hours of blasting. Remove all weld splatter by grinding or chipping prior to sandblasting.
b. Apply all material in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply first coat immediately after surface preparation. Apply each coat to a uniform, even coating; lay material in one direction and finish at right angles. Allow material to thoroughly dry between coats. Scuff, sand and remove all runs, sags, over spray, surface roughness and other defects between each coat. c. Products shall be NSF 61 and NSF 600 certified for potable water application.
Product shall be a high solids epoxy, Tnemec Series 22, L140 or equal. Coating shall be applied to give a finish DFT of 16 mils minimum. Apply as many coats as needed to meet manufacturer’s recommendation for thickness per coat.
2. Filter Tank Exterior:
a. Surface preparation shall be an abrasive blast. Conform to the requirements of SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Paint all blasted surfaces within 8 hours of blasting. Remove all weld splatter by grinding or chipping prior to sandblasting.
b. Apply all material in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Apply first coat immediately after surface preparation. Apply each coat to a uniform, even coating; lay material in one direction and finish at right angles. Allow material to thoroughly dry between coats. Scuff, sand and remove all runs, sags, over spray, surface roughness and other defects between each coat.
Packet Pg. 682 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Apply System 300 (two 4-6 MDFT coats of Polyamidoamine Epoxy followed by two 2-3 MDFT coats of Polyurethane - reference Specification Section 09900) to the tank exterior prior to shipping. Color selection of the Polyurethane finish coating by OWNER.
d. Provide color-matched touch-up paint for the CONTRACTOR to touch-up the tank after installation.
L. Accessories:
1. Filter Pressure Devices:
a. One (1) differential pressure transmitter with a NEMA 4 enclosure to detect the d/p across the filter common inlet and common outlet headers. 1) Manufacturer: IFM Efector, no equal.
b. Two (2) liquid filled pressure gauges with 4.0" diameter dials, and bronze bourdon tubes shall be furnished for each filter unit inlet and outlet. c. Each pressure switch and gauge shall be furnished with brass fittings and manual isolating valves.
d. Sampling cocks and valves, including filter inlet, filter outlet and individual cell outlet ports shall be furnished.
2. Flowmeter:
a. The electromagnetic flow meter shall include an integral mounted transmitter/signal converter in a NEMA 4X enclosure. The meters shall have an ebonite liner, Hallestoy C electrodes, internal grounding probe, 150 lb flanges. b. Flow meter shall be provided for the combined surface wash and backwash wastewater flow (12-inch size).
c. Integral converter/transmitter direct mount to sensor with 4-20mA readout, 24 VDC.
d. Manufacturer and Product:
1) Endress+Hauser Promag 500
2) No Equal.
3. Filter Controls:
a. General
1) The filter manufacturer shall furnish an Automatic Filter Control System Program for integration with the overall plant control PLC. Overall plant control PLC shall be Allen-Bradley CompactLogix L19 and automatic filter control system programming will be consistent with the requirements of that PLC.
2) Tagging for the filter system components in the Automatic Filter Control System Program shall be consistent with the contract drawings and OWNER standards.
3) Operator Control Description
a) Overview – The Automatic Filter Control System Program shall automatically control raw water pumping, filtration, backwashing, backwash water reclaiming and chemical dosing. Manual control of these functions is available using the “HAND” mode.
b) The control system shall be configured and programmed to provide control functions as described in this Section and in accordance with Section 13305, Control Descriptions, of these Specifications.
c) Backwash Triggers
1. Differential Pressure – Backwash starts when the pressure difference between the filter inlet and outlet exceeds a preset value.
2. Runtime - Runtime accumulates while the filter is in service. Backwash starts when the filter’s runtime timer reaches a preset value.
Packet Pg. 683 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Scheduler – A backwash may be scheduled for any day of the week and any hour of the day. Up to one backwash per day, seven days per week can be programmed.
4. Manual – When this mode is selected, the backwash will begin when the operator presses the Start button.
d) Backwash Operation – The backwash procedure has three main processes with valves sequenced to minimize pressure spikes. The backwash waste water shall be collected, settled and re-filtered to minimize waste discharge.
1. Simultaneous backwash and surface wash expands and agitates the filter media to loosen and remove the waste solids.
2. Backwash only allows media layers to recompose into their original order while continuing to remove solids from the filter.
3. Rinse to Waste to remove mobilized solids prior to resuming service. e) Alarms
1. Filter operation is monitored for alarm conditions while the filter is in service or backwashing. Alarms are not monitored while the system is off. New alarms will flash on the alarm screen until acknowledged or reset. Acknowledged alarms are highlighted but not flashing. The Reset button clears all alarms and resets their timers. Alarms that will cause the filter system to shut down are selected during programming. After a shutdown alarm is displayed for 30 seconds, the system will shut down to prevent escalation of the alarm condition. Alarm history and details are available from the OIT’s built-in event logger. This function is available from the alarm screen. 4) Power Failure
a) If power to the PLC is lost all valves shall fail to “service” condition, meaning that all filters shall be placed into normal service mode. If a filter is in backwash then the backwash process will be placed in hold until the return of power at which time it will resume and complete the process. 5) Alarms
a) The following alarms shall be provided in the control programming:
b) Backwash required
c) Backwash abort
d) High waste tank water level
e) high filter differential pressure
f) low chlorine residual
g) high turbidity
h) backwash not allowed pump(s) fail to run; and
i) other alarm conditions affecting filter operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect all equipment and materials against approved Shop Drawings at time of delivery. Equipment and materials damaged or not conforming to the approved Shop Drawings shall be noted. The GSF Supplier shall be notified immediately and steps taken to rectify, repair, or correct the deficiencies.
Packet Pg. 684 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 11540-13
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Equipment and materials received are under the care and responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. These items shall be stored by the CONTRACTOR in a dry location and protected from the elements according to the GSF Supplier instructions for the treatment system.
C. Equipment and materials shall be handled in an approved manner according to the GSF Supplier’s instructions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of the GSF and appurtenances shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR and shall be in accordance with the Engineer’s Drawings and with the GFS Supplier’s drawings, instructions and recommendations. Conflicts of information shall be called to the attention of the ENGINEER.
B. The GSF shall be delivered by the supplier and offloaded, placed appropriately, and secured by the CONTRACTOR with anchor bolts to the building concrete foundation in accordance with the supplier’s recommendations.
C. CONTRACTOR shall support piping independent of equipment. Equipment shall be free from all loads and stresses induced by the piping.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect all equipment as it arrives and is offloaded, before installation and if damaged; notify the carrier and the GSF supplier promptly. Do not install damaged equipment until the CONTRACTOR makes repairs in accordance with supplier’s written instructions and approval.
3.3 START-UP:
A. The filter manufacturer shall assist in the start-up and commissioning the water treatment system.
B. The filter manufacturer shall provide instructions on the placement of the filter media.
C. The filter manufacturer shall be responsible for original start up of equipment furnished.
A certificate of "operational readiness" shall be issued prior to OWNER operation.
D. The filter manufacturer shall conduct two days of operator training with hands on operation at the plant.
E. Submit certifications from the manufacturer stating that the complete filtration system and associated equipment have been properly sized, installed, seismically restrained, adjusted and tested, and ready for full time operation including, but not limited to:
1. Testing of internal pipes for clogging and uniform flow.
2. Placement of concrete fill, support gravel, and filter media, including washing and skimming of all media fines.
3. Conducting performance tests.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 685 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 686 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011805-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 11805
INLINE RAPID MIXER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: This section includes the manufacture, supply, testing and installation of Inline Rapid Mixers complete and operational.
B. Equipment Tag Numbers: The following equipment identification numbers have been assigned to the equipment that shall be provided under this Section:
1. EW12_MXR_02130 Inline Rapid Mixer
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with the requirements and recommendations of the following references, except as otherwise specified:
1. National Electric Code (NEC)
2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
4. ASTM International (ASTM)
B. All equipment furnished under the Section shall be of a design and manufacture that has been used in similar applications, and it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the OWNER that the quality is equal to equipment made by the manufacturer(s) specifically named herein.
C. Provide a factory operational and performance test on the pre-assembled system and documentation of results prior to shipment.
D. Warranty: Provide a 1-yr warranty on all equipment from date of start-up. Warranty shall cover defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any component should fail during the warranty period, it shall be corrected and the unit restored to service at no expense to the OWNER.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330 and as specified herein.
B. Submit the following items to the ENGINEER for approval:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Detailed drawings showing component and assembly dimensions, location of mechanical and electrical connections, weights of all equipment, installation details, and accessory details.
b. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers. c. Drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts.
2. Product Data:
a. Descriptive literature, specifications, and engineering data. b. Materials of construction for all components and accessories.
Packet Pg. 687 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011805-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Impeller type, number, and size.
d. Mixer weight, motor weight, and complete assembly weight. e. Complete motor nameplate data, as defined by NEMA.
f. Where specified, complete variable frequency drive information. g. Factory finish system.
3. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide in accordance with Section 01330.
4. Quality Control Submittals:
a. A list of any and all instances where the equipment proposed deviates from these specifications.
b. Names and addresses of the factory authorized service organization nearest the project site.
c. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide printed installation instructions.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All equipment and accessories shall be properly protected during shipment such that no damage or deterioration shall occur between shipment and installation.
1. Finished surfaces shall be protected by wooden blanks.
2. Finished ferrous metal surfaces not painted shall be protected from corrosion.
3. Each box and package shall be clearly marked with the contents and total weight.
B. Manufacturer shall provide any special storage and handling instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER: PROVIDE:
A. Hayward Gordon Model HIM-20-12
B. Or equal.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE
A. Water Quality: City of Redding Groundwater
1. Flow: 2,330 gpm.
2. Specific Gravity: 1.0.
3. Viscosity: 1.0 centipoise.
4. Temperature: 55 to 75 deg F.
5. Coagulant: Up to 15 mg/L FeCl3.
6. Preoxidant: Up to 4 mg/L free chlorine.
B. Performance: Inline rapid mixer shall provide near instantaneous dispersion of coagulant and preoxidant.
C. Operational Characteristics:
1. Constant Speed.
2. Operating Speed: 1200 rpm maximum.
3. Maximum pressure drop: 1.0 psi.
Packet Pg. 688 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011805-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Vessel:
1. 150 PSIG minimum design pressure.
2. Test Pressure: 225 PSIG.
3. Flange connections:
a. 12-inch ANSI 150# flanges for piping connection conforming to AWWA C-207 Class D sizes for 12-inch diameter pipe.
b. ANSI 150# flange connection for mixer mounting.
4. Provide internal baffling for mixing pattern optimization.
5. Provide two (2) 1/2-inch female NPT connections on upstream side of mixer.
Provide plugs for these connections.
6. Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
B. Drive:
1. Direct drive bearing-frame support.
2. All drive bearings shall be antifriction type, roller or ball bearings.
3. All bearings within the drive shall be rated for a minimum B10 life of 100,000 hours.
C. Mechanical Seal:
a. The mixer will be sealed by a stuffing box fitted with a John Crane Teflon packing and a Teflon lantern ring.
b. º-inch NPT ports shall be provided for addition of packing flush water and a 3/8-inch NPT packing drain port shall be provided. Packing leakage shall be piped to a floor drain.
D. Impellers:
1. Two (2) turbines shall be provided.
2. Minimum impeller diameter: 5.5 inches.
3. Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Blades shall be welded to the hub.
5. Hubs shall be fixed to the shaft using set screws.
6. Maximum combined stress shall not exceed 11,000 PSI under maximum operating load.
E. Shaft:
1. Overhung design, underwater bearings shall not be allowed.
2. Operating speed shall not exceed 70% of first lateral critical speed.
3. Material: Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Shaft diameter: 1-3/4 inch minimum.
5. Maximum combined stress shall not exceed 9,000 PSI under maximum operating load.
6. Shaft straightness shall be such that the maximum total indicated runout at the lower end of the shaft does not exceed 0.125-inch for every 10-feet of shafting, as measured when turning over by hand.
Packet Pg. 689 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011805-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Motor:
1. Squirrel cage induction type.
2. 2.0 HP
3. Synchronous speed shall be 1200 rpm
4. 3 PH, 60 HZ, 460 V.
5. TEFC.
6. 1.15 SF.
7. Class F insulation.
8. Design B.
G. Spare Parts and Special Tools: Provide the following:
1. One complete stuffing box.
2. Any special tools required for assembly, disassembly, or adjustment of the mixer drive, shaft, and impellers.
H. Equipment Identification Plate: 16-gauge stainless steel with º-inch die-stamped equipment tag number securely mounted in an easily visible location.
I. Lifting Lugs: Provide for all equipment assemblies weighing in excess of 100 pounds.
J. Factory Finish:
1. Vessel Interior
a. 316 stainless steel vessel interiors to remain unpainted.
2. Exterior Surfaces:
a. All non stainless steel metals will be hand tool cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-2 prior to priming, and prime painted at the factory with Amercoat 370. Paint will be applied 4-6 mils per coat and shall not exceed 15 mils.
Allow a minimum of ninety (90) minutes drying time before handling, and a total curing time of twenty (20) hours.
b. CONTRACTOR shall provide finish painting per Specification Section 09900- Painting.
c. All corrodible non-painted carbon steel and cast iron surfaces will be given a liberal coating of easily removable rust preventative such as Rust Veto Spray or Equal.
3. The following surfaces are not to be painted:
a. Non-corrodible surfaces
b. Corrodible finished machined surfaces
c. Electric motors are given motor manufacturers standard finish suitable for the intended installation location.
Packet Pg. 690 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011805-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturerís written instructions.
B. Connections to piping shall be properly aligned so as not to impose strain on the connection. All piping and valves shall be supported in accordance with Specification Section 15010 ñ Pipe Support Systems. Support piping independent of Inline Rapid Mixer.
C. Check and align motor, vessel, and piping, etc. after mixer is installed to ensure alignment and assembly has been unchanged from factory assembly conditions. Make adjustments required to place system in proper operating condition.
D. Installation shall include furnishing and applying an initial supply of grease and oil, recommended by manufacturer.
E. Unit as furnished and installed shall not vibrate or produce noise in excess of mixer manufacturerís recommendations.
F. Motor vibration shall not exceed limits as required by latest revision of NEMA MG 1 standards.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test services, and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The serviceman shall make one (1) visit to the site to inspect the installation, assist with startup, and instruct operations and maintenance personnel. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 691 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 011805-
6 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 692 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13006-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13006
PRE-ENGINEERED FRP ENCLOSURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pre-engineered enclosures.
B. Electrical wiring and devices for pre-engineered enclosures.
C. Heating equipment for pre-engineered enclosures.
D. Ventilation equipment for pre-engineered enclosures.
E. Air conditioning equipment for pre-engineered enclosures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 ñ Cast-inñPlace Concrete: Concrete Equipment Pad B. Section 11400 ñ Chemical Metering Pump System
C. Division 16 ñ Electrical Connections
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 518 ñ Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
B. ASTM D 256 ñ Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
C. ASTM D 618 ñ Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing.
D. ASTM D 638 ñ Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
E. ASTM D 732 ñ Standard Test Method for Shear Strength Plastics by Punch Tool.
F. ASTM D 790 ñ Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
G. ASTM D 792 ñ Standard Test Method for Specific Gravity (Relative Density) and Density of Plastics by Displacement.
H. ASTM D 1622 ñ Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
Packet Pg. 693 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13006-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
I. ASTM D 2583 ñ Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
J. ASTM E 84 ñ Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.
B. Submit the following items to the ENGINEER for approval:
1. Shop drawings:
a. Complete drawings and details of the enclosure, appurtenances, and anchorage system, including critical dimensions, jointing and connections, fasteners and anchors.
b. Materials of construction.
c. Sizes, spacing, and location of structural members, connections, attachments, openings and fasteners.
d. Wiring diagrams.
2. Product Data:
a. Complete design calculations for enclosure, reinforcement, and anchorage system. Calculations shall be signed by a registered Civil or Structural Engineer licensed to practice in California.
3. Samples: 8-inch square sample of representative wall construction.
4. Quality Control Submittals:
a. A list of any and all instances where the enclosure and/or equipment proposed deviates from these specifications.
b. Names, addresses and phone numbers of the factory authorized service organization nearest the project site.
c. Upon approval of shop drawings, manufacturer shall provide printed installation instructions.
5. Operations and Maintenance Manuals, in accordance with Section 01300.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Size: provide one-piece molded construction FRP enclosures:
1. Size:
a. Provide enclosure large enough to mount Chemical Metering Skid per Specification section 11400 and all enclosure components. b. Minimum dimensions:
1) 3 feet - 6 inches (W) x 2 feet - 4 inches (D) x 3 feet - 3 inches (H) B. Construction:
1. One-piece construction.
2. Paneled construction shall not be acceptable.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products indoors or in weather protected area until installation. Protect from construction traffic and damage.
Packet Pg. 694 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13006-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Tracom
B. Warminster Fiberglass Company
C. Or Equal.
D. D. Warranty: Enclosures shall be warranted to be free of defects in workmanship and materials for a period of two years from date of shipment.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Size: As shown on the drawings.
B. Wind Load: 135 miles per hour.
C. Snow Load: 40 pounds per square foot.
D. Seismic Zone 4.
E. Ambient Temperature:
1. Minimum: 20 deg F.
2. Maximum: 115 deg F.
F. Suitable for continuous outdoor use in direct sunlight.
G. Enclosure shall not allow rainwater entry, and shall protect stored equipment as well as attached electrical devices from rain.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Enclosure:
1. General:
a. One-piece, molded, composite FRP construction.
b. Smooth interior and exterior satin finish.
c. Integral walls and roof with smooth radii for all corners, without floor.
2. Laminate:
a. Isophthalic polyester resin with high performance, chopped, commercial grade glass strand fiber reinforcement with a suitable coupling agent. b. Minimum glass content: 30 percent.
c. Exterior surface: Minimum 15 mil gel coat with UV inhibitors and satin finish, lightly textured and free from fiber pattern, roughness, or other irregularities. d. Exterior laminate: Minimum 1/8 inch thick, chemically bonded to the exterior surface gel coat and encapsulating the foam core.
e. Interior laminate: Minimum 1/8 inch thick, chemically bonded to the interior gel coat and encapsulating the foam core.
Packet Pg. 695 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13006-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
f. Interior surface: Minimum 15 mil gel coat with UV inhibitors and textured finish, free from exposed glass or other irregularities. g. Laminate properties:
1) Tensile strength: 14,000 psi.
2) Flexural strength: 27,000 psi.
3) Flexural modulus: 1,000,000 psi.
4) Shear strength: 12,000 psi.
5) Barcol hardness: 40.
6) Density: 93.6 pounds per cubic foot.
7) Specific gravity: 1.5.
h. Foam Core:
1) Rigid, closed cell, self-extinguishing (Class 1), polyisocyanurate foam, with a density of 2.3 pounds per cubic foot.
2) 1-inch thickness, with minimum insulating value of R-7. 3) Core Properties:
a) Thermal conductivity: 0.145 BTU/inch/hr/SF/deg-F.
b) Density: 2.3 pounds per cubic foot.
c) Shear Strength: 25 psi.
d) Tensile strength: 45 psi.
e) Compressive strength (7 percent deflection/yield): 35 psi.
3. The manufacturer shall maintain a continuous quality control program and upon request shall furnish to the engineer certified test results of the physical properties.
4. Door:
a. Fully opening gullwing front/top access door with (2) self-locking door support arms.
b. Construction:
1) One-piece molded fiberglass construction.
2) Mount door with stainless steel continuous piano hinge. 3) Provide stainless steel lockable hasp (for user supplied pad lock) for each door.
4) Neoprene strip gasket with flexible lock to retain permanent grip. 5) Provide cushioned door lift handle identical to enclosure lift handles.
5. Lift Handles:
a. Provide (4) cushioned lift handles (2 ñ per enclosure end).
6. Floor: None, enclosure shall be installed on equipment pad.
7. Internal Mounting Flange:
a. 3-inches wide by 1/4-inch thick (minimum) with closed cell neoprene sponge rubber gasket 2-inches wide by 3/8-inch thick to provide a weather tight seal around the enclosure perimeter.
8. Molded-in Rain Gauge Cavity.
B. Electrical:
1. Circuit Breaker Panel:
a. 120/240 VAC, 1 phase, surface mount.
b. 125 amp, main breaker, 12 branch, NEMA 1 metallic body. c. Electrical Wiring: 12 gauge stranded, color-coded THHN/THWN/MTW electrical wiring in rigid, U.L. listed, corrosion/impact resistant, non-conductive, schedule 40 PVC conduit.
2. GFCI Receptacles:
a. Provide interior GFCI receptacles as shown on the drawings.
Packet Pg. 696 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13006-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b. 20A, 125V feed-through, with 5mA +/- 1mA trip threshold.
3. Switches:
a. Provide two single ON/OFF switches in duplex box, one for interior light, one for fan.
4. Interior Lighting:
a. 100 watt, vapor-tight LED light.
b. Wire to single ON/OFF light switch.
C. HVAC:
1. Fan:
a. Exhaust fan with fiberglass gravity shutter and PVC shroud with insect screen. b. Aluminum frame with steel blades.
c. Wire to single ON/OFF fan switch.
d. 140 cfm, 7-inch diameter.
e. Input power: 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2. Gravity operated fiberglass intake shutter, with heavy duty fiberglass frame an exterior removable stainless steel insect screen.
3. Unit Heater
a. Line powered wall heater.
b. 500 watt (1707 BtuH), 120 VAC, powder coated finish with automatic reset thermal overload protection with indicator light and built in thermostat.
4. Thermostat:
a. NEMA 4X electric line voltage thermostat for remote operation of heater. b. 30 to 110 deg F range.
2.4 ANCHORAGE AND FASTENERS
A. Enclosure manufacturer is responsible for sizing anchor bolts. Include recommended bolt size and calculations in submittal. Anchor bolts shall be minimum ½-inch diameter.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Exterior Color: Tan/Sand.
B. Interior Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Enclosure and accessories shall be properly protected such that no damage or deterioration shall occur between shipment and installation.
B. Each box and package shall be clearly marked with the contents and total weight.
C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment until permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER.
D. Manufacturer shall provide any special storage and handling instructions.
Packet Pg. 697 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13006-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that concrete is level and true to plane and of correct dimensions to receive structure. Correct any deficiencies before proceeding.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Layout anchor bolt pattern according to drawings. Drill holes of depth and diameter required by anchor bolt manufacturer.
B. Erect structure as shown in Drawings and/or in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Erect structures true to line and plumb, free of twist and warp.
D. Furnish and install all required fasteners and anchors for a complete installation.
E. Install and test accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust components for proper operation.
B. Leave project site clean and free of debris.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 698 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13008-1
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
SECTION 13008
PRE-ENGINEERED METAL SHADE STRUCTURE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install a pre-engineered commercial-grade metal shade structure.
B. The shade structure shall be a permanent metal structure designed to shield people, products, and materials from rain, snow, sun, and ultraviolet radiation. The structure shall consist of all structural members, fasteners, and metal roofing. The completed structure shall be as generally shown on the Drawings.
C. The shade structure is a deferred submittal item which requires a separate building permit from the City of Redding Building Department. Following review and approval by ENGINEER the shade structure drawings and structural calculations shall be submitted to the Building Department for a building permit. CONTRACTOR shall include in their bid all time and effort required to obtain a building permit.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system to be furnished under this section shall be the product of firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of pre-engineered metal structures and canopies.
B. Qualifications: The Manufacturer and Installer shall have experience in producing similar structures, and shall show evidence of five (5) installations in satisfactory operation for at least five (5) years.
C. Warranty: Furnish manufacturerís extended guarantee or warranty, with OWNER named as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of manufacturer, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during a minimum period of 5 years and as stated below after date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work as specified in the General Conditions.
1. Conditions: Finish on metal panels, flashing, and trim shall not chalk, crack, check, blister, peel, flake, chip, or lose adhesion for twenty (20) years.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit the following items to the ENGINEER for approval:
1. Shop drawings, stamped and signed by a registered Civil or Structural Engineer licensed to practice in California:
a. Design load criteria.
b. Complete drawings and details of the shade structure and anchorage system, including members, critical dimensions, jointing and connections, and fasteners Packet Pg. 699 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13008-2
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
and anchors for all primary and secondary framing systems and components and cladding.
c. Column reactions.
d. Materials of construction.
e. Material specifications for framing members and connections.
2. Product Data:
a. Manufacturerís literature and technical data.
b. Complete design calculations for structure and anchorage system. Calculations shall be signed by a registered Civil or Structural Engineer licensed to practice in California.
c. Protective coatings system.
3. Quality Control Submittals:
a. Certificate of Compliance with these specifications. b. Copy of the manufacturerís Quality Assurance Program. c. Manufacturerís Certificate of Proper Installation.
d. Manufacturerís warranty.
e. Metal Roofing: Submit sample 12î long x full panel width showing proposed metal gauge, seam profile and specified finish.
f. Provide reference samples of paint colors and textures as required by the ENGINEER. Reference samples will show the color and texture of the final paint to be applied and shall be approved by the ENGINEER prior to erection.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Manufacturerís directions.
B. Any damage that occurs to the shade structure components in storage or handling shall be corrected prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Steel Truss and Supply, Redding, CA 530-365-3700
B. Borga Steel Buildings and Components, Fowler, CA, 559-834-5375 C. Butler Manufacturing Company, Visalia, CA, 559-651-5300 D. Or equal.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Size: As shown on the Drawings.
B. Suitable for continuous weather exposure at the project location.
Packet Pg. 700 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13008-3
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
C. Seismic (design shall be in accordance with the 2013 edition of the California Building Code):
1. Seismic Risk Category: IV.
2. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.5.
3. Seismic Design Category: D.
4. SS=1.078g.
5. S1=0.431g.
6. SDS=0.768g.
7. SD1=0.537g.
8. Site Class=D (assumed).
D. Roof Load:
1. Minimum Live Load: 20 psf (Reducible).
2. Roof Snow Load: 30 psf (Non-reducible).
E. Wind Load:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 105 miles per hour (ASCE 7-16).
2. Exposure Category: C.
F. Deflection:
1. Roof and column members shall meet the deflection limits of CBC Table 1604.3.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Steel Structures and Framework:
1. Anchor system: The shade structure shall be anchored in reinforced, poured concrete footings as shown on Drawings.
2. Steel Components:
a. The steel components of the structure shall be designed to meet the design loads specified.
b. Steel greater than 16 gauge thickness shall be manufactured per ASTM A1003 and AISI standards with yield strengths in excess of 50 ksi. c. Carbon steel, when used, shall be ASTM A36 for plates, angles and channels, ASTM A53, Grade B for pipe members, ASTM A500, Grade B for HSS members, or high-strength ASTM A992 for wide flange members, unless otherwise noted.
3. All welded connections shall be welded by certified welders with a minimum experience of five (5) years following procedures in compliance with the latest edition of the American Welding Society.
4. Bolted Connections: Galvanized ASTM A307 or A325.
B. Lateral Support System: Portal/rigid frames as shown on the Drawings. Cross-bracing shall not be allowed.
C. Metal Roofing Panel System:
1. Panels shall match the roofing panels used at the mechanical building. Reference 073250 ñ Standing Seam Metal Roofing for additional information.
Packet Pg. 701 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13008-4
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
D. Trim: Factory-formed and factory-painted ridge cap, rake trim, simple eave trim, panel side trim, corner trim, flashing, wall panel closure, and other trim as necessary.
E. Gutter, Fascia and Downspouts:
1. Material: ASTM A653/A653M 26-gauge galvanized steel.
2. Gutter Fascia:
a. Prefinish.
b. Furnish hangers with factory-applied paint.
3. Preformed Corner Closures: Furnish to match configuration of gable fascia.
4. Downspouts:
a. Configuration: Nominal 4-inch corrugated rectangular box with minimum 11 square inches of cross-section area.
b. Factory finish to match wall panels.
F. Miscellaneous: Furnish fasteners, metal-backed neoprene washers, weatherstripping, sealants, flashing, trim, closures, gaskets, and other items as required for a complete installation.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fabricate to manufacturerís written standards and AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. Structure Sections: Accurate and dimensionally correct to facilitate structure erection without field alteration.
C. Welded connections shall be in accordance with AWS standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that concrete is level and true to plane and of correct dimensions to receive structure. Correct any deficiencies before anchoring structural members.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the shade structure in accordance with the Manufacturerís instructions.
B. Furnish and install all required fasteners and anchors for a complete installation.
3.3 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PAINTING
A. Immediately following erection, remove all unused material, screws, fasteners, and other debris from completed installation. Use caution in removing metal cuttings from surface of prefinished metal panels.
Packet Pg. 702 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13008-5
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
B. Replace damaged, dented, buckled, or discolored metal panels.
C. Repair damaged painted and galvanized surfaces as specified in Section 09900, PAINTING.
D. Finish Painting: As specified in Section 09900, PAINTING. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 703 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13008-
6 City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 704 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13204
FRP CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Design and fabricate helically wound fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) chemical storage tank complete with appurtenances, including overflow pipe with braces, inlet and outlet pipe connections, ladder, manway, anchorage system, and other details as shown on the attached tank data sheet and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Tanks and appurtenances shall be designed, fabricated and inspected according to the latest edition of the following standards:
1. ASME RTP-1: Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resistant Equipment
2. ASTM C581: Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service.
3. ASTM D2563: Standard Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts.
4. ASTM D2583: Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impresser.
5. ASTM D2584: Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.
6. ASTM D3299: Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks.
7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B16.5: Flange Dimensions.
B. Tank dimensions and fittings design shall be as per attached Tank Data Sheet.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tanks shall be designed, fabricated, and inspected in accordance with ASME RTP-1 specifications. Tanks do not need to be ASME RTP-1 certified.
Packet Pg. 705 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Quality Assurance Inspection:
1. An independent inspector having a minimum of ten years experience in the design and fabrication of FRP storage vessels and professionally independent of fabricator shall be provided by the fabricator.
2. Quality Assurance Inspector shall perform the following duties:
a. Observe manufacturing methods and fabrication techniques to assure compliance with specifications.
b. Inspect a minimum of three stages of the tank fabrication:
1) At completion of corrosion barrier prior to structural winding 2) After tank has been removed from mandrel prior to attachment of nozzles and other appurtenances.
3) Final inspection prior to shipment.
a) Visual inspection conforming to ASTM D2563.
b) Barcol Hardness testing conforming to ASTM D2583.
c) Acetone sensitivity test for internal bonding.
d) Ignition loss test for glass content analysis.
e) Hydrostatic Leak Test: fill tank to invert of overflow nozzle. c. Certify the results of all tests by signature.
C. Field Test:
1. Provide twenty-four (24) hour minimum hydrostatic leak test upon installation of the tank.
D. Warranty:
1. Fabricator shall warrant the tanks to the owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a minimum of two (2) years from date of delivery.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with specification Section 01330 ìSubmittal Proceduresî.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Complete drawings and details of the tank and all connections, appurtenances, and anchorage system.
Packet Pg. 706 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b. Tank dimensions including thickness of corrosion barriers and structural layers.
2. Product Data:
a. Detailed descriptive literature including tank weight, materials of construction, fabrication details, resin system description, and thickness of corrosion barriers and structural layers.
b. Confirmation from resin manufacturer that the proposed resin system is suitable for storage of the specified chemical(s) using the fabrication technique proposed. c. Complete design calculations for tank, reinforcement, and anchorage system.
Calculations shall be signed by a registered Civil or Structural Engineer licensed to practice in California.
d. Tank capacity chart indicating storage volume in gallons and height in feet. e. Fabricatorís recommended unloading, handling, and installing the tank and appurtenances, including recommended bolt torque for all bolted connections. f. Color chart showing available colors for external gel coating.
3. Quality Control Submittals:
a. A list of any and all instances where the equipment proposed deviates from these specifications.
b. Copy of the fabricatorís Quality Assurance Program.
c. Qualifications of fabricatorís Quality Assurance Supervisor. d. Qualifications of independent Quality Assurance Inspector. e. Initial Quality Assurance Inspection Report
f. Factory Testing Certification
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Tank shall not be shipped until ENGINEER has approved Factory Testing Certification and Initial Quality Assurance Inspection Report.
B. Tank and all components shall be protected from damage during shipment and handling.
Details of protection procedures shall be the full responsibility of the fabricator, with the following minimum measures taken:
1. Tank shall be supported during shipment to prevent contact with bulkhead or bed of vehicle.
a. Tank shipped horizontally shall have padded cradle supports b. Tank shipped vertically shall be placed on a skid.
Packet Pg. 707 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Prevent damage to flanged connections using wooden blinds bolted to the flange and having a diameter two (2) inches greater than the outside diameter of the flange.
3. All unflanged components shall be plugged to prevent deflection and protected by adequate exterior wrapping.
4. All components shipped shall be firmly fastened and padded to prevent shifting or flexing during transport.
5. No items shall be shipped loose inside the tank.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER:
A. Belco Manufacturing Co. Inc. / Ershigs Inc.
B. Tankinetics, Inc.
C. Xerxes Corporation
D. Or Equal
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions Table:
Tank EW12_TNK_07200
Liquid Stored Ferric Chloride
Concentration 38%
Specific Gravity 1.4
pH < 2
Operating Pressure Atmospheric
Max. Liquid Temperature 110 deg F
Min. Liquid Temperature 30 deg F
Surface Veil / Corrosion Barrier Type 2
Packet Pg. 708 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Design Loads:
1. Resistance of both wind and seismic loads shall be provided for both tank full and tank empty conditions and in accordance with Section 01610, General Product Requirements. Manufacturer shall be fully responsible for design and provision of adequate anchorage system for the service conditions.
2. Snow load: None.
3. Uniform person load of 250 lbs/sq ft on tank roof.
2.3 TANK REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Tank shall be fabricated as per ASTM D3299 Type 1, Grade 1
2. Tank shall have dome top and flat bottom
3. Desert color exterior gel coat shall be applied after all inspections of exterior laminate have been completed.
4. Tanks shall have a laminate construction comprising a structural outer layer, a set of interior corrosion barriers including an inner surface veil and an interior layer. The combined thickness of the inner surface veil and interior layer shall not be less than
0.10 inch.
5. Tanks shall have a minimum structural wall thickness of 5/16-inch, not including the thickness of the surface veil and interior layers. The filament-wound tank design stress shall be determined using an allowable strain value of 0.0010 inch per inch maximum at 70°F.
B. Tank working capacity, defined as tank outlet invert to overflow invert, shall be per tank data sheet.
C. Materials and Fabrication:
1. Resin:
a. Premium grade and chemically resistant to the chemicals listed in the Service Conditions Table as determined according to ASTM C581-03. b. One resin shall be used throughout.
Packet Pg. 709 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Ultraviolet absorbers shall be added to surface resin. d. No fillers or thixotropic agents shall be used.
e. Product:
1) Hetron 922
2) Derakane 411
3) DION 382
2. Reinforcement:
a. Surfacing Veil:
1) Surfacing veil for each service shall be resin rich, with a minimum total thickness of 20 mils
2) Nominal resin content 90%
3) Silane finish
4) Binder compatible with lay-up resin
5) Surfacing veil and corrosion barrier for each service as follows:
a) Type 1: One carbon veil followed by one Type C glass veil b) Type 2: One Type C glass veil
c) Type 3: Double Nexus Polyester veil
b. Chopped Strand Mat:
1) Chopped Strand Mat shall be constructed from 3 plys of 1.5 ounce per sq ft chopped strand E glass.
2) Minimum total thickness 130 mils.
3) Minimum resin content shall be 70% by weight.
4) Silane finish
3. Structural Layers:
a. Woven Roving for Hand Lay-Up: Alternating layers of 1.5 ounce per sq ft Type E glass and 24 ounce per yd, 4 x 5 weave woven roving with silane finish. b. Continuous Roving for Filament Winding: Type E glass with silane finish, nominal yield of 110 strand yds per pound.
4. Laminate:
a. Meet visual inspection requirements of ASTM D2563 for appearance, defects, cut edges, and construction joints.
Packet Pg. 710 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-7
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. Curing System:
a. Catalyst:
1) For Sodium Hypochlorite service, surface veil shall be cured with benzoyl peroxide-dimethyl aniline (BPO/DMA). No methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP) cobalt catalyst shall be used in the surface veil of sodium hypochlorite tanks.
2) For all other chemical service, MEKP cobalt catalyst curing system shall be used for the surface veil.
3) Structural layers may be cured with either catalyst system. b. Heated post cure shall be provided for a minimum of four (4) hours at a minimum temperature of 200 degrees F.
c. Barcol hardness shall be measured as per ASTM D2583. 1) Barcol hardness shall exceed the minimum recommendation of the resin manufacturer.
D. Nozzles:
1. All nozzles shall be gusseted with conical or plate-type gussets.
2. Finish flush with inside wall of tank.
3. Each nozzle shall have two elastomer gaskets compatible with chemical to be stored in tank.
4. Flanged nozzles shall have a minimum rating of 100 psi.
5. Flanged outer diameter and drilling shall be per ANSI 16.5.
6. The back face of the flange shall be spot-faced, flat and parallel to the flange face of sufficient diameter to accept an SAE metal washer under the bolthead or nut.
7. Nozzles shall project six (6) inches from the inner tank wall.
E. Supports: Provide FRP pipe supports for fill and vent piping.
F. Tank Anchorage System:
1. Fabricator shall be fully responsible for design and provision of adequate anchorage system for the service conditions.
2. All anchor bolts, hold-downs, nuts and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
Packet Pg. 711 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-8
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Tank Identification Plate:
1. Each tank shall be provided with a nameplate indicating the equipment number and title as shown on the tank data sheet.
2. Each tank shall be provided with the Fabricatorís standard identification plate indicating the following, at minimum:
a. Name of Fabricator
b. Date of Manufacture
c. Chemical to be stored
d. Maximum chemical concentration and temperature that may be safely stored within the tank.
H. Tank Vents:
1. Each tank shall be properly vented for a tank filling rate of 100 gallons per minute.
2. The minimum vent size shall be 3-inches.
3. The vent shall be the manufacturerís U-vent design, constructed of FRP and provided with an aluminum insect screen and stainless steel retainer clamp.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General:
1. Provide accessories where indicated on the Tank Data Sheet.
2. Uncoated or exposed carbon steel appurtenances, fasteners, or anchorage will not be accepted.
B. Lifting Lugs:
1. Provide a minimum of three (3) Type 316 stainless steel lifting lugs filament wound into the tank shell.
2. Each lug shall be capable of withstanding 2 times the empty weight of the tank.
C. Access Manway:
1. 24-inch gasketed bolted access manway shall be provided as shown on the tank data sheet.
2. Manway gaskets shall be Viton and fasteners shall be FRP or titanium.
3. Manway cover shall be FRP.
Packet Pg. 712 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-9
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Sight Gage:
1. Where indicated in the tank schedule, provide a sight gage that gives a visual indication of tank liquid level from a point 6 inches above the bottom of the tank to a point 6 inches below the junction of the side and top of the tank.
2. Gage shall be one or two-piece design and a minimum of æ-inch diameter.
3. The glass tube shall be adequately protected from breakage by use of corrosion resistant cast or heavy-duty sheet metal guards, extending the length of the gage.
4. At the connections to the tank, the gage shall be provided with shutoff valves equipped with ball checks to prevent tank leakage in case of tube breakage.
5. All wetted hardware shall be resistant to the chemical stored in the tank.
E. Level Gage Connection:
a. Provide 4-inch 150 pound ANSI type flange connection for mounting radar level indicator.
b. See Specification 13342 IC for details on the level gage.
F. Siphon Drain
1. Siphon drains shall extend to 1 inch above tank bottom.
G. Insulation
1. Insulate tank where indicated on the Tank Data Sheet.
2. Insulation shall be 2 inches of urethane foam applied at the factory.
3. The insulation shall have a minimum rating of R-12.
4. The exterior surface of the insulation shall be factory-coated with white latex mastic paint.
5. The installation of the insulation shall be coordinated with the installation of the heat tracing system, where both are required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install tank in complete conformance with Fabricatorís written instructions and Engineerís approved shop drawings
Packet Pg. 713 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-10
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Concrete tank pad shall be level and smooth to the tolerances recommended by the tank fabricator.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
A. Leakage Testing
1. Prior to installation of the piping but after placement and anchorage of the tank, conduct a leakage test on the tank.
2. Provide the ENGINEER with 3-day advance notification in writing of the schedule for the field leak tests, unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR is advised that the tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER, to be considered valid.
3. Install blind flanges on all tank nozzles.
4. Fill the tank with clean water to the working volume and record the starting level.
Allow the tank to remain filled for at least 24 hours. After 24 hours, measure the level again. If the level has changed, the tank has failed the test and must be repaired or replaced.
5. Upon completion of the leakage test, drain the water from the tank and dispose of the water as directed by the ENGINEER.
6. After draining the tank, dry out the inside of the tank prior to filling with chemical. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 714 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-11
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
TANK DATA SHEET
General
Item No. EW12_TNK_07200
Name Ferric Chloride Storage
Tank
Liquid Stored 38% Ferric Chloride
Working
Capacity
4,600 gallons
Tank Inside
Diameter
10í-0î
Design Code ASTM D1998
Materials:
Resin
Gaskets
Bolts
HDLPE
Viton
Titanium
Roof Domed
Shell Vertical Cylinder
Bottom Flat
Nozzle Schedule
MK Size/Type Service
N1 3î FLG Drain
N2 3î FLG Overflow
N3 2î BLKHD Outlet
N4 3/4" BLKHD Sight Gage
N5 3î FLG U-Vent
N6 2î BLKHD Fill
N7 4î FLG Level Element
N8 18î THRD Access Manway
Accessories
Sight Gage X N4
Level Gage
Ladder
Flush Bottom
Drain
X N1
Sump
Vortex Breaker
Inlet Baffle
Lifting Lugs X
Thief Hatch
Access Manway X N8
Down-Comer
Heat Trace
Insulate X
Handrails on
Roof
Packet Pg. 715 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13204-12
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Packet Pg. 716 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13210
BOLTED STEEL WATER STORAGE TANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Scope: Section includes design, fabrication, and installation of a bolted steel water storage tank complete with appurtenances including, but not limited to, overflow pipe, brackets for pipe supports, inlet and outlet pipe connections, ladder, manways, coatings, safety climb device, and other details as shown on the Drawings and as required within these Specifications.
A. The following Identification Number has been assigned to the tank that shall be provided under this specification section:
1. EW12_TNK_06170: Backwash Reclaim Tank
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Manufacturer's catalog data including accessories, components, exterior coating and interior coating systems.
2. Detail Fabrication Drawings showing steel tank, plan and elevation details, details of tank bottom, roof, shell plates, interior and exterior tank coating system, openings, bolted joints, connections for fittings and appurtenances.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures.
4. Statements of Qualification:
a. Tank manufacturer.
b. Tank installer.
c. Registered professional engineer.
d. Tank manufacturer's site representative.
5. Written test reports of inspections for steel plates and sheets.
6. Structural design calculations and drawings, prepared, stamped, and signed by an engineer who is registered as a Civil or Structural Engineer in the State of California.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS AND EXPERIENCE
A. Tank Manufacturer:
1. At least five tanks presently in service, of similar size and character required for this Project, and minimum of 5 years' satisfactory operation.
2. The Manufacturer shall be quality certified, having an active API-Q1 and an ISO 9001 registration.
B. Tank Installer: Certified by tank manufacturer that installer is qualified to do the Work.
Registered Professional Engineer: Licensed in the State of California.
Packet Pg. 717 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. Tank Manufacturer's Site Representative: Certified by tank manufacturer that the representative is qualified and experienced in type of Work to be performed.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect sheets from damage prior to packing for shipment.
B. Place heavy paper or plastic foam sheets between each panel to eliminate sheet-tosheet abrasion during shipment.
C. Wrap individual stacks of panels in heavy mil black plastic and steel banded to wood pallets built to the roll-radius of the tank panels. This procedure eliminates contact or movement of finished panels during shipment.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. The tank manufacturer shall warrant the tank against any defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date of shipment. In the event a defect should appear, it shall be reported in writing to the manufacturer during the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. CST Industries/Columbian TecTank.
B. Or Approved Equal.
2.2 BOLTED TANK DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Type of Liquid: Backwash Waste Water with up to 4 mg/L chlorine.
B. Specific Gravity: 1.0
C. Seismic (design shall be in accordance with the 2022 edition of the California Building Code, ASCE 7-16 and AWWA D103-19):
1. Risk Category: IV.
2. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.5.
3. Seismic Design Category: D.
4. S1=0.431g.
5. SS=1.078g.
6. SDS=0.768g.
7. SD1=0.537g.
8. Site Class=D (assumed).
D. Roof Load:
1. Roof Snow Load: 30 psf (non-reducible).
2. Roof Live Load: 20 psf.
Packet Pg. 718 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Wind Load:
1. Basic Wind Speed: 105 mph, 3-second gust, per ASCE 7-16 and AWWA D103-19.
2. Exposure Category: C.
ANCHORAGE
F. Provide anchors as required by structural seismic and wind calculations.
G. Minimum anchor bolt size shall be 3/4 inch diameter, or as shown in the Drawings.
Anchor bolts shall be ASTM F1554 Grade 36, bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanized. Bolts shall be spaced equally around the tank perimeter with a minimum total quantity of 12 anchors, or as shown in the Drawings.
H. At the top of anchor bolts, lock nuts shall be provided or the threads shall be peened to prevent loosening of the nuts. If peening is used, provide sufficient projection to allow peening of the threads.
I. All attachments and fastenings for these anchors shall be sized and designed to develop the full yield strength of the anchor bolts.
J. Anchor bolt chairs shall be designed in accordance with AISI T-192. Design of anchor embedment in concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 318-14 Chapter 17.
2.3 BOLTED TANK STRUCTURE
A. The materials, design, fabrication, and erection of the bolted steel tank shall conform to the Principles of Standard Specification 12B of the American Petroleum Institute, or to the manufacturerís specifications which are derived from engineering principles, industry experiences, and the aforementioned standards and specifications.
B. Standard shell height and diameter meeting requirements for the selected capacity and the freeboard requirements of AWWA D103-19 Section 14.4.
1. Floor Type: Flat steel bottom.
C. Roof Slope: 1:12.
D. Storage Capacity: 125,000 Gallons (Nominal)
E. Tank Outside Diameter: 29.7 ft.
F. Tank Sidewall Height: 24.2 ft.
G. Steel:
1. Hot Rolled Steel Sheets and Plates:
a. Hot Rolled Steel Sheets and Plates shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM A1011 Grade 40 with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi. b. Minimum thickness shall be 12 gauge (0.0972 in.)
2. Structural Shapes:
a. Structural shapes shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A992. b. Other grades of carbon steel that meet or exceed these standards may be utilized.
Packet Pg. 719 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
H. Bolts/Nuts/Washers:
1. Galvanized Bolts:
a. Galvanized bolts, nuts, washers used in tank joints shall be minimum ½î diameter and shall meet or exceed the requirements of API 12B or AWWA D103.
2. Encapsulated Bolts:
a. Encapsulated bolt heads shall be used for additional corrosion protection.
3. Anchor Bolts:
a. Anchor bolts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM F1554.
4. Other Bolts:
a. Other bolts shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM A307 or ASTM A325.
I. Gaskets:
1. All bolted connections shall incorporate an EPDM prefabricated gasket with a minimum width of 1-3/4î.
2. A single piece double punched gasket shall be used at vertical seams which require two vertical rows of punching.
3. Field caulking (NSF Standard 61 Approved) will be allowed when joining a discontinuous gasket section and at certain joint connections.
4. Neoprene backed steel washers shall be provided at all bolts in contact with the stored liquid.
2.4 COATING
A. All metal plates, supports, members, and miscellaneous parts, except bolts, certain accessories, and appurtenances, shall be factory coated in accordance with the provisions of these specifications.
Color: Tan.
B. Field coating, except for touch-up, will not be permitted.
C. Surface Preparation:
1. Tank parts are to be thoroughly washed (Alkaline at 130 deg F) and rinsed to remove grease, oil and foreign matter.
2. Parts are then to be immediately oven dried.
3. Parts are to be grit-blasted to SSPC-SP 10 (Near-White Blast Cleaning) to 1-2 mils profile, minimum.
4. All parts must be coated by Automated Powder Applicators on both sides within 15 minutes after blasting, and no further processing other then coating application shall be done.
D. Interior Coating:
1. Thermally cured modified epoxy powder, Trico-Bond EP by Columbian TecTank Company (includes underside of the steel floor), or equal.
2. First coat is to be a powder application of NSF 61 approved modified epoxy TricoBond EP, 5.0 mils average dry film thickness.
3. Coating system to have 5.0 mils average dry film thickness, minimum.
Packet Pg. 720 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Exterior Coating:
1. Thermally cured modified epoxy powder, Trico-Bond EP and acrylic polyurethane by Columbian TecTank Company, or equal.
2. First coat is to be a powder application of modified epoxy Trico-Bond EP, 3.0 mils average dry film thickness.
3. Second coat of acrylic polyurethane, 1.5 mil average dry film thickness.
4. Coating system to have 4.5 mils average dry film thickness, minimum.
F. Curing:
1. Baking ovens to be used after each coat
2. Initial curing shall take place after powder is applied. A combination of IR boosters and convection ovens will be used to heat parts to approximately 300 deg. F to gel the powder (partial cross-linking).
3. Final curing shall take place after top coat is applied. A combination of IR boosters and convection ovens will be used to heat parts to approximately 350 deg. F for 5-6 minutes to finish curing powder and topcoat.
G. Inspection:
1. MEK rub test to verify proper curing of coating.
2. Wet sponge test to check for holidays.
H. Preparation for Transport:
1. Material to be marked or tagged with part number for ease of field assembly.
2. Tank materials to be placed in racks or on pallets to facilitate transportation to jobsite.
3. Touch-up paint with instructions for application by erection personnel.
2.5 APPURTENANCES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the appurtenances as shown in the contract drawings and as specified below. Unless otherwise noted, standard appurtenances shall be as follows:
B. Roof Hatch:
1. The tank roof hatch shall have a curbed, upward opening 30î square.
2. The curb shall extend at least 4î above the roof surface.
3. The hatch cover shall be hinged and have provisions for locking.
4. The hatch cover lip shall extend 2î below the top of the 4î curb.
C. Inlet, Outlet and Overflow Connections:
1. Inlet, outlet, and overflow connections shall conform to the sizes and locations specified on the contract drawings.
D. Pressure Transducer Connection:
1. Provide 3î flanged fitting located 3î vertically above tank floor, and orientation as determined during shop drawing review.
2. Provide 3î blind flange, tapped for æî FNPT threads, for pressure transducer connection.
E. Vent:
1. A mushroom screened vent shall be furnished above maximum water level of sufficient size to accommodate normal inlet and outlet flow.
Packet Pg. 721 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. The overflow pipe shall not be considered to be a tank vent.
3. The vent shall be designed and constructed as to prevent the entrance of birds, animals, or insects.
4. Screen shall be stainless steel.
F. Flush Type Cleanout:
1. The cleanout shall be flush type, 24î x 46î, and located as shown on the contract drawings.
G. Outside Ladder:
1. An outside galvanized ladder with safety cage, meeting OSHA specifications, shall be furnished at the location shown on the Drawings.
H. Liquid Level Indicator (Gauge Board):
1. Stainless steel float with target board mounted on the exterior of the tank.
I. Guardrail and Toeboards:
1. When indicated on Drawings, galvanized guardrail with toeboard shall be furnished as shown on the Drawings.
2. Guardrail shall have a self-closing gate at top of ladder per OSHA requirements.
J. Pipe Support Brackets:
1. Provide structural steel pipe support brackets at min 5í-0î spacing to support piping shown on the Drawings.
K. Identification Plate:
1. Furnish nameplate listing the tank serial number, tank diameter and height, maximum design capacity, intended storage use and date of installation.
L. Cane-Fiber:
1. For tanks supported on concrete slabs, the tank bottom shall be supported on a ½- inch thick cane-fiber joint filler meeting the requirements of ASTM D1751.
M. Cathodic Protection
Provide a sacrificial anode cathodic protection system per Section 13212, Sacrificial Anode Cathodic Protection System.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Erection:
1. Field erection of factory coated bolted steel tanks shall be in strict accordance with the tank manufacturers recommendations.
2. Handle and install sheets and bolts to avoid damage to the coating system.
Particular care shall be exercised in handling and bolting of the tank plates, supports, and members to avoid abrasion or scratching of the coating.
3. If major leakage repairs are required, complete holiday testing following leak repairs.
4. Repair all damaged coating in accordance with the tank manufacturerís written instructions as reviewed and approved by the ENGINEER.
Packet Pg. 722 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. Retest coating repairs. If coating is damaged to the underlying steel surface for an area larger than 1/2 inch by 6 inches, replace the full sheet.
B. Testing:
1. Following completion of erection and cleaning of the tank, the tank shall be tested for liquid tightness by filling the tank to its overflow elevation.
2. Any leaks disclosed by this test shall be corrected by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the tank manufacturerís recommendations.
3. The OWNER will provide clean water free of charge at the time of erection completion, for hydrostatically testing the tank.
4. Filling and emptying the tank shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
3.2 MANUFACTURERíS SERVICES
A. Manufacturerís Representative: Present at site for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded:
1. 1 person-day for installation assistance.
2. 1 person-day for inspection of tank coating.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 723 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13210-
8 City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 724 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13212-1
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
SECTION 13212
SACRIFICIAL ANODE CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Design, furnish, and install sacrificial anode cathodic protection systems for water storage tank interior.
2. The cathodic protection system shall be adequate to mitigate corrosion and provide protection to the portions of the structure immersed in water for a period of 20 years.
3. Anodes shall be replaceable.
4. The tank shall be equipped with a means of monitoring the effectiveness of the cathodic protection system.
5. The cathodic protection system shall protect the tank in accordance with the latest edition of NACE Recommended Practice RP-0196.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submit test report as specified herein.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
a. Manufacturerís literature and technical data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Anodes:
1. Anodes shall be high potential magnesium conforming to ASTM B843 Grade M1C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SACRIFICIAL ANODES
A. The quantity, radius and configuration of anodes installed in each reservoir shall conform to the drawings and manufacturerís design.
B. Anodes shall be suspended or attached to the floor and shall be replaceable.
C. Anodes shall be inspected for damage to lead wires. Anodes with nicked, cut, abraded or otherwise damaged lead wires shall not be installed and shall be removed from the jobsite.
Packet Pg. 725 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13212-2
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
D. The design of the cathodic protection system shall not require penetrations of the tank shell below the water line.
3.2 TESTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct tests to demonstrate that the cathodic protection system is functional and protects the tankís interior in accordance with the latest edition of NACE RP-1069.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct tests on all insulating devices (insulating unions, flanges, etc.) to ensure that they are functional as installed.
C. Test results shall be in report form and shall be submitted to ENGINEER for acceptance.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 726 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-1
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
SECTION 13300
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS (I&C) ñ GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall procure the services of a single Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) to furnish all materials, equipment, labor and services, except for those services and materials specifically noted, required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein and in other Specification Sections listed below.
B. Items specifically excluded from the scope include the following:
1. Control panel including programmable logic controller (PLC), panel mounted operator interface terminal (OIT), network components, and uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The control panel and all internal components are part of the Filter Control System and shall be provided as part of a package with the Greensand Filtration System specified in Section 11540. Panel construction and programming and configuration of the PLC and OIT shall be provided by the Greensand Filtration System vendor. The vendor shall be responsible for startup/training activities associated with the configured portions of the PLC system. Specifications for the control system components and the control descriptions are included in this Division for reference and are related to the scope of work for the Greensand Filtration System vendor.
2. Human Machine Interface (HMI) graphics development, HMI software configuration, database development, report development, and startup/training activities associated with the configured portions of the HMI system. This work shall be provided by the Owner.
C. The work shall include furnishing, installing and testing the equipment and materials detailed in the following Sections:
Section No Title
13300 Instrumentation and Controls (I&C) ñ
General Provisions
13341 I&C - Flow Devices
13342 I&C - Level Devices
Requirements specified in this Section apply to all equipment specified in the above sections, unless otherwise specified.
Packet Pg. 727 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-2
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
D. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance, such as transducers, relays, signal amplifiers, intrinsic safety barriers, and signal isolators, to interface with existing equipment or equipment provided by others under other Sections of these specifications, shall be included whether they are shown on the Drawings or not.
E. Substitutions on functions or type of equipment specified shall not be acceptable unless specifically noted. In order to confirm compatibility between all equipment, coordinate all interface requirements with mechanical and electrical systems and furnish any signal isolation devices that might be required.
F. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed and placed in operating condition in full conformity with the project Specifications, Drawings, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
G. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, similar products (e.g., differential pressure transmitters, flowmeters) shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.
H. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State and local codes.
I. Use the equipment, instrument, and loop numbering scheme that has been developed and shown on the Drawings and specifications in the development of the submittals. Do not deviate from or modify said numbering scheme without the Engineer's approval.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Process & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&ID) are included in the Drawings.
B. Control System Architecture Block Diagram is included in the Drawings.
C. Specific control system and instrumentation materials and requirements are included in related Sections of Division 13.
D. Instrumentation and Controls conduit systems are specified in related Sections of Division
16. E. Instrumentation signal cable and alarm and status wiring are specified in related Sections of Division 16.
F. Control System network, communication, and fiber optic cabling are specified in related Sections of Division 16.
Packet Pg. 728 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-3
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General submittal requirements include:
1. Refer to Section 01300 for general submittal requirements.
2. Other Division 13 Sections may have additional submittal requirements.
3. Shop drawings shall be submitted as detailed herein. Shop drawings shall demonstrate that the equipment and services to be furnished comply with the provisions of these specifications and shall provide a complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered.
4. Submittals shall be complete; giving equipment specifications, details of connections, wiring, ranges, installation requirements, and specific dimensions. Submittals consisting of only general sales literature shall not be acceptable.
5. Submittals shall be bound in separate three-ring binders, with an index and sectional dividers, with all drawings reduced to a maximum size of 11-inch by 17-inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by 11 inch for inclusion within the binder. Maximum binder size shall be 3 inches.
6. The submittal drawings' title block shall include, as a minimum, the PCSS's registered business name and address, Owner and project name, drawing name, revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the drawing.
7. Incomplete or partial submittals not complying with the submittal arrangements outlined in this Section will be returned without review.
8. Separate submittals shall be made as follows:
a. Qualifications Submittal
b. Field Instrument Submittal
c. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Submittal
d. Final System Documentation
B. Qualifications Submittal
1. Submit, within 30 calendar days after Contract Award, detailed information on their staff and organization to show compliance with the Quality Assurance requirements of this Section. The Qualifications submittal shall be submitted and approved before any further submittals will be accepted. Failure to meet the minimum requirements shall be grounds for rejection as an acceptable PCSS. The Qualifications Submittal shall, as a minimum, contain the following:
2. Copies of ISA CCST Level 1 certificates for all field technicians or resumes demonstrating field experience.
3. Notarized statement from the firm's financial institution demonstrating ability for the firm to meet the obligations necessary for the performance of the work.
4. Project references for water or wastewater projects as defined in the Quality Assurance paragraphs.
5. Sufficient documentation to demonstrate the PCSS's capabilities to complete this project including: resumes of key staff, bonding capacities, details on engineering, design, fabrication, and field service capabilities, and location of staff responsible for responding to the site within four hours to resolve startup issues.
Packet Pg. 729 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-4
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
C. Field Instruments Submittal
1. Submit complete documentation of all field instruments using ISA-S20 data sheet formats. Submit a complete Bill of Materials (BOM) or Index that lists all instrumentation equipment ordered by the loop numbering system as shown in the Contract Documents.
2. Submit separate data sheets for each instrument including:
a. Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the drawings b. Product (item) name used herein and on the Contract Drawings c. Manufacturer's complete model number
d. Location of the device
e. Input - output characteristics
f. Range, size, and graduations in engineering units.
g. Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and mounting details in sufficient detail to determine compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
h. Materials of construction for enclosure and wetted parts. i. Instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable j. Certified calibration data for all flow metering devices. k. Two-wire or four-wire device type as applicable.
3. Submit index and data sheets in electronic format as well as hard copies on 8-1/2" x 11" formats. Electronic format shall be in Microsoft Excel or Word. Submit electronic copy on CD-ROM or DVD disk.
D. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Lists Submittal
1. This submittal shall include for each Subsystem:
a. A list of, and descriptive literature for, spares, expendables, and test equipment as specified in Division 13.
b. A list of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, and test equipment recommended by the manufacturer.
c. Unit and total costs for the additional spare items specified or recommended for each subsystem.
E. Final System Documentation
1. Submit in accordance with section 01330.
2. The Final System Documentation shall consist of operations and maintenance manuals as specified herein. The manuals shall be bound in three-ring binders, maximum size of three inches, with Drawings reduced to 11 inch by 17 inch, then folded to 8.5 inch by 11 inch for inclusion. Each section shall have a uniquely numbered tab divider, and each component within each section shall have a separate binder tab divider.
3. The operations and maintenance manuals shall, at a minimum, contain the following information:
a. Table of Contents
1) A Table of Contents shall be provided for the entire manual with the specific contents of each volume clearly listed. The complete Table of Contents shall appear in each volume.
b. Instrument and Equipment Lists
1) The following lists shall be developed in Excel and provided not only as a hardcopy in O&M but also electronically on a CD.
Packet Pg. 730 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-5
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
2) An instrument list for all devices supplied including tag number, description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, range, span, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data.
3) An equipment list for all non-instrument devices supplied listing description, specification section and paragraph number, manufacturer, model number, serial number, location, manufacturer phone number, local supplier name, local supplier phone number, completion year replacement cost, and any other pertinent data.
c. Data Sheets with Vendor Operations and Maintenance Information 1) ISA S20 data sheets shall be provided for all field instruments. 2) Cover page for each device, piece of equipment, and OEM software that lists, at a minimum, date, specification number, product name, manufacturer, model number, Location(s), and power required. Preferred format for the cover page is ISA S20, general data sheet; however, other formats will be acceptable provided they contain all required information. 3) Final vendor O&M documentation for each device, piece of equipment, or OEM software shall be either new documentation written specifically for this project, or modified standard vendor documentation. All standard vendor documentation furnished shall have all portions that apply clearly indicated with arrows or circles. All portions that do not apply shall be neatly lined out or crossed out. Groups of pages that do not apply at all to the specific model supplied shall be removed.
4) For any component requiring dip switch settings or custom software configuration, that information shall be included along with the corresponding data sheets and O&M information.
d. Original Licensed Software
1) Submit original software CD-ROMs of all software provided under this Contract. Submit original paper based and electronic documentation for all software provided. Submit license agreement information including serial numbers, license agreements, User Registration Numbers and related information. All software provided under this Contract shall be licensed to the Owner at the time of purchase. Provide media in software sleeves within O&M manual.
e. Electronic O&M Information
1) In addition to the hard copy of O&M data, provide an electronic version of all equipment manuals CDROM or DVD. Electronic documents shall be supplied in Adobe Acrobat format.
2) Provide electronic files for all custom-developed manuals. Text shall be supplied in both Microsoft Office format and Adobe Acrobat format.
Packet Pg. 731 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-6
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
3) Provide electronic files for all drawings produced. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD ".dwg" format and in Adobe Acrobat format. Drawings shall be provided using the AutoCAD eTransmit feature to bind external references, pen/line styles, and fonts into individual zip files along with the drawing file. 4) Each computer system hardware device shall be backed up onto CDROM or DVD after Substantial Completion and shall be turned over to the Owner. 5) If specified in the training section, provide digital copies of all training videos.
Videos shall be in a format that is readable by standard DVD players and by standard PC DVD drives. Format and shall be a minimum of 800 by 600 pixels and shall include sound.
4. The cover and edge of each volume shall contain the following information:
Project Name (refer to Contract Documents)
Contract Number (refer to Contract Documents)
Instrumentation and Control System
Hardware [or Applications Engineering] Operations and Maintenance Manual Specification Sections _____, _____, ______
Subcontractor Name
Date
Volume X of Y
(Where X is the volume number and Y is the number of volumes)
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. Where a date is given for reference standards, that edition shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.
B. International Society of Automation (formerly the Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society) (ISA)
1. ISA S5.2, Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations
2. ISA S5.3, Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems.
3. ISA S5.4, Instrument Loop Diagrams.
4. ISA S20, Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves.
5. ISA RP60.3, Human Engineering for Control Centers
6. ISA RP60.6, Nameplates, Labels, and Tags for Control Centers C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
Packet Pg. 732 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-7
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1. UL 508 ñ Industrial Control Equipment
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) shall be a "systems integrator" regularly engaged in the design and the installation of instrumentation systems and their associated subsystems as they are applied to the municipal water and wastewater industry. For the purposes of this Specification Section, a "systems integrator" shall be interpreted to mean an organization that complies with all of the following criteria:
1. Employs personnel on this project who have successfully completed ISA or manufacturers training courses on general process instrumentation and configuration and implementation of the specific programmable controllers, computers, and software proposed for this project. Key personnel shall hold ISA CCST Level 1 certification or have a minimum of 10 years of verifiable plant startup experience.
Key personnel shall include, as a minimum, the lead field technician.
2. Has successfully completed work of similar or greater complexity on at least three previous projects within the last five years. Successful completion shall be defined as a finished project completed on time, without any outstanding claims or litigation involving the PCSS. Potential references shall be for projects where the PCSS's contract, was of similar size to this project.
3. Has been actively engaged in the type of work specified in this Specification Section for a minimum of five years.
B. The PCSS shall maintain a permanent, fully staffed and equipped service facility within 250 miles of the project site with full time employees capable of designing, fabricating, installing, calibrating, and testing the systems specified herein. At a minimum, the PCSS shall be capable of responding to on-site problems within 12 hours of notice. Provide an on-site response within four hours of notification starting at two months before scheduled startup to two months after startup completion.
C. Actual installation of the instrumentation system need not be performed by the PCSS's employees; however, the PCSS as a minimum shall be responsible for the technical supervision of the installation by providing on site supervision to the installers of the various components.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with Section 01600.
B. Shipping Precautions
Packet Pg. 733 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-8
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval of all equipment, cabinets, panels and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty (5 mil) polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide protection from damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport.
Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering.
Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing and handling at the job site.
2. Manufacturer's special instructions for field handling, storage and installation required for protection, shall be securely attached to the packaging for each piece of equipment prior to shipment. The instructions shall be stored in resealable plastic bags or other means of protection.
3. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the owner.
1.7 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Field Instrument Tags
1. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as indicated in the Drawings, shall be provided on each piece of equipment supplied under this Section.
Equipment shall be tagged before shipping to the site.
2. Provide 1/8-in by 3/8-in, Type 316 stainless steel button head machine screws.
3. All supplied field instrument transmitters and field instrument transmitter elements shall have a stainless steel identification tag attached to each transmitter and element prior to shipment. Tag shall be attached via stainless steel chain or stainless steel wire (24 gauge min) to a non-removable part of the device. The tag size shall be a minimum of 1.5 square inches. Tag shall include the ISA alphanumeric instrument number as indicated in the P&ID, loop, and detail drawings. The alphanumeric instrument number shall be stamped into the tag and shall have a minimum of 3/16- in high alphanumeric characters.
B. Panel Nameplates
1. See Section 13330.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide equipment warranty per Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds, and as specified herein.
B. Provide software updates throughout the warranty period. Provide latest official released version for all software provided under this Contract. Owner shall have the latest software releases at the end of the warranty period.
Packet Pg. 734 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-9
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
1.9 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
A. A written proposal for a maintenance contract executed by the PCSS shall be provided to the Owner for on-site preventive maintenance services related to the Instrumentation and Control system. The cost of this maintenance contract shall not be included in the Contract Price.
B. This proposal shall be provided within 30 days after final acceptance for the purpose of entering a contract for annual maintenance subsequent to the first year of maintenance.
Standard per diem rates for providing breakdown service shall be set forth in the contract.
Such rates shall be fair and reasonable and reflect the lowest rates offered to most favored customers. The fee quoted shall be firm for a minimum of 90 days from date of issue.
C. This maintenance contract shall include all labor, parts, and emergency calls providing on-site response within 24 hours, to provide complete system maintenance for a period of one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the system for all equipment and software provided as part of the PCSS scope of work.
D. The maintenance contract shall also include a minimum of 4 preventive maintenance visits by qualified service personnel of the Supplier who is familiar with the type of equipment provided for this project. Each preventive maintenance visit shall include routine adjustment, calibration, cleaning and lubrication of system equipment and verification of correct operation.
E. Visits to the sites to correct deficiencies under warranty shall not be included in this preventive maintenance service contract.
F. Emergency maintenance procedures or plant visits may coincide with a preventive maintenance visit, however, they shall not replace the work intended to be performed during a preventive maintenance visit. The Supplier shall have full responsibility for the system hardware preventive and corrective maintenance.
G. During the one-year maintenance period, observation of maintenance operations by plant personnel and the instruction of said personnel in the details of the maintenance work being performed, shall be provided.
1.10 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS
A. Environmental Requirements. Refer to Section 16000 for specific environmental and hazardous area classifications.
B. Elevation: Equipment shall be designed to operate at the project ground elevation.
Packet Pg. 735 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-10
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
C. Temperature:
1. Outdoor areas' equipment shall operate between -30 to 50 C degrees ambient.
2. Equipment located in indoor locations shall operate between 10 to 35 C degrees ambient minimum.
3. Storage temperatures shall range from 0 to 50 C degrees ambient minimum.
4. Additional cooling or heating shall be furnished if required by the equipment as specified herein.
D. Relative Humidity. Air conditioned area equipment shall operate between 20 to 95 percent relative, non-condensing humidity. All other equipment shall operate between 0 to 100 percent relative, condensing humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL
A. All instrumentation and electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, utilizing printed circuitry and epoxy or equal coating to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid and slightly corrosive service conditions.
B. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks unless otherwise noted. Fasteners for securing control panels and enclosures to walls and floors shall be either hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication or stainless steel. Provide stainless steel fasteners only in corrosive areas rated NEMA 4X on the Drawings or as defined under Section 16000. Provide and size anchors in accordance with Division 1 and 5 as required per the seismic calculations. Provide minimum size anchor of 3/8-inch.
C. All indicators shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted. All transmitters shall be provided with indicators in process units, accurate to two percent or better.
D. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished shall be heavy-duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain similar products of a single manufacturer, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently in production.
All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion.
E. All electronic/digital equipment shall be provided with radio frequency interference protection.
Packet Pg. 736 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-11
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
F. Electrical
1. Equipment shall operate on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source at a nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. Regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied.
2. With the exception for field device network connected devices, all electronic instrumentation shall utilize linear transmission signals of isolated 4 to 20 mA DC capable of driving a load up to 750 ohms, unless specified otherwise. However, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1-5 VDC.
3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, shall have the output immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. No zero based signals will be allowed.
4. All switches shall have double-pole double-throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 VA, unless noted otherwise.
5. Switches and/or signals indicating an alarm, failure or upset condition shall be wired fail-safe to the SCADA system. A fail-safe condition is an open circuit when in an alarm state.
6. Materials and equipment shall be UL approved. Where components are not available with UL approval, integrate the device with ground fault protective devices, isolation transformers, fuses, or other protective equipment necessary to achieve compliance with UL 508 requirements.
7. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of power interruption, the systems specified herein shall go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of memory, and shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored, unless otherwise noted.
8. All transmitter output signals shall include signal and power source isolation.
2.2 LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION
A. General - Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system from induced surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines from lightning, utility, or the internal plant electrical distribution system. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level. Protection shall be maintenance free and self-restoring. Ground wires for all instrumentation device surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground in accordance with Section 16060.
B. Field Instrumentation Protection - Provide individual device protection for the 4-20 mA signal and, if 4 wire field instrument, the power supply of each field instrument mounted outside of the building or facility housing the control panel. Instruments mounted within the structure as the associated control panel shall not require surge protection.
Instruments shall be housed in a
Packet Pg. 737 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-12
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
grounded metallic case. Device surge protectors shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate junction box coupled to the enclosure. Provide gas tube or metal oxide varisters (MOVs) surge protection devices as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, EDCO, Emerson Network Power Control Concepts, or equal.
C. Control Panel Power Feed ñ Provide protection of all 120 VAC power feeds into the control panels. Source voltage to cabinets/panels regardless of location (indoor or outdoor), shall be protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Provide gas tube surge suppressors or metal oxide varisters (MOVs) located at the point where the 120V source supply enters the enclosure. Install the surge device to in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendation for maximum allowable circuit length between protective device and incoming circuit. Provide signal surge suppression devices as manufactured by Phoenix Contact, EDCO, Emerson Network Power Control Concepts, or equal.
D. 4-20 mA Signal Lines and Non-Fiber Based Data Highway Circuits ñ Provide protection on all signal and data highway circuits that leave a building or are routed external to a building. Provide gas tube surge arrestors, and Zener diode protectors. Circuit protection shall be provided at both ends of the signal or data highway lines within the control panel at one end and as close to the instruments or termination device as possible. Provide signal surge suppression devices as manufactured by Phoenix Contact EDCO, Emerson Network Power Control Concepts, or equal.
E. Inductive Loads ñ At a minimum, provide coil surge suppression devices, such as varistors, or interposing relays on all process controller outputs or switches rated 120 VA or less that drive solenoid, coil, or motor loads.
F. Telephone Circuits - At a minimum, provide Telephone Company approved line protection units for all telephone lines used for telemetry or SCADA system use under this Contract.
2.3 TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. All instrument air header takeoffs and branch connections less than 2-in shall be 316 stainless steel.
B. All instrument shut-off valves and associated fittings shall be supplied in accordance with the piping specifications and all instrument installation details. The materials for fittings and valves shall be compatible with process fluids. Where metallic fittings and valves are compatible, wetted materials shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
Packet Pg. 738 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-13
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
C. The materials for instrument tubing shall be compatible with process fluids. Where metallic tubing is compatible, tubing shall be fully annealed ASTM A269 Seamless 316 grade free of OD scratches having the following dimensional characteristics as required to fit the specific installation:
1. 1/4-in to 1/2-in O.D. by 0.035 wall thickness.
2. 5/8-in to 1-in O.D. by 0.049 wall thickness.
3. 1-in O.D. by 0.065 wall thickness.
4. 1-1/4-in O.D. by 0.065 wall thickness.
5. 1-1/2-in O.D. by 0.083 wall thickness.
6. 2-in O.D. by 0.095 wall thickness.
D. All process connections to instruments shall be annealed 1/2-inches O.D. stainless steel tubing, Type 316.
E. All tube track shall be supported by stainless steel and installed as per manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts of the type and quantity as recommended by the manufacturer shall be furnished for all devices furnished under these sections.
B. All spare parts shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag complete with dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible markings. Complete ordering information including manufacturer's part number, part ordering information including manufacturer, part number, part name, and equipment name and number(s) for which the part is to be used shall be supplied with the required spare parts. The spare parts shall be delivered and stored in a location directed by the Engineer.
C. The following field Instrument related Spare Parts shall be furnished:
1. One flow indicating transmitter for each type of flow element provided.
2. One level indicating transmitter for each type of level element provided.
3. One temperature transmitter for each type provided.
4. One pressure transmitter for each type provided.
5. One spare ultrasonic level switch for each type provided.
6. One spare float type level switch for each type provided.
7. One spare gas detection system sample pump module for each type provided.
8. Miscellaneous: One year supply of items recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment including all reagents, pH probes, batteries, chart paper, calibration standards as needed to operate and maintain the furnished equipment.
Packet Pg. 739 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-14
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
2.5 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all test equipment, instruction manuals, carrying/storage cases, unit battery charger, special tools, calibration fixtures, cord extenders, patch cords, test leads, and miscellaneous items for checking field operation of all supplied equipment.
B. All test equipment shall be wrapped in bubble wrap, sealed in a polyethylene bag with a dehumidifier, then packed in cartons and labeled with indelible markings. Complete ordering information including manufacturer's part number, and equipment name shall be supplied. The test equipment shall be delivered and stored in a location directed by the Engineer.
C. As a minimum, furnish the following test equipment:
1. One complete electronic process calibrator sets with rechargeable batteries, cases, spare fuses, test leads, and PC based software. Provide model 830 as manufactured by Altek, or equal.
2. One calibration pump, Model A-396A as manufactured by Dwyer Instruments, Inc., or equal.
3. One hand-held HART communicator, with case and all necessary accessories, Model 375 by Rosemount, or equal.
4. One (1) portable digital multi-meter (DMM) with rechargeable battery and test leads, and carrying-case, Fluke 189 Series Digital Multimeter, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The locations of equipment, transmitters, alarms and similar devices indicated are approximate only. Exact locations of all devices shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field, all information relevant to the placing of process control equipment and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Contractor and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The P&IDs and Drawings indicate the intent and not the precise nature of the interconnection between the individual instruments. Where indicated on the P&IDs or Drawings as not requiring installation, provide the instruments suitably packaged for storage.
C. All equipment used in areas designated as hazardous shall be designed for the Class, Group and Division as required for the locations as shown on the Drawings and specified in Division 16. All work shall be in strict accordance with codes and local rulings.
Packet Pg. 740 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-15
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
D. Unless specifically indicated, direct reading or electrical transmitting instrumentation shall not be mounted on process piping. Instrumentation shall be mounted on instrument racks or stands. All instrumentation connections shall be provided with shutoff and drain valves.
For differential pressure transmitters, 5-valve manifolds for calibration, testing and blow down service shall also be provided. For chemical or corrosive fluids, diaphragm seals with flushing connections shall be provided.
E. All piping and tubing to and from field instrumentation shall be provided with necessary unions, calibrations and test tees, couplings, adaptors, and shut-off valves. Process tubing shall be installed to slope from the instrument toward process for gas measurement service and from the process toward the instrument for liquid measurement service.
Provide drain/vent valves or fittings at any process tubing points where the required slopes cannot be maintained.
F. Brackets and hangers required for mounting of equipment shall be provided. They shall be installed as shown and not interfere with any other equipment.
G. The shield on each process instrumentation cable shall be continuous from source to destination and be grounded at only one ground point for each shield.
H. Investigate each space in the building through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, ship material in sections sized to permit passing through restricted areas in the building. Provide on-site service to oversee the installation, the placing and location of system components, their connections to the process equipment panels, cabinets and devices, subject to the Engineer's approval. Certify that field wiring associated with his/her equipment is installed in accordance with best industry practice.
Schedule and coordinate work under this section with that of the electrical work specified under applicable Sections of Division 16.
I. Installation of fiber optic cable within control panel and console assemblies. Refer to cable manufacturer's specifications for bend radius. Use cable breakout assembly as recommended by the cable manufacturer. Provide wire basket, strain relief as required to meet manufacturer's strain requirements.
J. Provide local electrical shutoffs and disconnects for all 4-wire field instruments requiring 120 VAC power. Electrical disconnects shall be suitably rated disconnect switches or manual motor starters as specified under Division 16.
K. Provide sunshades for equipment mounted outdoors in direct sunlight. Sunshades shall include standoffs to allow air circulation around the cabinet. Orient equipment outdoors to face to the North or as required to minimize the impact of glare on LED, LCD, or other digital readouts.
Packet Pg. 741 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-16
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
L. Loop Tuning - All electronic control stations incorporating PID controllers shall be tuned following device installation but prior to commencement of the field tests.
1. Optimal loop tuning shall be achieved either by auto-tuning software or manually by trial and error, Ziegler-Nichols step-response method, or other documented process tuning method. Assigning common PID factors for identical loops following field tuning of a single typical loop is acceptable. However, tuning documentation shall be submitted for each loop individually as specified in Part 1 of these Specifications.
2. Determine and configure optimal tuning parameters to assure stable, steady state operation of final control elements running under the control of field mounted, dedicated PID controllers or software based PID controllers residing as part of the programmable logic controller system. Each control loop that includes anti-reset windup features shall be adjusted to provide optimum response following startup from an integral action saturation condition.
3. Tune all PID control loops to eliminate excessive oscillating final control elements.
Loop parameters shall be adjusted to achieve 1/4 amplitude damping or better. In addition, loop steady state shall be achieved at least as fast as the loop response time associated with critical damping.
4. Loop performance and stability shall be verified in the field following tuning by step changes to setpoint. Submit loop tuning methodology and verification as part of the final system documentation as specified in Part 1.
5. For cascade loops, tune both sets of controllers so that the cascade loop achieves the loop tuning characteristics specified herein.
3.2 TESTING ñ GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The PCSS shall coordinate all required testing with the Contractor, all affected Subcontractors, the Engineer, and the Owner.
B. The PCSS shall provide assistance to the Greensand Filtration System vendor for testing of field instruments that shall be monitored by the Filter Control System. All field instruments shall be installed, tested and calibrated prior to the start of field testing of the control system.
C. The PCSS shall furnish the services of field service technicians, all special calibration and test equipment, and labor to perform the field tests.
D. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions, whether or not explicitly stated on the Test Procedures, as required to determine compliance with the functional requirements of the overall system. Such testing required to determine compliance with the specified requirements shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing.
Packet Pg. 742 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-17
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
E. Correction of Deficiencies
1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Upon successful completion of the 30-day operation test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete and the warranty period shall commence.
G. Certification of Installation: Following successful completion of the 30-day test, the PCSS shall issue a Certification of Installation. Certification shall be on PCSS corporate letterhead and signed by an officer of the firm. Certification shall state that the process control system has been completed in conformance with plans and specifications.
Certification shall be submitted to the Engineer as specified herein.
3.3 TRAINING
A. The cost of training programs to be conducted with plant personnel shall be included in the Contract price. The training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied. The PCSS is responsible for training associated with the primary sensors/transducers and field instruments.
1. The Contractor shall retain the services of the system supplier to provide operation and maintenance training for all plant monitoring and control system equipment as specified herein.
2. For equipment items not manufactured by the system supplier, the Contractor shall provide for on-site training by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer as part of his services. The representative shall be fully knowledgeable in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.
B. On-site Training: On-site (field) training shall be conducted at the plant site and shall provide detailed hands-on instruction to plant personnel covering system debugging, troubleshooting, maintenance procedures, calibration procedures, and system operation.
The training shall run at times chosen by the Owner.
C. Additional Training: After completion of all training specified above, the Contractor shall provide additional training on subjects selected by the Owner. This training shall be conducted by the individual most familiar with the configuration of this project.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 743 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13300-18
City of Redding July 2022
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Draft Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 744 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13305
I&C - CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section is provided to clarify the control strategies to be used to program the system.
B. All SCADA PLC controller programming and Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) graphics and programming shall be provided by the Filter Control System supplier as specified in Section 11540, Greensand Filtration System.
C. The PLC and OIT program shall comply with the City of Redding programming standards. The Filter Control System supplier shall obtain programming standards from the Owner prior to start of program configuration. The control system shall conform to the Ownerís requirements including, those listed in Section 13306, Paragraph 3.1.B.
D. Application programming and configuration of Existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system located at the City of Redding Foothill WTP shall be performed by Owner. Contractor and Filter Control System supplier shall assist the Owner Representative Programmer to test SCADA system with PLC. Filter Control System supplier shall force PLC statuses and setpoints in order for the SCADA programmer to test his application.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The control descriptions are broken into a hierarchical layer concept. There may be one layer or multiple layers per loop, depending upon that loop. An example of multiple layered loop is as follows. The lowest layer of control, local control, is at that piece of equipment or that piece of equipmentís panel or drive. The second layer of control is at an intermediate control panel between the equipment and the PLC I/O or vendorís I/O. The highest layer of control is by the PLC System and the SCADA system. The PLC control system includes its associated operator interface terminal (OIT) mounted locally on the PLC cabinet. The SCADA system consists of the existing operator workstations and servers for the City of Redding system. The PLC does the actual monitoring and control logic for the process equipment associated with Packet Pg. 745 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
the Well 12 water treatment system. The OIT serves as a local graphical user interface with software that will interface with the PLC logic for monitoring and implementing all operator-required tasks to control the process equipment.
B. The PLC system shall be provided with an Ethernet interface to communicate to the plant SCADA system. The SCADA system will receive data from the PLC to monitor and control the Well 12 water treatment system process equipment and instrumentation at the SCADA operator workstations.
C. The PLC system described in this section is is the new PLC to be provided for the Well 12 water treatment system and shall be provided by the Filter Control System supplier. Unless otherwise noted, control descriptions apply to the logic program to be provided for the new PLC and its associated OIT.
Packaged equipment systems may be provided with their own PLCs that will be programmed and configured by the equipment manufacturer. Interface requirements to packaged system PLCs are described in applicable individual loop descriptions. PLC brand and model, type and program must meet OWNERís standards as described in Specification Section 13311 IC.
3.2 CONTROL FUNCTION DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL CRITERIA
The hardware and/or software functions noted by this paragraph reference are to be implemented by the PLC control system specified herein.
A. The following list of ISA abbreviations is typical of those utilized. The description, following the abbreviation, summarize the basic function to be implemented in the PLC software. Not all abbreviations are used for this project.
1. HS: Represent selector switches or pushbuttons, which shall be implemented by keyboard entry. Function shall be similar to their hardware counterparts. Examples are as follows:
a. HSD- Hand Switch Auto
b. HSR- Hand Switch Reset
c. HSB- Stop Command
2. QI: Represents equipment status (i.e., availability, running, in remote, etc.) implemented by a change of color on the operator interface symbol for this equipment. For motor driven equipment such as pumps, blowers, compressors, etc., availability contact represents remote operation and no alarm conditions. Examples are as follows:
a. QI-Motor running status
b. QA- Motor failure or overload status
3. PAL, AAH, UA, etc.: Represent high or low alarms implemented on the OWS.
4. FIC, PIC, AIC, etc.: Represent PID process controllers implemented in a computer logic algorithm incorporating proportional, integral, and/or derivative modes. Local/remote and manual/auto capabilities shall be provided.
5. FIK, PIK, AIK, etc.: Represent control stations implemented in logic (via keyboard entry and CRT display) to allow downloading of a set point to a FIC, PIC, AIC, etc., and display of the process variable or controller output.
Packet Pg. 746 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
6. FI, PI, AI, etc.: Represent digital output display on the operator interface of a process variable in engineering units and/or a dynamic representation of the variable by symbol or graphical means.
7. FIR, PIR, AIR, Represent values stored on the hard disk to provide the data for historical trend graphics of process variables against time (or other selected variables).
8. ZSH, ZSL, ZSO, ZSC etc.: Represent high or low, open or close limit positions implemented on the operator interface
B. The hardware and/or software functions noted by this paragraph reference are to be implemented by the PLC control system specified herein. These are general function descriptions and not all functions may be used on this project.
C. Any interlocks that are represented, before the local operational descriptions, or are stated as hardwired interlocks, shall interlock all the controls locally and at the local control panel. All hardwired interlocks shall be wired to the PLC.
D. Any interlocks that are represented in a particular layer of the operational descriptions, shall interlock all the controls in that layer and the layer after it.
However, the interlock shall not interlock the commands in the layer before it.
E. The PLC system shall stop a motor or drive in its program if it does not receive the auto or remote status or one of its software interlocks trip. If the drive or motor is in hand or remote it will continue to run but the PLC start/stop output will be open.
F. Any motor that is requested to start by an operator or an automatic program shall alarm if the run confirm status for that motor does not activate. The initial programming time delay shall be within five seconds of the request and modified as needed during testing. If a motor stops by an interlock or stops without any operator or PLC intervention then that motor shall go into alarm.
Any motors that are stopped by a program or the operator shall not go into an alarm.
G. Any valve that is requested to open by an operator or an automatic program shall alarm if the open feedback status for that valve does not activate. The initial programming time delay shall be within ten seconds of the request and modified as needed during testing. Any valve that is requested to close by an operator or an automatic program shall alarm if the close feedback status for that valve does not activate within ten seconds.
H. Motors that have an H/O/R shall indicate to the operator that the pump is being run in the "Hand" position. A motor is being run in "Hand" when the "Remoteî position is not true and the run confirm status is true. If not in "Remote" the PLC shall open up its output contact to stop (shutdown) the pump from the PLC.
I. If a motor stops and the H/O/R switch is not in Remote, the motor shall not be restarted automatically by the PLC system without operator or PLC logic intervention. Thus, the only way that motor when placed back in auto can be started by the PLC system is if the operator reinitiates the start command for that motor on the operator interface or when that motor control at the Packet Pg. 747 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
operator interface is placed in complete automatic mode and the PLC logic requests the motor to run.
J. The run status confirmation of all motors shall seal in the control output to the motor once the start command is initiated. The run status confirmation shall be on a five second timer delay in that if the run confirm is not present after five seconds, the contact output to the motor from the PLC shall drop out.
Thus, the only way a motor can be restarted after five seconds by the PLC system is if the operator reinitiates the start command for that motor on the operator interface or when that motor control at the operator is placed in complete automatic mode and the PLC logic requests the motor to run.
K. Terminology associated with interlocks is as follows:
1. When a contact or status is true, the PLC will receive power to its input channel. The PLC registers this as a binary bit of one.
2. When a contact or status is false, the PLC will receive no power (open circuit) to its input channel. The PLC registers this as a binary bit of zero.
L. When an analog signal goes outside the 4-20 mA range due to a failure at the instrument or PLC card, the following PLC programming shall take place:
1. If the analog signal is associated with a control loop or ratio control loop that loop shall go into manual.
2. If the analog signal is used in a calculation, that calculation shall use the last good analog signal. The logic shall place the control loop in manual if using the calculation.
M. All high analog alarms shall be initially programmed to trip at 90 % of the calibrated range. All low analog alarms shall be initially programmed to trip at 10 % of the calibrated range. Reference equipment specifications for ranges.
N. All interlocks that shutdown (Stop a piece of equipment and prevent it from being restarted or moved) shall be shown on the faceplate pop-up graphic for that piece of equipment.
O. All alarm interlocks shall be wired failsafe to the discrete input cards and thus shall be programmed as fail-safe. A fail-safe alarm is input that opens when it is in alarm.
P. The run confirmation or ON status of all motors and lamps shall be accumulated to get a run time status of the equipment on the operator interface screen. Each run time accumulation shall come with a reset button on the operator interface screen.
Packet Pg. 748 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.3 INDIVIDUAL CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND CONTROL SEQUENCES Greensand Filter
P&ID Sheet: N-1
General: This control description describes automatic operation of the Greensand Filter and its associated equipment including motorized valves and instrumentation. Control sequences for backwash initiation, backwash/surface wash operation and rinse to waste are described herein. Descriptions for chemical systems, backwash recycle and the waste stream are included in subsequent control descriptions.
Well Pump: The existing well pump is currently monitored and controlled by the existing Well Control Panel. The Filter Control Panel shall send signals to and receive signals from the Well Control Panel via Ethernet. The Filter Control Panel will control the well pump and chemical feed systems as well as the filtration system. The existing Well Control Panel will be used as a sub-PLC to the new Filter Control Panel. The Well Control Panel will serve to collect and distribute field I/O to the field devices it currently controls and relay that I/O to the Well Control Panel. Well Pump Control logic will be provided by the OWNER to include in the
programming of the Filter Control Panel.
Greensand
Filtration
Treatment: Local: All automated valves are manually operated at the OIT.
Remote: When the well pump is running and not failed, the filter influent and effluent valves shall open. The filter valves shall close when the system is off.
Chemical Feed Systems: Sodium hypochlorite and ferric
chloride dosing shall be as described in the control description ìChemical Systems.î
Backwash
Service: Backwash Description: Backwash initiation, backwash and surface wash operation, and rinse to waste shall be as
described in Section 11540. Setpoints that are adjustable by the Operation shall be available on the OIT.
Surface Wash Booster Pump:
a. Local: Switch in Local mode at pump motor starter. Pump starts when manually started at the pump motor starter. b. Remote: Switch in Remote mode at the pump motor
starter. Pump is automatically controlled by the Filter Control Panel PLC. The pump starts when called to start by the PLC for backwash/surface wash operation. The pump
Packet Pg. 749 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
shall operate on a timer and will stop when the surface wash timer has timed out to indicate the end of the surface wash cycle.
Recycle Stream
And Solids
Disposal: Backwash waste water will be stored in the Backwash Reclaim Tank. Operation of the recycle stream and solids disposal is described in the control description ìBackwash Waste Recycle and Solids Disposalî.
Setpoints: Setpoints such as differential pressure and timers for backwash, surface wash and rinse to waste, shall be made available for Operator input on the OIT as recommended by the Greensand Filtration System supplier.
Monitoring and
Alarms: PLC I/O and Program Logic:
a. Analog Inputs:
1. Differential pressure
2. Backwash wastewater flow
3. Chlorine level
4. Turbidity
5. pH
6. Temperature
b. Discrete Inputs (surface wash booster pump):
1. Pump running
2. Pump in remote
3. Pump fault
c. Calculated:
1. Surface wash booster pump run hours.
2. Finished water flow: Calculated as the raw water flow rate minus the recycle water flow rate. Raw water flow
is measured by an existing flowmeter at the well pump
and monitored by the Well Control Panel. The Filter
Control Panel receives the raw water flow signal via
Ethernet. Recycle water flow rate is measured at the
discharged of the Backwash Reclaim Pump.
d. Monitoring and alarms as described in Section 11540.
OIT display:
a. Differential pressure
b. Recycle water flow
c. Chlorine level
d. Turbidity
e. pH
f. Temperature
g. Finished water flow
h. Surface wash booster pump Indications and Alarms:
Typical for three pumps.
Packet Pg. 750 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. Pump running
2. Pump in remote
3. Pump fault
4. Pump run hours
i. Displays as described in Section 11540 and as
recommended by the Greensand Filtration System supplier.
Packet Pg. 751 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Backwash Waste Recycle and Solids Disposal
P&ID Sheet: N-2
General: Backwash waste water is stored in the Backwash Reclaim Tank.
The solids in the waste water will be allowed to settle and the supernatant water will be collected and recycled back to the filtration system by the backwash reclaim pump. Settled solids will be drained to filter roll off containers or by gravity to sewer.
Backwash
Reclaim Pump: Local: Pump is manually started at the OIT. Pump speed is manually adjusted at the OIT.
Remote: Switch in Remote mode at the pump VFD. Pump is
automatically controlled by the Filter Control Panel PLC. The pump starts when called to start by the PLC after settling timer has timed out. Pump speed shall be adjusted to operate at a user defined flowrate. The pump shall stop when a low level setpoint is reached in the Backwash Reclaim Tank.
Solids Disposal: Filter Roll Off Containers: Settled solids will be manually drained to the filter roll off containers. There will be no automatic operation by the PLC.
Sewer Disposal: Manual valves will be located at the bottom of the tank for solids disposal to sewer or to the filter roll-off containers. There will be no automatic operation by the PLC.
Overall flow to sewer will be measured using a Parshall Flume and level indicating transmitter.
Setpoints: Backwash recycle:
a. Backwash reclaim pump flowrate
b. Backwash tank high level alarm
c. Backwash tank low level pump stop
d. Backwash tank low level alarm
Setpoints such as timers shall be made available for Operator input on the OIT as recommended by the Greensand Filtration System supplier.
Monitoring and
Alarms: PLC I/O and program logic:
a. Analog Inputs:
1. Backwash reclaim tank level
2. Backwash tank drain valve position (% open)
3. Recycle water flow
4. Wastewater flow to sanitary sewer
5. Backwash reclaim pump speed
b. Backwash Reclaim Pump Discrete Inputs:
1. Pump running
Packet Pg. 752 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Pump in remote
3. Pump fault
c. Calculated:
1. Backwash reclaim pump run hours.
2. Recycle water total flow
3. Wastewater total flow to sanitary sewer
OIT display:
a. Backwash reclaim tank level and alarms
b. Recycle water flow and total flow
c. Wastewater flow and total flow to sanitary sewer
d. Backwash Reclaim Pump:
1. Speed
2. Pump running
3. Pump in remote
4. Pump fault
5. Pump run hours
Packet Pg. 753 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Chemical Systems
P&ID Sheet: N-4
General: Chlorine solution (CS), made from chlorine gas, and ferric chloride (FeCl) will be added to the influent line to the filter.
Chemical dosing is based on the raw water and recycled water flow rates. The chlorine system (existing) consists of 150-lb cylinders on scales, a gas chlorinator and an injector and a chlorine booster pump. The Ferric Chloride chemical system will consist of a skid with two metering pumps and a control panel.
The Filter Control Panel will monitor status and alarms for the chlorine gas system, but that system is otherwise operated manually/locally. The Filter Control Panel shall send signals to and receive signals from the Ferric Chloride pump skid control panel for monitoring and control of chemical feed.
Chlorine
Feed: Local: Chlorinator set point is set locally at the chlorinator.
Chlorine Booster Pump is started locally.
Remote: Switch in Remote mode at the Chlorine Booster Pump control panel in MCC-12. Chlorine Booster Pump start controlled by PLC and interlocked with Well Pump start with OWNER
provided well pump control logic.
Ferric Chloride
Feed: Local: Pump is manually started at the Local Control Panel.
Pump speed is manually adjusted at the Local Control Panel.
Remote: Switch in Remote mode at the pump control panel.
Chemical feed initiated by the PLC when the filtration system is in operation. Chemical dose is flow paced based raw water flow + recycle water flow. Flow setpoint is adjustable at the Local Control Panel.
Rapid Mixer: Local: Mixer is manually started at the local hand switch.
Remote: Switch in Remote mode at the mixer motor starter.
Rapid mixer is initiated by the PLC when the filtration system is in operation. Rapid mixer stops when called to stop by the PLC.
Rapid mixer can also be started and stopped from the OIT.
Setpoints: Ferric Chloride:
a. Flow rate: 8-10 mg/L (adjustable)
b. Tank high level alarm
c. Tank low level alarm
Monitoring and
Alarms: PLC I/O and Program Logic:
a. Analog Inputs:
1. Chlorine Cylinder No. 1 Weight
2. Chlorine Cylinder No. 2 Weight
Packet Pg. 754 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. FeCl Tank Level
4. FeCl Pump speed (typical of 2)
b. Chlorine Discrete Inputs:
1. Chlorine Booster Pump running
2. Chlorine Booster Pump in remote
3. Chlorine gas alarm
4. Chlorinator Vacuum Low alarm
c. FeCl Discrete Inputs: (pump status typical of 2 pumps)
1. Pump running
2. Pump in remote
3. Pump fault
4. Leak alarm
d. Eyewash/Safety shower flow switch alarm
OIT display:
a. Chlorine Cylinder Weight (typical of 2)
b. Chlorine Pump Status;
1. Pump run
2. Pump in remote
c. FeCl Tank Level and alarms
d. FeCl Leak alarm
e. FeCl Pumps (typical of 2);
1. Pump run
2. Pump in remote
3. Pump fault
4. Pump speed
f. Eyewash/Safety shower flow switch alarm
Packet Pg. 755 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.4 ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS
A. Process controller address assignments shall be as designated by the Owner.
Confirm address and memory range assignments with the Owner prior to developing programming logic. Program structure will utilize symbolic addressing and user defined data types according to Owner standards.
B. IP Addresses
1. PLC: 10.4.78.3
2. OIT: 10.4.78.4
3.5 PROCESS CONTROLLER INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) SCHEDULE
A. Process controller I/O schedule itemizes the process controller Local and Remote I/O associated with the hardware provided under this contract.
Provide additional I/O signals and hardware as required to furnish a complete and functional system. Process controller I/O schedule is included at the end of this Section.
B. If assigned in this I/O list, do not modify the PLC I/O addresses without approval by the Engineer.
C. This I/O List is included for reference only. The determination of the exact number and type of I/O points shall be the responsibility of the PCSS based on the Drawings, the Specifications, Process Control Loop Descriptions, auxiliary device requirements, and spare requirements.
D. Each column of the process controller I/O schedule is defined as follows:
1. TAG NUMBER(S): The identifier assigned to a device that performs a function in the control system.
2. DESCRIPTION: A description of the function of the device and/or loop.
3. I/O TYPE:
a. DO ñ Discrete Output
b. DI ñ Discrete Input
c. AO ñ Analog Output
d. AI ñ Analog Input
4. P&ID ñ the P&ID or drawing where the I/O point appears on.
Packet Pg. 756 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-13
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
I/O List Well 12 PLC
EQUIPMENT TAG# P&ID DESCRIPTION I/O
TYPE
EW_12_MXR_2130 N-2 Rapid Mixer Running DI
EW_12_MXR_2130 N-2 Rapid Mixer Fault DI
EW_12_MXR_2130 N-2 Rapid Mixer In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MXR_2130 N-2 Rapid Mixer Start Command DO
EW_12_MXR_2130 N-2 Rapid Mixer Reset DO
DPIT 04110 N-2 Filter Differential Pressure AI
EW_12_MOV_04120 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Recycle Water
Valve In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MOV_04120 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Recycle Water
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_04120 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Recycle Water
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_04120 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Recycle Water
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04120 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Recycle Water
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_06100 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Backwash Waste
Valve In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MOV_06100 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Backwash Waste
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_06100 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Backwash Waste
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_06100 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Backwash Waste
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_06100 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Backwash Waste
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04170 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Surface Wash
Valve In Auto Local; DI
EW_12_MOV_04170 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Surface Wash
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_04170 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Surface Wash
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_04170 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Surface Wash
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04170 N-2 Filter Cell 1 Surface Wash
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04130 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Recycle Water
Valve In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MOV_04130 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Recycle Water
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_04130 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Recycle Water
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_04130 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Recycle Water
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04130 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Recycle Water
Valve Closed Command DO
Packet Pg. 757 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-14
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
EQUIPMENT TAG# P&ID DESCRIPTION I/O
TYPE
EW_12_MOV_6110 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Backwash Waste
Valve In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MOV_6110 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Backwash Waste
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_6110 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Backwash Waste
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_6110 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Backwash Waste
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_6110 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Backwash Waste
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04180 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Surface Wash
Valve In Auto DI
EW_12_MOV_04180 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Surface Wash
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_04180 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Surface Wash
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_04180 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Surface Wash
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04180 N-2 Filter Cell 2 Surface Wash
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04140 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Recycle Water
Valve In Auto DI
EW_12_MOV_04140 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Recycle Water
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_04140 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Recycle Water
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_04140 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Recycle Water
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04140 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Recycle Water
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_06120 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Backwash Waste
Valve In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MOV_06120 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Backwash Waste
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_06120 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Backwash Waste
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_06120 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Backwash Waste
Valve Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_06120 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Backwash Waste
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_04190 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Surface Wash
Valve In Auto Local DI
EW_12_MOV_04190 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Surface Wash
Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_04190 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Surface Wash
Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_04190 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Surface Wash
Valve Open Command DO
Packet Pg. 758 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-15
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
EQUIPMENT TAG# P&ID DESCRIPTION I/O
TYPE
EW_12_MOV_04190 N-2 Filter Cell 3 Surface Wash
Valve Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_06130 N-2 Finished Water Recycle Valve
In Auto DI
EW_12_MOV_06130 N-2 Finished Water Recycle Valve
Open DI
EW_12_MOV_06130 N-2 Finished Water Recycle Valve
Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_06130 N-2 Finished Water Recycle Valve
Open Command DO
EW_12_MOV_06130 N-2 Finished Water Recycle Valve
Closed Command DO
EW_12_MOV_05110 N-2 Finished Water Valve In Auto DI
EW_12_MOV_05110 N-2 Finished Water Valve Open DI
EW_12_MOV_05110 N-2 Finished Water Valve Closed DI
EW_12_MOV_05110 N-2 Finished Water Valve Open
Command DO
EW_12_MOV_05110 N-2 Finished Water Valve Closed
Command DO
EW_12_FIT_06150 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Water Flow AI
EW12-PMP-04160 N-2 Surface Wash Booster Pump
Running DI
EW12-PMP-04160 N-2 Surface Wash Booster Pump
Fault DI
EW12-PMP-04160 N-2 Surface Wash Booster Pump In
Auto Local DI
EW12-PMP-04160 N-2 Surface Wash Booster Pump
Start Command DO
EW12-PMP-04160 N-2 Surface Wash Booster Pump
Reset DO
AIT 15120 N-2 Finished Water Chlorine AI
AIT 15120 N-2 Finished Water pH AI
AIT 15130 N-2 Finished Water Turbidity AI
TIT 15110 N-2 Finished Water Temperature AI
LIT 06230 N-3 Wastewater Flow to Sanitary
Sewer AI
LIT 07200 N-4 Ferric Chloride Tank Level AI
LSH 07300 N-4 Ferric Chloride Leak Alarm DI
EW12_PMP_07210 N-4 FECL Pump No. 1 Running DI
EW12_PMP_07210 N-4 FECL Pump No. 1 Fault DI
EW12_PMP_07210 N-4 FECL Pump No. 1 In Auto Local DI
EW12_PMP_07210 N-4 FECL Pump No. 1 Start
Command DO
EW12_PMP_07210 N-4 FECL Pump No. 1 Speed AI
EW12_PMP_07210 N-4 FECL Pump No. 1 Speed
Command AO
EW12_PMP_07220 N-4 FECL Pump No. 2 Running DI
Packet Pg. 759 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13305-16
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
EQUIPMENT TAG# P&ID DESCRIPTION I/O
TYPE
EW12_PMP_07220 N-4 FECL Pump No. 2 Fault DI
EW12_PMP_07220 N-4 FECL Pump No. 2 In Auto Local DI
EW12_PMP_07220 N-4 FECL Pump No. 2 Start
Command DO
EW12_PMP_07220 N-4 FECL Pump No. 2 Speed AI
EW12_PMP_07220 N-4 FECL Pump No. 2 Speed
Command AO
FSH 07310 N-4 Eyewash/Safety Shower Flow
Alarm DI
LIT 02160 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Tank Level AI
EW12_FIT_02170 N-3 Recycle Water Flow AI
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump
Running DI
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump Fault DI
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump In
Auto Local DI
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump Start
Command DO
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump Reset DO
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump Speed AI
EW12_PMP_02170 N-3 Backwash Reclaim Pump Speed
Command AO
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 760 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13306
I&C ñ APPLICATIONS ENGINEERING SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification describes applications engineering requirements for the control system to be supplied as part of a package with the Greensand Filtration System specified in Section 11540. The control system will be provided by the Greensand Filtration System supplier. The control system supplier shall perform work as described in this section and applicable portions of Section 11540.
B. If referred to anywhere else in the project manual, Application Engineering (AE) or Applications Engineering System Supplier (AESS) services are those services specified in this section.
C. Provide all programming, configuration, and related services required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein. All equipment shall be controlled in full conformity with the contract drawings, process control descriptions, specifications, engineering data, Owners standards, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Coordinate the control system for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other Sections of these specifications and with related existing equipment.
1. Provide configuration of the PLC and Operator Interface Terminal provided for all equipment shown on the drawings, except for controls equipment shown being provided as part of a vendor package system.
2. Provide for and test communications and functionality between all connected devices (such as PLCs) and the HMI software packages, including devices supplied by others, as depicted on the system architecture drawings in order to provide a comprehensive working system of data collection, storage and reporting.
3. Application programming and configuration of the existing Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system and the existing PLC at Well 12 shall be performed by Owner.
D. All work shall be coordinated with plant operating personnel to minimize impacts on daily operation. Delays caused for any reason shall be noted and formally submitted to the Engineer and the Owner in the form of a letter.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System.
Packet Pg. 761 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide all required submittals in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. The submittals listed below shall be provided as a minimum.
1. System Standards and Conventions
2. Operator Interface
3. Controller Program
4. Software Maintenance documentation
5. Operations and Maintenance Manuals
B. System Standards and Conventions Submittal
1. Submit the standards and conventions that will be used on this project. Coordinate with the Owner to ensure compliance with City of Redding Standards. The submittal shall define, at a minimum:
a. Graphic display standards, including color conventions, equipment symbols, display format, equipment control pop-up displays, trend displays, and display navigation. Include samples of each proposed type of graphic display (i.e. overview, detail, diagnostic, tabular, etc.)
b. System naming conventions, such as graphic displays naming, database naming, tag names, and computer naming.
c. System configuration, including network addressing and PLC addressing d. Alarm configuration standards, including priorities and logging e. Security configuration standards, including user groups and privileges f. PLC standard programming modules, including analog input scaling, flow totalization, equipment runtime, motor start/stop, valve open/close, and any other standard logic planned to be used.
2. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, the submitted standards and conventions shall be used as the basis for programming and configuration of the system. System programming and configuration shall not begin prior to the System Standards and Conventions Submittal.
C. Operator Interface
1. Following the approval of the standards and conventions submittal, submit a draft of all proposed graphic displays, examples of each type of pop-up (faceplate) displays, and examples of trends. For those graphics which will be duplicated more than once for similar type of equipment, submit the graphics for the first equipment only.
2. Following the draft graphics review meeting and prior to the factory test, submit a ready-for testing version of all graphic displays. These graphics should be completely finished other than the incorporation of comments and changes resulting from testing.
3. Submitted graphic displays and trends shall be no less than 8.5 inches by 11 inches and in full color.
D. Controller Program Submittal
1. For each controller, submit the following using the controller manufacturer's built in printing functions. Electronic submission of Adobe Portable Document Format ("pdf") files in lieu of paper submittals is acceptable. Review will be for general program organization, level of
Packet Pg. 762 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
documentation, and overall programming standards (basic pump and valve control, for example). The review will not attempt to confirm the logic works correctly for every loop.
a. PLC programs showing ladder logic, function block, high level language or other controller language used. Include individual rung, network, and/or command descriptions with abundant comments to clearly identify function and intent of each code segment. Each logic segment shall be clearly presented, the function of each timer described, the purpose of each subroutine call labeled and defined, etc. Program documentation shall be sufficiently clear to allow determination of compliance with the process control requirements included in the control descriptions and with the Drawings. The submittal shall demonstrate that all logic provided under this project follows the same structure and format and reflects a common programming approach.
b. Submit a memory usage report for the controller. This report shall indicate total memory capacity and unused memory capacity.
c. Submit cross reference index of I/O allocation and controller memory address.
Every physical I/O point as well calculated or virtual I/O required for the implementation of the process scheme shall be included.
2. Submit details of control system communication. Submit a "memory map" or other means showing which signals are exchanged between PLCs. Also submit a HMI tag database showing all signals exchanged between the PLCs and HMI. Any specific communication block memory addresses shall be defined.
E. O&M Manuals - Software Maintenance Manuals
1. Software Listings and Databases- Submit hard copies of the same information required in the "Controller Program Submittal" except include files updated to reflect the as built system. Include PDF versions of these files in the CD specified below.
2. Machine Readable Documentation - Provide two sets of as built software documentation on CD-ROMs in original electronic format for all PLC and Operator Interface Terminal and any other programs developed under this Contract. Any changes made during or after testing, start-up, and commissioning shall be incorporated.
F. O&M Manuals - Operator Manuals
1. Provide Operator's Manuals prior to final acceptance of the system.
2. These manuals shall be separately bound and shall contain all information necessary for the operator to monitor and control the plant from the control system. The manuals shall be written in non-technical terms and shall be organized for quick access to each detailed description of the operator's procedure. Manuals shall contain, but not be limited to, the following information:
a. A comprehensive table of contents of the manual.
b. A simple overview of the entire system indicating the function and purpose of each piece of equipment.
Packet Pg. 763 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. A detailed description of the operation of the OIT including all appropriate displays. Including a screenshot of each OIT display screen and annotating each function in text is an acceptable format for presenting this information. d. Step-by-step procedures for starting up or shutting down an individual component of the control system and also of the entire system. e. Login / logout procedures.
f. Complete, step-by-step procedures for entering manual data. g. Complete, step-by-step procedures for performing system or selected file backup and restoration.
h. A complete glossary of terms and definition of acronyms. i. List of personnel to be contacted for warranty and emergency services, including name, address, telephone number, pager or cell phone number, fax number, and email address
1.4 WARRANTY:
A. All application work shall be warranted in accordance with Section 01740 B. Provide telephone technical support within 4 hours of warranty claim. If failure cannot be resolved by telephone, provide onsite technical support within 24 hours of warranty claim.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The system specified herein shall perform the generalized functions listed below.
Database, reporting, data archiving and HMI functions are part of the SCADA system and will be provided by the Owner.
1. The system shall allow the operator to control equipment such as pumps and valves as shown on the Drawings and as defined in Section 13305 control descriptions.
2. Perform real-time process control, including proportional integral derivative control action, sequencing, process calculations, etc.
3. Collect, calculate, and store accurate, reliable operating information for present and future uses.
4. Assist remote site operating personnel by noting and communicating off normal operating conditions and equipment failures.
5. Accumulate and store equipment running times for use in preventative maintenance.
6. Provide color graphic displays and reports for use by the system operating and supervisory personnel.
Packet Pg. 764 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
7. Provide trending for all analog values.
8. Provide control system diagnostics.
9. All process control functions including PID, calculations, sequencing, timing, etc., shall be done in the process controller. The HMI software shall perform the realtime database, report generation, graphic screens, program development, set point modification, data archiving, etc.
10. The system shall allow the operator to manually control (by keyboard entry and mouse type pointing device) the status of pumps, valves, etc. (i.e., on off, open close, setpoint value, etc.) when viewing the appropriate graphic screen on the OIT and the HMI.
B. The PLC and graphical display programs shall comply with the City of Redding programming standards. The AESS shall obtain programming standards from the Owner prior to start of program configuration. The control system shall conform to the Ownerís requirements for configuration and programming, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. PLC system configuration
2. Program language, scaling and organization
3. Program block architecture
4. Address ranges
5. ProfiNet interface configuration
6. Network confirguration
7. IP address assignments
8. Operator interface terminal graphical design
3.2 CONTROLLER PROGRAMS
A. All applications programs shall be developed in a structured manner and shall follow an intuitive arrangement so that an instrumentation technician with basic programming knowledge will be able to understand. Programs shall utilize standard program templates or subroutines for repetitive logic such as equipment control, flow total calculations, equipment runtime calculations. Password protected or proprietary programs or blocks are not allowed.
B. Make changes to the application programs and software configuration, based on comments during the submittals, the factory tests, the field tests, and during the commissioning process to meet the design intent, at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.3 GRAPHIC DISPLAYS - GENERAL
A. All displays shall contain and continuously update the displayed process variables, date and time of day. All process values shall be displayed in engineering units. All displays shall incorporate references to instrumentation tag numbers/plant equipment numbers.
All process variables shall be displayed on their associated display(s) with correct engineering units. Process variables shall display their associated data quality flags.
Packet Pg. 765 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. All operator commands related to controlling field devices or system attributes shall require multiple keystrokes or mouse actions to protect against inadvertent operations.
The operator shall receive confirmation of the selected point to be controlled, at which time a cancellation of the control can be affected.
C. Process graphic displays, shall be based on the P&IDís, site plan drawings, mechanical drawings and electrical drawings included in these Contract Documents. The graphic displays shall depict process flow streams, process structures, and all major items of process equipment and control devices in a schematic format.
D. All main graphical screens shall include a title bar, main graphic area, navigational buttons, and alarm summary bar. Title bar shall be displayed on the top of each screen and include display name, description and time/date. The main graphical area shall contain primary screen data in graphical format. Navigational buttons shall include a minimum of main menu, trends, main alarm summary, and security log in. The alarm summary bar shall display the last three valid alarms on the bottom of each screen.
E. Animation shall be provided to mimic level changes in tanks or vessels, and to mimic rotation of rotating equipment when running. Valve colors shall change when opened and closed.
F. Unless specifically noted, all timers, setpoints, alarm actuation levels, etc., shall be adjustable from the operator interface.
G. The system shall show field conditions with text that can alternate (i.e. OPEN/CLOSE, START/STOP, HIGH/LOW) and change color correspondingly. Field devices that are tri state must be represented in three conditions.
H. Conditions in the field designated as alarm conditions shall report to the operator workstation, actuate an audible alarm, and provide a visual blinking image on the associated graphic page. All alarms and events should be displayed on the screen and archived.
I. All interlocks that affect equipment operation shall be identified both by alarm and by OIT and HMI indication.
J. All analog inputs shall be checked for out of range (via high and low limit checks) and alarmed.
K. All process flow streams shall be labeled and color coded using the project color schedule in Division 9. All structures and equipment shall be identified by name and appropriate equipment and loop tags.
Packet Pg. 766 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
L. Color coding for equipment status and alarms shall be as follows:
1. Green for on or open.
2. Red for off or closed.
3. Active, unacknowledged alarms are indicated by flashing amber.
4. Active, acknowledged alarms are indicated solid amber.
M. Automatically record all alarm and events should any of the following sequences or events occur:
1. Date/Time entry
2. Limit changes
3. Any commanded or uncommanded change of any point
4. Alarm conditions
5. PLC activation or deactivation
6. Operator login or logout activity
N. There may be additional general programming requirements listed in PART 1 of the Section 13305 control descriptions section that impact the OIT and HMI configuration.
3.4 SPECIFIC GRAPHIC SCREENS
A. At a minimum, provide the following types of graphic screen indicated below.
1. Plant Overview screen shall include a site plan representation, indicating the geographic location of each process, and each building.
2. Main menu screen shall be developed to link to all screens and process areas. The screen shall be a complete and logical listing of the names and number of all screens
3. Overall plant process block flow diagram screen shall show all major processes in block form with flow arrows. Each block shall include a text description of key individual treatment processes. Navigational buttons to the individual treatment processes shall be performed by pressing on the text description.
4. Individual treatment process screens shall graphically screen key process variables and equipment. No operator entries shall be done from these screens. Individual process flow screens for each process shall include all process components, including tanks, pumps, blowers, mixers, drives, flow meters, valves, mechanical devices, as well as manual shutoff and isolation valves. These diagrams shall be generally depicted from the P&IDís and there shall be at least 1 screen per P&ID on average.
5. Individual unit process screens depicted from the P&IDís are used for control and screen of each major item of process equipment, process variables, and control devices, including pumps, blowers, valves, gates, mixers, drives etc. Navigational buttons shall consist of the P&IDís flow arrows to other individual unit processes.
The unit process screens shall provide the ability for the operator to go to individual equipment popup screens. These diagrams shall be generally depicted from the P&IDís and there shall be at least 2 screens per P&ID on average.
Packet Pg. 767 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
6. Popup screens shall be provided for each piece of equipment to start/stop equipment, open / close valves, implement automatic control, adjust set points, establish and adjust tuning parameters, set alarm limits and initiate a sequence.
7. PLC system diagnostic screens, showing the operational status, and fault conditions of all PLC components, including processors, I/O modules, OITís, power supplies and UPS units.
8. Communications diagnostic screens, showing the details of network status, communications status of all major components including Operator Work Stations, peripheral devices and network components.
9. Maintenance screens shall screen the raw value for each analog and digital I/O point in the system. They shall also allow the operators/maintenance personnel to enter an override value for an analog point that is then used by the system instead of the value read from the input card / communications link.
10. Trend screens with the capability to screen up to eight, operator assigned, analog and/or digital process variables. Each analog value will be shown on a trend screen.
11. Main alarm summary screen shall screen the following information on each alarm:
Time, tag name, description, alarm type, current value and status. An acknowledge alarm button shall acknowledge all new unacknowledged alarms. The acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms shall be different colors. Acknowledged alarms shall clear automatically after the condition is corrected. All alarms shall have the ability to be disabled and shall include a ëdisabledí status.
12. Analog variable screens showing a tabular summary of all plant process variables, in operator assigned groupings.
3.5 SECURITY
A. The system shall be configured and implemented with security to prevent unauthorized access. The system shall allow authorized changes to system operation through defined user accounts and password verification.
B. Coordinate with Owner user account information, including login name and password for each account.
C. Security levels of "display only", "operator mode", "supervisor mode", and "engineer mode" shall be available through assignable passwords. On system startup, the "display only" security level shall automatically be entered. In the "display only" mode, information is available to be displayed on the screen but no changes may be made. In the "operator mode", changes may be made to process set points, times, etc.; however, the overall control concepts may not be modified. In the "supervisor mode", all operator functions can be modified and any special reports or critical process set points (data can be modified; however, the overall control concepts may not be modified). In the "engineer mode" level, all user modifiable parameters of the system shall be available for modification.
Packet Pg. 768 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.6 ALARM/EQUIPMENT STATUS REPORTING
A. The alarm log shall display all alarms as they occur. The alarm message shall include the time of occurrence, tag name, tag number, and whether it is a low, high, or failure alarm. When the point in alarm returns to normal, the time, point identification number, and return to normal shall be displayed. All reports shall include the plant equipment number of the associated device.
B. The equipment status shall be logged whenever a change in status occurs (i.e., start, stop). The equipment status log shall include the time, equipment name, tag number, and the particular change in status.
3.7 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT)
A. Prior to shipment of the equipment, the entire system, except primary elements, final control elements, and field-mounted transmitters, shall be interconnected and tested to ensure the system will operate as specified. All analog and discrete input/output points not interconnected at this time shall be simulated to ensure proper operation of all alarms, monitoring devices/functions, and control devices/functions.
B. The FAT shall be conducted a minimum of three weeks before the Functional Demonstration Test. The test may be subject to witnessing by the Owner or the Ownerís representative.
C. All panels, consoles, and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify their conformance with related submittals, Specifications, and Drawings.
D. Tests to be performed shall include, but not be limited to, the following. Each of these tests shall be specifically addressed in the Test Procedure submittal.
1. All panels and enclosures being provided shall undergo a thorough inspection to verify the integrity of the cabinet enclosures, frame structures, paint work and finish, etc.
2. Digital input signals shall be jumpered within the termination connections of the PLC panels and verification of proper alarming, statuses, etc., shall be performed utilizing the tools available in the PLC programming software.
3. Analog input signals shall be connected to a signal generator at the termination connections and signals shall be verified at zero percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of full scale. The appropriate scaled value shall be verified utilizing the tools available in the PLC programming software.
4. Digital output signals shall be initiated by the user by writing to the signals utilizing the PLC programming software. Verification shall occur in the PLC panel by connecting a digital multimeter to measure the continuity at the terminations, thus verifying the command from the PLC has properly executed the contact closure.
Packet Pg. 769 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. Analog output signals shall be initiated by the user by writing to the signals utilizing the PLC programming software. Verification shall occur in the PLC panel by utilizing a digital multimeter to measure the current/voltage generated at the termination points.
6. 100 percent wiring and database address verification of panel components and process controller I/O as applicable.
7. Demonstrate functionality of the process controls in conformance with the process control loop descriptions. Simulate operating conditions to verify the performance of the monitoring and control functions.
8. Demonstrate graphical user interfaces (hardware and software) for process controllers and local operator panels.
9. Demonstrate all system software functions specified, including clock synchronization.
10. Test system recovery from failure scenarios including cold boot, warm boot, communication loss, power failure, process failure, etc.
E. Minimum testing to be performed during the system integration test shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Verification of proper scanning, communication, and complete data acquisition of the entire system.
2. Verification of all redundant functionality of components.
3. Verification of proper power failure recovery.
4. Verification of proper indication for communication error issues.
5. A complete I/O point checkout shall be performed to verify proper operation of each input/output point. The I/O checkout shall consist of four steps. a. Digital input signals shall be jumpered within the termination connections of the PLC panels and verification of proper alarming, statuses, etc., shall be performed at the OIT.
b. Analog input signals shall be connected to a signal generator at the termination connections and signals shall be verified at zero percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of full scale. The appropriate scaled value shall be verified at the OIT. Simultaneously, verification of alarming shall occur.
The alarming verification shall, at a minimum, include HiHi, Hi, Lo, LoLo, Rate of Change, and Alarm Deadband.
c. Digital output signals shall be initiated by the user from the OIT. Verification shall occur within the PLC panel by connecting a digital multimeter to measure the continuity at the terminations, thus verifying the command from the PLC has properly executed the contact closure.
d. Analog output signals shall be initiated by the user from the OIT. Verification shall occur in the PLC panel by utilizing a digital multimeter to measure the current/voltage generated at the termination points.
F. Upon successful completion of the FAT, the control system supplier shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and coordinate the scheduling of Functional Demonstration Test.
Packet Pg. 770 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.8 FIELD TESTING - OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST
A. Following installation of the process control system components and prior to startup and the Functional Demonstration Test, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, wired, calibrated, tested, etc., and documented) that it is installed and ready for the ORT as defined below.
B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these Specifications.
C. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using Engineer-approved forms and checklists. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check-off items with spaces for sign-off by the system supplier:
1. Project Name, Test Date, Control System Supplier Name, and Lead Technician Name.
2. Loop Number.
3. Tag Number for each component.
4. Check-offs/sign-offs for each component: Tag/identification; installation; termination (wiring and tubing); scale, range, and setpoint as applicable; and calibration/adjustment (four-point for analog, set point for switches) rising and falling.
5. Check-offs/sign-offs for the loop: Panel interface terminations; I/O interface terminations; I/O signal operation; inputs/outputs operational (received/sent, processed, adjusted); total loop operation; process controller scaling and adjustment; and space for comments.
6. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign-off by the control system supplier. a. Project Name.
b. Loop Number.
c. Component Tag Number of I/O Module Number.
d. Component Code Number Analog System.
e. Manufacturer (for Analog system element).
f. Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system).
g. Summary of functional requirements shall include, but not be limited to, scale and chart ranges of indicators, recorders, and transmitters/converters; functions of computing elements; and parameters of controllers (i.e., proportional, integral, derivative, reverse/forward acting, etc.).
h. Calibrations shall include testing of analog input and output signals at zero, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span. Where appropriate, discrete input signals shall include details regarding actual trip points and reset points.
Packet Pg. 771 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Prior to checkout of the I/O to the HMI, the control system supplier shall thoroughly test all I/O from the field device to the PLC terminals, and verify the PLC is powered up and the PLC is communicating. After the control system supplier has successfully tested all I/O from the field devices to the PLC terminals, the control system supplier and the Ownerís programmer shall jointly test all I/O from the HMI to the field device.
E. Computer-Manual (i.e., Auto-Manual) start/stop, open/close commands of all devices controlled by the SCADA system shall be verified jointly by the control system supplier and the Ownerís programmer during the ORT.
F. Upon successful completion of the ORT, the control system supplier shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer.
3.9 FIELD TESTING ñ FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT) A. Prior to startup and the 30-day Site Acceptance Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the ORT. The FDT will be a joint test by the control system supplier and the Ownerís programmer.
B. Once a process area has been started up and is operating, a witnessed FDT shall be performed on that system to demonstrate that it is operating and is in compliance with these Specifications. A witnessed FDT shall be performed on each process area. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis.
C. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under the FAT, except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functions demonstrated using live field-based data to the greatest extent possible.
D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the factory tests shall be made available to the Engineer at the job site both before and during the tests. In addition, one copy of all O & M Manuals shall be available for reference at the job site, both before and during testing.
E. During the FDT, a demonstration of communication failure and recovery shall be accomplished. This test shall be scheduled and coordinated with Ownerís personnel to minimize the impact on plant operations.
F. Following initial startup, the entire process control system shall operate for a continuous 100 hours without failure before this test will be started.
G. Punchlist items and resolutions noted during the test shall be documented on the Punchlist/Resolution form. In the event of rejection of any part or function test procedure, the control system supplier shall perform repairs, replacement, and/or retest within 10 days.
Packet Pg. 772 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-13
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
H. Upon successful completion of the FDT, the control system supplier shall submit a record copy of the test results to the Owner and Engineer and request the scheduling of the SAT as noted in the following section.
3.10 FIELD TESTING ñ 30-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)
A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the system shall undergo a 30-day Site Acceptance Test (SAT), under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non-field-repairable malfunction.
B. During this test, plant operations and control system supplier shall be present as required to address any potential issues that would impact the overall system operation.
The control system supplier is expected to provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system. When personnel are not on-site, the control system supplier shall provide cell phone/pager numbers that Owner personnel can use to ensure that support staff are available by phone and/or onsite within four hours of a request by operations staff.
C. While this test is proceeding, the Ownerís representative shall have full use of the system. Only plant operating personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes. Plant operations shall remain the responsibility of Owner and the decision of plant operators regarding plant operations shall be final.
D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrections made by the control system supplier. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test.
E. Any malfunction during this 30 consecutive day test period which cannot be corrected by the control system supplier within 24 hours of occurrence, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered as a non-field-repairable malfunction. Upon completion of repairs, the SAT will be re-started from the date which the control system supplier successfully corrected the malfunction(s) and the Owner and Engineer have accepted and signed off on the repairs.
F. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the control system supplier shall perform repairs or replacement within 10 days.
G. All data base, process controller logic, and graphical interface system errors must be functioning as required per the specifications prior to the start of each test period. The 30-day test will not be considered successful until all data base points and logic functions are tested and verified to be correct.
H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent during this test period. Availability shall be defined as:
Packet Pg. 773 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13306-14
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Availability in percent = 100 * (Total Testing Time ñ Down Time) / Total Testing Time I. Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or backup power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above.
J. Throughout the duration of the 30-day SAT, no software or hardware modifications shall be made to the system without prior approval from the Owner and Engineer.
3.11 TRAINING
A. Software Maintenance
1. Provide training of how to back-up PLCs, OITs, and any other software in this system.
2. Provide training on all aspects covered in the O&M Software Maintenance Manuals.
3. Provide training on PLC program structure, OIT configuration structure, tips in how to edit programming code, and other items which will supplement the maintenance staff's ability to edit and maintain the programs.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 774 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13311
PLC HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes Programmable logic controllers for control of process equipment, process oriented machinery, and process systems. The PLC specified in this Section shall be provided by the Greensand Filtration System supplier. The Greensand Filtration System is specified in Section 11540.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System
C. Section 13330 Control Panels and Panel Equipment
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 11540.
B. Product Data: For each type of PLC include dimensions, mounting arrangements, and weights. Also, include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and terminal connections.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide literature detailing routine maintenance requirements (if any) for each PLC component including:
1. System specifications
2. Electrical power requirements
3. Application considerations
4. Assembly and installation procedures
5. Power-up procedures
6. Programming procedures
7. Explanation of internal fault diagnostics
8. Shut down procedures
9. Recommended spare parts list
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D999-91: Vibration
Packet Pg. 775 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. (CFR) Title 47, Part 18 (European EN 55011 (formerly CISPR 11)) C. CSA Certification Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Hazardous or non-hazardous locations
D. IEC 60068-2.1 Environmental testing ñ Part 2-1: Tests - Test A: Cold, 2.2 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests. Tests B: Dry heat , 2.3, 2.6 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal) and 2.27 Environmental testing. Part 2: Tests. Test Ea and guidance: Shock
E. IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Testing and measurement techniques
1. Part 4-2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test
2. Part 4-3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test
3. Part 4-4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
4. Part 4-5: Surge immunity test
5. Part 4-6: Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields F. IEC 61131-3: Programmable controllers - Part 3: Programming languages G. IEC 801-3: RFI Immunity
H. IEC 801-5: Ground Continuity
I. IEC 801-2: Electrostatic Discharge
J. IEEE 472-1974/ANSI C37.90/90A-1974 (Surge Withstand) IEEE Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus K. MIL STD 461B CS02: RFI/EMI Susceptibility
L. NEMA Pub No ICS2-230.42: Showering Arc Test
M. NSTA Project 1A
N. UL 508 and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 142 (Isolation Voltages)
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer shall be capable of providing training, parts, and coordination of emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. There must be at least 3 firms located within 250 miles of the project site that have local staff actively installing, programming, supporting, and maintaining the submitted PLC for the PLC to be considered as an "or equal" to the listed manufacturers.
Packet Pg. 776 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
C. The programmable controller and all of the corresponding components within the family of controller products shall be manufactured by a company who regularly manufactures and services this type of equipment.
D. The manufacturer shall comply with ISO9001 standards for "Quality Systems- Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing".
E. The manufacturer shall provide complete technical support for all of the products. This shall include factory or on-site training, regional application centers, local or factory technical assistance, and a 24/7/365 technical support phone service.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver PLC components in packaging designed to prevent damage from static electricity and physical damage.
B. Store PLC equipment according to manufacturer requirements. At a minimum, store indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.
Protect PLCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Also, protect the PLC from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage.
1.7 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION DEFINITIONS
A. AI: Analog Input
B. AO: Analog Output
C. Fixed I/O: A PLC style consisting of a fixed number of I/O, a processor, and a power supply all in one enclosure. Some fixed PLCs have limited expansion ability.
D. CPU: Central Processing Unit
E. DI: Discrete Input
F. Distributed I/O: Hardware specially designed to function as Remote I/O.
G. DO: Discrete Output
H. HMI: Human-Machine Interface
I. I/O Input and/or Output
J. Modular: A PLC style consisting of cards that are assembled to comprise a complete unit. All I/O, CPU, and Power Supply are dedicated cards. Typically, these cards are inserted into a chassis.
Packet Pg. 777 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
K. Master/Slave: Communication between devices in which one device, the master, controls all communications. The other devices, the slaves, respond only when queried by the master. Typically used in a Remote I/O application.
L. Peer to Peer: Communication between two or more devices, typically PLCís, in which each device can control the communication exchange.
M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
N. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
O. Remote I/O: I/O that is located remotely from the processor. Remote I/O can communicate over a variety of communication protocols and can use standard rack based I/O, or special Remote I/O hardware referred to as Distributed I/O.
P. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
1.8 SPARE PARTS
A. Supply spare parts equal to the greater of 25 percent or one field-replaceable system components unless noted otherwise.
B. At a minimum, provide the following:
1. Processors: Provide spare processor unit(s) for each unique processor installed.
2. Memory Cards: Provide spares for each type of card installed.
3. I/O Cards: Provide spares for each unique I/O module type installed. Provide two or 25 percent of installed quantity, whichever is greater.
4. Network interface and communication modules: Provide spare communication modules for each unique communication module installed.
5. PLC Power supplies: Provide spare power supplies for each unique power supply installed.
6. Chassis: Provide spare chassis for each unique chassis installed.
7. Miscellaneous components (including cables): Provide spares for each unique component installed.
8. Manufacturer recommended spares: Supply spare parts equal to at least one set.
C. All spare parts shall be packaged to prevent damage during long-term storage.
Identified all packages with indelible markings on the exterior describing contents.
D. Provided complete ordering information including manufacturer, part number, part name, hardware and software revision levels, and equipment for which the part is to be used.
Packet Pg. 778 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.9 SPARE I/O
A. Each I/O drop and I/O location shall include at least 20 percent (minimum of four) points of each type (AI, AO, DI, and DO) for future use, regardless of whether any of those point types are used in that drop or location or not. The spares shall be the same type of I/O modules supplied.
B. Spare output points that require the use of an external relay shall be supplied with the external relay.
C. Regardless of the spare requirement, all installed unused points on all I/O modules shall be wired to terminal blocks in the order that they occur on the I/O modules.
Unwired spares shall not be acceptable.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide an extended warranty for manufacturer support of PLC hardware and software problems for a minimum of 12 months starting at substantial completion of the project and include software upgrades to the owner at no additional cost.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide Programmable Logic Controller equipment with the required memory and functional capacity to perform the specified sequence of operation with the scheduled input and output points.
B. Processor Systems shall include processor, power supply, input/output modules, communication modules, redundancy modules, and remote interface modules as required to meet system requirements.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), CSA, or FM approval as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
D. All equipment and devices furnished hereunder shall be designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models that are currently in production.
E. All equipment furnished shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of power interruption the systems shall go through an orderly shutdown with no loss of memory, and resume normal operation without manually resetting when power is restored.
F. The PLCs shall communicate between the operator workstation and field-mounted transducers, switches, controllers, and process actuators.
Packet Pg. 779 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Communications protocol shall be completely transparent to process operators at the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
G. The PLC shall be capable of stand-alone operation in the event of failure of the communication link to the HMI subsystem.
H. Agency and environmental specifications:
1. Electrical supply voltage to the PLC shall be 24VDC, plus or minus 15 percent, 48-63Hz. PLC system power supplies shall be fused for overload protection.
2. Vibration: 3.5 mm Peak-to-Peak, 5-9 Hz: 1.0G, 9-150\Hz. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68-2-6 and JIS C 0911 standards for vibration. The system is to be operational during and after testing. Vibration Rating of 2.0G maximum peak acceleration for 10 to 500Hz. in accordance with at least one of the following:
a. Installed rating: DIN rail mounted PLC: 10-57 Hz, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration 25-100 Hz, and
b. Panel or plate mounted PLC: 2-25 Hz, amplitude 1.6mm, acceleration 25-200 Hz.
c. In compliance with IEC 60068 and IEC 61131.
3. Shock: 15G, 11 msec. The method of testing is to be based upon IEC 68-2-27 and JIS C 0912 standards for shock. The system is to be operational during and after testing.
4. Temperature: All PLC hardware shall operate at an ambient temperature of 0 to +55 degrees C (+32 to +140 degrees F), with an storage ambient temperature rating of -25 to +70 degrees C (-40 to +185 degrees F).
5. Relative Humidity: The Programmable Controller hardware shall function continuously in the relative humidity range of 30 percent to 95 percent noncondensing.
6. Noise Immunity: The Programmable Controller system shall be designed and tested to operate in the high electrical noise environment of an industrial plant as governed by the following regulations: IEEE 472, IEC 801, MILSTD 461B, IEC 255- 4, NEMA ICS 2-230.40, and ANSI/IEEE C-37.90A-1978.
7. Altitude:
a. Operation: 0-6,500 feet
b. Storage: 0-9,800 feet
8. Degree of protection: NEMA 1 (IP20)
9. All products shall have corrosion protection.
I. All major assemblies and sub-assemblies, circuit boards, and devices shall be identified using permanent labels or markings indicating:
a. Modules product type such as analog or digital
b. Modules catalog number
c. Modules major revision number
d. Modules minor revision number
e. Module manufacturer vendor
f. Module serial number
Packet Pg. 780 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
J. All necessary cables shall be included. All cables and connectors shall be as specified by the manufacturer. Cables shall be assembled and installed per the manufacturer recommendations.
K. Manufacturer:
1. Provide all PLCs from a single manufacturer. If the PLC manufacturer has authorized third party vendors to provide modules that are compatible with their platforms, then products manufactured by these authorized third party vendors will be acceptable.
2. Provide the PLC system by one of the following:
a. Allen Bradley CompactLogix L19
b. No equal
L. Central Processing Unit (CPU)
1. The CPU shall be, at a minimum, a 16-bit microprocessor that provides system timing and is responsible for scheduling I/O updates, with no user programming required to ensure discrete or analog update. It shall execute user relay ladder logic programs, communicate with intelligent I/O modules, and perform on-line diagnostics. The CPU shall consist of a single module which solves application logic, stores the application program, stores numerical values related to the application processes and logic, and interfaces to the I/O.
2. The CPU shall sample all the discrete and analog inputs and outputs including internal coils and registers, and service special function modules every scan. The CPU shall process the I/O with user program(s) stored in memory, then control the outputs based on the results of the logic operation.
3. Supply the CPU with a battery-backed time of day clock and calendar.
4. The CPU family shall allow for user program transportability from one CPU model to another.
M. Diagnostics
1. The CPU shall perform on-line diagnostics that monitor the internal operation of the PLC. If a failure is detected, the CPU shall initiate system shutdown and failover. The following, at a minimum, shall be monitored: Memory failure, memory battery low, and general fault, communications port failure, scan time over run, I/O failure, and analog or special function I/O module failure.
2. All diagnostic information shall be accessible to the host communications interfaces and to the PLC program.
3. The PLC shall have indicators and on board status area to indicate the following conditions:
a. CPU run
b. CPU error or fault
c. I/O failure or configuration fault.
d. Battery good
e. Communications indicator
Packet Pg. 781 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
N. Memory
1. The user program and data shall be contained in non-volatile battery backed memory.
2. Type: CMOS RAM program memory.
3. Memory Backup: lithium battery backup or Flash memory system capable of retaining all memory for a minimum of three months.
4. Backup Battery: The backup battery shall be capable of being replaced without disrupting memory integrity. Provide a visual indication of low battery voltage and a low battery alarm contact.
5. Flash Memory: Upon power loss, the PLC shall transfer internal memory to flash memory before the PLC powers down.
6. The operator should be able to backup volatile memory, including data and program logic onto a personal computer storage disk.
7. The operating system shall be contained in non-volatile firmware. The memory containing the operating system shall be field updateable via a separate update tool.
O. Programming Environment
1. Programming port: The PLC shall utilize a serial USB or Ethernet port for programming.
2. On-Line programming: Application programs may be modified or stored while the CPU is running, with minimal impact on the scan time.
3. Online programming including runtime editing
4. IEC 61131-3 programming languages supported: Ladder logic, function block, sequential function chart, and structure text.
5. Supply all hardware and software necessary to program the CPU in these languages.
P. Communication Ports
1. The CPU shall be expandable and supplied with additional modules to support the required communication interfaces.
2.2 POWER SUPPLIES
A. The PLC shall have chassis mounted power supplies to power the chassis backplane, and provide power for the processor and applicable modules.
B. Power supplies shall have a clearly visible LED to indicate that the incoming power is acceptable and the output voltage is present.
C. Power supplies shall feature over-current and over-voltage protection and should be designed to operate in most industrial environments without the need for isolation transformers.
D. Power supplies shall be sized to accommodate the anticipated load plus 30%.
E. DC power supplies shall be capable of handling ripple up to 2.4V peak to peak.
Packet Pg. 782 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Automatically shut down the Programmable Controller system whenever its output power is detected as exceeding 125% of its rated power
G. Redundant power supplies will comply with all the requirements of non-redundant power supplies in addition to the features stated below.
1. The redundant power supplies shall be designed to share the current required by the chassis. In the event of a failure of one redundant power supply, the remaining supply will accommodate the entire load of the chassis without disruption to the chassis activity.
2. Provide a failsafe fuse that is not accessible by the customer
3. Provide a solid state relay connection to allow for failure annunciation when wired to an input module
4. Diagnostic LED status indicators for Power and redundancy
2.3 CHASSIS
A. Medium and large PLC models shall be chassis based.
B. All system and signal power to the CPU and support modules shall be distributed on the backplane. No interconnecting wiring between these modules via plug-terminated jumpers shall be acceptable.
C. All system modules, main and expansion chassis shall be designed to provide for free air flow convection cooling. No internal fans or other means of cooling, except heat sinks, shall be permitted.
D. Modules shall be designed to plug into a chassis and to be keyed to allow installation in only one direction. The design must prohibit upside down insertion of the modules as well as safeguard against the insertion of a module into the wrong slot or chassis via an electronic method for identifying a module. Electronic keying shall perform an electronic check to insure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured.
2.4 DISCRETE INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES
A. General
1. Digital input and output modules shall provide ON/OFF detection and actuation.
2. The I/O count and type shall be as required to implement the functions specified plus an allowance for active spares, as noted below.
3. Modules shall be designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied.
4. Modules shall have indicators to display the status of communication, module health and input / output devices.
5. Each module shall have the following status indicators. a. The On/Off state of the field device.
b. The moduleís communication status.
6. I/O modules shall contain a maximum of 16 points per module.
Packet Pg. 783 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-10
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Discrete Input Module Specifications
1. Nominal Input Voltage of 24VDC
2. On-State Current of 15mA @132V ac, 47-63Hz maximum
3. Maximum Off-State Voltage of 20V
4. Maximum Off-State Current of 2.5mA
C. Discrete Output Module Specification
1. Each relay output module shall have an associated interposing relay located in the same control panel. 120 VAC power for relay outputs shall be provided from the associated motor starter control circuit (when used with motor starters) or other 120 VAC source (when I/O is not associated with a particular motor starter).
2. Output Voltage Range of 74-265V ac, 47-63Hz
3. Output Current Rating:
a. Per Point - 2A maximum @ 30 degrees C; 1.0A maximum @ 60 degrees C; Linear Derating
b. Per Module - 5A maximum @ 30 degrees C; 4A maximum @ 60 degrees C; Linear Derating
4. Surge Current Per Point of 20A for 43ms each, repeatable every 2s @ 60 degrees C
5. Minimum Load Current of 10mA per point
6. Maximum On-State Voltage Drop of 1.5V peak @2.0A and 6V peak @load less than 50mA
7. Maximum Off-State Leakage of 3mA per point
D. Module Specifications (Contact Output Module)
1. Output Voltage Range of 10-265V ac, 47-63Hz
2. Output Current Rating:
a. Resistive - 2A @ 125V ac
b. Inductive - 2A Steady State, 15A make @125V ac
3. Power Rating (Steady State) of 250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output
4. Maximum Off-State Leakage of 0 mA per point
5. Configurable States
a. Fault Per Point - Hold Last State, ON or OFF
b. Program Mode Per Point - Hold Last State, ON or OFF
2.5 ANALOG INPUT AND OUTPUT MODULES
A. General
1. Analog input modules shall convert an analog signal that is connected to the moduleís screw terminals into a digital value. The digital value representing the magnitude of the analog signal shall be transmitted on the backplane. Analog output modules shall convert a digital value that is delivered to the module via the backplane into an analog signal on the moduleís screw terminals.
Packet Pg. 784 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-11
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Modules shall be designed to be installed or removed while chassis power is applied.
3. Modules shall have indicators to display the status of communication, module health and input / output devices.
4. Each analog module shall provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred. Each module shall have an LED fault indicator and the programming software shall display the fault information.
5. Analog modules shall be software configurable through the I/O configuration portion of the programming software.
6. The following status shall be capable of being examined in ladder logic a. Module Fault Word ñ Provides fault summary reporting. b. Channel Fault Word ñ Provides under-range, over-range and communications fault reporting.
c. Channel Status Words ñ Provides individual channel under-range and overrange fault reporting for process alarm, rate alarms and calibration faults.
7. The 24 VDC power for analog instrument loops shall be provided as a part of the system. The 24 VDC power supply shall be derived from the 120 VAC input power circuit to the PLC. The field side of the 24 VDC power sources(s) shall have individual or grouped (of logically associated circuits) fusing and be provided with a readily visible, labeled blown fuse indicator.
B. Isolated Analog Input Module
1. Input Range of 4-20 mA HART
2. Resolution of approximately 32 bits across range
3. Input Impedance of Greater than 249 Ohms
4. Overvoltage Protection: 8V ac/dc with on-board current resistor
5. Normal Mode Rejection of 60dB at 60Hz
6. Common Mode Noise Rejection of 120dB at 60Hz, 100dB at 50Hz
7. Isolation Voltage
a. Channel to Channel - 100% tested at 1700V dc for 1s based on 250V ac b. User to System - 100% tested at 1700V dc for 1s based on 250V ac C. Isolated Analog Output Current Module
1. Output Current Range of 4 to 20 mA
2. Current Resolution of 12 bits across 20 mA
3. Open Circuit Detection ñ None
4. Output Overvoltage Protection - 24V ac/dc maximum
5. Output Short Circuit Protection ñ 20 mA or less (electronically limited)
6. Calibration Accuracy - Better than 0.1% of range from 4mA to 20 mA
7. Calibration Interval - 12 months typical
2.6 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
A. The PLC will be capable of all necessary communication protocols as shown on the drawings.
Packet Pg. 785 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-12
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. When required provide a Communications Interface Module mounted in the chassis or the equivalent port directly on the CPU.
2.7 PLC SOFTWARE
A. The control system supplier shall provide a PLC configuration and application development software package complete with documentation and disks. The PLC software package and associated licensing and/or activation shall be installed on the computers shown on the drawings.
B. The software package shall allow on-line/off-line program development, annotation, monitoring, debugging, uploading, and downloading of programs to the PLCs.
C. All required hardware (including cables, cable adapters, etc.) for connection to PLCs shall be furnished.
D. All software licenses required to achieve the functionality described in the Specifications shall be provided.
E. The software package shall include a software license agreement allowing the Owner the right to use the software as required for any current or future modification, documentation, or development of the PLCs furnished for this project.
F. The software provided shall be capable of the following IEC 61131-3 functions:
1. Ladder logic.
2. Function block.
3. Sequential function chart.
4. Structure text.
G. In addition to the above editors, an add-on instruction editor shall work with any of the above-mentioned editors to create custom reusable function blocks. This software shall allow any of the derived function blocks to be modified on-line.
H. The software shall be Microsoft Windows-based and run on the supplied computers.
I. The software shall include a security feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from modifying and downloading the programs.
J. Provide an I/O simulator which allows the PLC application load program to be tested on a PC with simulated analog and digital inputs and outputs, allowing I/O testing and debugging to be performed in a safe, isolated environment without the need for running the PLC CPU and process I/O boards.
Packet Pg. 786 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-13
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.8 OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS (OIT)
A. OITs shall be mounted on control panels and shall run interface software as specified herein.
B. Manufacturers
1. Provide operator interface terminals (OIT) as follows:
a. Allen Bradley PanelView 5310
b. No equal
C. Software
1. The Operator Interface Terminal shall be packaged with configuration and programming software; this software includes one of the following:
a. Proficy Machine Edition View
b. or equal
2. The integrated OIT software shall have the following features a. Trending
b. Data Logging
c. Alarms
d. Graphic Symbols
e. Animation
D. I/O Ports and Devices
1. The OIT shall have a minimum of one Ethernet 10/100 Mbps for connectivity or programming.
2. Communication expansion modules shall be available for the selected OIT:
3. Compact flash ports shall be Type 2.
4. The OIT shall have a minimum of one USB port.
E. Display
1. The OIT display size be a minimum of 12.1î.
2. The type of display for the OIT shall Color Active Matrix TFT.
3. Display shall support touch screen input.
F. Environmental
1. Rating: OIT shall be rated to maintain the rating of the control panel it will be mounted in.
2. Temperature: Operating temperature range of the OIT shall range 0-50 degrees C.
2.9 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH
A. General
1. Provide industrial Ethernet switch for connection to the control network backbone as shown in the Drawings and specified herein.
B. Physical Features
1. Copper ports: 4 ñ 10/100 TX RJ45 ports, minimum
2. Operating temperature: 32 to 130 degrees f
Packet Pg. 787 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-14
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3. Power: 24 VDC
4. Enclosure: Metal case, DIN-rail mountable
5. Rating: UL Class 1, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, and D C. Network Features
1. Auto sensing duplex and speed
2. LED link/activity status indication
D. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Phoenix contact
2. N-Tron
3. SixNet
4. Or equal
2.10 DATA INTERFACE MODULE
A. General
1. Provide data interface module with protocol conversion for data collection from the variable frequency drives specified in Section 16269 via Ethernet communications.
B. Physical Features
1. Communications ports:
a. USB/PG port: Adheres to USP specification 1.1.
b. Serial ports: Programmable up to 115,200 baud
c. RS232/PG port: RS232 via RJ12
d. Comms ports: RS422/485 port via RJ45 and RS232 port via RJ12 e. Ethernet port: 10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX, RJ45
2. LEDs : Status, Transmit/Receive, Ethernet activity, CompactFlash activity
3. Operating temperature: 32 to 130 degrees
4. Power: 24 VDC
5. Enclosure: High impact plastic and stainless stewl, DIN-rail mountable
6. Rating: UL Class 1, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, and D C. Memory
1. Onboard user memory: 4MB non-volatile Flash memory
2. SDRAM: 2 MB minimum
3. Memory card: CompactFlash Type II slot for Type I and Type II cards.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Red Lion Model DSP Data Station Plus
2. No equal
Packet Pg. 788 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-15
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Maintain area free of dirt and dust during and after installation of programmable controller products.
B. Anchor PLCs within enclosures as recommended by the PLC manufacturer.
C. Ventilation slots shall not be blocked, or obstructed by any means.
D. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive PLCs for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E. Install in accordance with manufacturerís instructions.
F. Unload, unpack and transport equipment to prevent damage or loss.
G. Replace damaged components as directed by Engineer.
3.2 PANEL LAYOUT
A. Coordinate size and configuration of enclosure to meet project requirements.
Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for PLCs, minimum clearances between PLCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
B. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances, or with PLC vendors required distances if they are greater then the distances indicated.
1. Provide spacing around PLC as required by the PLC manufacturer to insure adequate cooling. Insure that the air surrounding the PLC has been conditioned to maintain the required temperature and humidity range.
2. Wires entering and exiting PLC components shall be sized to comply with the PLC manufacturers requirements. Doors on all components shall be able to be fully closed when all the wires are installed.
3. For chassis mounted PLCs, no wiring, wire ducts, or other devices shall obstruct the removal of cards from the rack.
4. PLC lights, keys, communication ports, and memory card slots shall be accessible at all times. Lights shall be visible at all times when enclosure door is opened.
C. Control panel designer shall provide independent line fuses or circuit breakers, per the PLC manufacturer recommendation, for each power supply, input module, output module, and other modules with separately derived power requirements.
Packet Pg. 789 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13311-16
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. Control panel designer shall insure that communication signals, 4-20mA signals (including those with embedded HART), are properly conditioned for the PLC and protected from all sources of radiated energy or harmonics.
E. Each PLC (including all I/O) shall be powered from the UPS power conditioning system in Section 13330.
F. Where multiple mechanical components are provided for process redundancy, their field connections to I/O modules shall be arranged such that the failure of a single module will not disable all mechanical components associated with the process redundancy (e.g., inputs and outputs for redundancy device 1 shall reside on different modules than the inputs and outputs for redundancy device 2, etc.), irrespective of the number of used points resulting from this configuration.
G. Provide all required cables, cords, and connective devices for interface with other control system components.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 790 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13330
CONTROL PANELS AND PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Section includes control panel enclosure and panel mounted equipment.
The control panel specified in this Section shall be provided by the Greensand Filtration System supplier. The Greensand Filtration System is specified in Section 11540.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 11540 Greensand Filtration System
B. Section 13311 PLC Hardware and Software
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 11540.
1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Not used.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 11540.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 11540.
1.8 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Section 13311.
Packet Pg. 791 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL PANEL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The dimensions on the Contract Drawings are for general reference only. Ensure that final enclosure sizing and panel arrangements accommodate all required equipment for a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein and in the Contract Documents.
B. Each control panel shall bear the UL label. The UL label shall apply to the enclosure, the specific equipment supplied with the enclosure, and the installation and wiring of the equipment within and on the enclosure. If required for UL labeling, provide ground fault protective devices, isolation transformers, fuses and any other equipment necessary to achieve compliance with UL 508 requirement. The Drawings do not detail all UL 508 requirements.
C. All panel doors shall have a lock installed in the door handle, or a hasp and staple for padlocking. Locks for all panels provided under this Contract shall be keyed alike and keyed according to the Ownerís direction.
D. The devices designated for rear-of-panel mounting shall be arranged within the panel in a manner to allow for ease of maintenance and adjustment. Heat generating devices such as power supplies shall be located at or near the top of the panel.
E. The panels shall be completely fabricated, instruments and devices installed and wired at the control system supplierís facility.
F. All components shall be mounted in a manner that shall permit servicing, adjustment, testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving, or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Component mounting shall be oriented in accordance with manufacturerís recommendations. The internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved nametags mounted adjacent to (not on) each component identifying the component in accordance with the drawing, specifications, and control system supplier's data.
G. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, faceplates, etc. required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel.
H. Nameplates
1. All panels and panel devices shall be supplied with suitable nameplates, which identify the panel and individual devices as required.
2. Unless escutcheon plates are specified or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, nameplates shall be 3/32-inch thick, black and white, Lamicoid Packet Pg. 792 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
with engraved inscriptions. Edges of the nameplates shall be beveled and smooth. Nameplates with chipped or rough edges will not be acceptable.
3. Nameplate fasteners and mounting shall be epoxy adhesive or stainless steel screws for cabinet mounted nameplates
4. For every panel, provide a panel nameplate with a minimum of 1" high letters. Provide legend plates or 1-in by 3-in engraved nameplates with 1/4- in lettering for identification of door mounted control devices, pilot lights, and meters.
I. Mounting Elevations
1. ISA Recommended Practice RP60.3 shall be used as a guide in layout and arrangement of panels and panel mounted components. Dimensions shall account for all housekeeping pads that panels will sit on once they are installed.
2. Installation of panel components shall conform to component manufacturers' guidelines.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Structure and Enclosure
1. Panels shall be of continuous welded-steel or FRP construction as shown on the Panel Schedule. Provide angle stiffeners as required on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation. Internally the panels shall be supplied with a structural framework for instrument support purposes and panel bracing. The internal framework shall permit panel lifting without racking or distortion. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate simple, safe rigging, and lifting of the control panels during installation.
2. Each panel shall be provided with full height, fully gasketed access doors where shown. Doors shall be provided with a three-point stainless steel latch (except for NEMA 4X panels) and heavy duty stainless steel locking handle.
Rear access doors (if included) shall be conveniently arranged and sized such that they extend no further than 24-inches beyond the panel when opened to the 90-degree position. Front and side access doors shall be as shown. Panel access doors shall be provided with full length, continuous, piano type stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins. Front access doors with mounted instruments or control devices shall be of sufficient width to permit door opening without interference from flush mounted instruments.
3. The panels, including component parts, shall be free from sharp edges and welding flaws. Wiring shall be free from kinks and sharp bends and shall be routed for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection purposes.
4. The panel shall be suitable for top and bottom conduit entry as required by the Electrical Drawings. For top mounted conduit entry, the panel top shall be provided with nominal one-foot square removable access plates, which may be drilled to accommodate conduit and cable penetrations. All conduit and cable penetrations shall be provided with ground bushings, hubs, Packet Pg. 793 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
gasketed locknuts, and other accessories as required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel and electrical rating of the conduit system.
5. All panels in indoor, dry, non-corrosive environments shall be NEMA 12 unless otherwise noted. All panels in outdoor, wet, and non-chemically corrosive environments shall be NEMA 4 unless otherwise noted. Panels in chemically corrosive environments shall be NEMA 4X unless otherwise noted.
B. Freestanding and Floor-Mounted Vertical Panels
1. Freestanding and floor-mounted vertical panels shall meet the NEMA classification as shown on the drawings or specified herein. The panels shall be constructed of 12 gauge sheet steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All NEMA 4X rated panels shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless FRP is specifically indicated to be provided. Front panels or panels containing instruments shall be not less than 10 gauge stretcher leveled sheet steel, reinforced to prevent warping or distortion.
C. Wall and Unistrut Mounted Panels
1. All wall and Unistrut mounted panels shall meet the NEMA classification as shown on the drawings or specified herein. The panels shall be constructed of not less than USS 14 gauge steel, suitably braced internally for structural rigidity and strength. All NEMA 4X rated wall mounted panels shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, unless FRP is specifically indicated. FRP panels shall be used in chlorine areas. All FRP panels located in direct sunlight shall be provided with a protective coating and sun shield to prevent discoloration and cracking.
D. Finish Requirements
1. All sections shall be descaled, degreased, filled, ground and finished. The enclosure when fabricated of steel shall be finished with two rust resistant phosphate prime coats and two coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish which shall be applied by either the hot air spray or conventional cold spray methods. Brushed anodized aluminum, stainless steel, and FRP panels will not require a paint finish.
2. The panels shall have edges ground smooth and shall be sandblasted and then cleaned with a solvent. Surface voids shall be filled and ground smooth.
3. Immediately after cleaning, one coat of a rust-inhibiting primer shall be applied inside and outside, followed by an exterior intermediate and top coat of a two-component type epoxy enamel. A final sanding shall be applied to the intermediate exterior coat before top coating.
4. Apply a minimum of two coats of flat white lacquer on the panel interior after priming.
5. Unless otherwise noted, the finish exterior colors shall be ANSI 61 gray with a textured finish.
Packet Pg. 794 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-5
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. The storage pockets shall be steel, welded on to the door, and finished to match the interior panel color. The storage pocket shall be sufficient to hold all of the prints required to service the equipment, and to accommodate 8.5 inch by 11 inch documents without folding.
2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
A. All panels shall be provided with louvers, sun shields, heat sinks, forced air ventilation, or air conditioning units as required to prevent temperature buildup inside of panel. The internal temperature of all panels shall be regulated to a range of 45 Deg F to 104 Deg F under all conditions. Under no circumstances shall the panel cooling or heating equipment compromise the NEMA rating of the panel.
B. Control system supplier shall submit heat dissipation calculations for every control panel.
C. Except for panels mounted with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, louvers shall be in the rear of the panels, top and bottom, and shall be stamped sheet metal construction.
D. For panels mounted with their backs directly adjacent to a wall, louvers shall be on the sides.
E. Forced air ventilation fans, where used, shall provide a positive internal pressure within the panel, and shall be provided with washable or replaceable filters. Fan motors shall operate on 120-volt, 60-Hz power.
F. For panels with internal heat that cannot be adequately dissipated with natural convection and heat sinks, or forced air ventilation, an air conditioner shall be provided.
G. All outdoor enclosures and enclosures located in unheated areas indoors or in areas subject to humidity and moisture shall be provided with an integral heater, fan, and adjustable thermostat to reduce condensation and maintain the minimum internal panel temperature. Mount the unit near the bottom of the enclosure with discharge away from heat-sensitive equipment.
2.4 CORROSION CONTROL
A. Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Northern Technologies International Corporation, Model Zerust VC ; Hoffman Model AHCI; or equal.
2.5 CONTROL PANEL - INTERNAL CONSTRUCTION
A. Internal Electrical Wiring
Packet Pg. 795 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-6
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1. All interconnecting wiring shall be stranded, type MTW, and shall have 600 volt insulation and be rated for not less than 90 degrees Celsius. Wiring for systems operating at voltages in excess of 120 VAC shall be segregated from other panel wiring either in a separate section of a multi-section panel or behind a removable Plexiglas or similar dielectric barrier. Panel layout shall be developed such that technicians shall have complete access to 120 VAC and lower voltage wiring systems without direct exposure to higher voltages.
2. Power distribution wiring on the line side of fuses or breakers shall be 12 AWG minimum. Control wiring on the secondary side of fuses shall be 16 AWG minimum. Electronic analog circuits shall utilize 18 AWG shielded, twisted pair, cable insulated for not less than 600 volts.
3. Power and low voltage DC wiring systems shall be routed in separate wireways. Crossing of different system wires shall be at right angles.
Different system wires routed parallel to each other shall be separated by at least 6-inches. Different wiring systems shall terminate on separate terminal blocks. Wiring troughs shall not be filled to more than 60 percent visible fill.
4. Terminations
a. All wiring shall terminate onto single tier terminal blocks, where each terminal is uniquely and sequentially numbered. Direct wiring between field equipment and panel components is not acceptable. b. Multi-level terminal blocks or strips are not acceptable. c. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into groups (power, AC control, DC signal). Each group of terminal blocks shall have a minimum of 25 percent spares.
d. Terminal blocks shall be the compression type, fusevd, unfused, or switched as shown on the Contract Drawings or specified elsewhere in Division 13.
e. Discrete inputs and outputs (DI and DO) shall have two terminals per point with adjacent terminal assignments. All active and spare PLC and controller points shall be wired to terminal blocks.
f. Analog inputs and outputs (AI and AO) shall have three terminals per shielded pair connection with adjacent terminal assignments for each point. The third terminal is for shielded ground connection for cable pairs. Ground the shielded signal cable at the PLC cabinet. All active and spare PLC and controller points shall be wired to terminal blocks. g. Wire and tube markers shall be the sleeve type with heat impressed letters and numbers.
h. Only one side of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring.
The field wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6-inches of the side panel or adjacent terminal or within 8-inches of the bottom of free standing panels, or within 3-inches of stanchion mounted panels, or 3- inches of adjacent wireway.
i. Circuit power from the control panel out to field devices (switches, dry contacts etc.) that are used as discrete inputs to the PLC input cards shall be isolated with an isolating switch terminal block with flip cover that is supplied with a dummy fuse. One isolating switch terminal block Packet Pg. 796 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-7
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
per loop numbered piece of equipment and one per spare I/O point is acceptable.
j. All PLC discrete outputs to the field shall be isolated with an isolating fuse switch terminal block with a flip cover and a neon blown fuse indicator.
5. All wiring to hand switches and other devices, which are live circuits independent of the panelís normal circuit breaker protection, shall be clearly identified as such.
6. All wiring shall be clearly tagged and color coded. All tag numbers and color coding shall correspond to the panel wiring diagrams and loop drawings prepared by the PCSS. All power wiring, control wiring, grounding, and DC wiring shall utilize different color insulation for each wiring system used. The color coding scheme shall be:
a. Incoming 120 VAC Hot - Black
b. 120 VAC Hot wiring downstream of panel circuit breaker ñ Red c. 120 VAC Hot wiring derived from a UPS system ñ Red with Black stripe d. Three phase power ñ Brown, Orange, Yellow, and Green ground or as specified in Division 16.
e. 120 VAC neutral - White
f. Ground - Green
g. DC power or control wiring ñ Brown (+), Blue (-)
h. DC analog signal wiring ñ White (+), Black (-)
i. Foreign voltage ñ Yellow
7. Provide surge protectors on all incoming power supply lines at each panel.
8. Each field instrument furnished under Division 13 and shown on the Drawings as deriving input power from the control panel(s) shall have a separate power distribution circuit with a circuit breaker or fuse and blown fuse indication. All instruments requiring 120VAC power shall be powered from the UPS source in the panel where the instrument signals lands.
9. Provide 24 VDC power supplies to power field instruments and panel devices. Twenty-four VDC power supplies shall be as specified in this Section.
10. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with snapon covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the subpanel by stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the panel with glue or adhesives.
11. Each panel shall have an LED light fixture, 20 Watt in size, mounted internally to the ceiling of the panel. Light fixture shall be switched and shall be complete with the lamp.
12. Each panel shall have a specification grade duplex convenience receptacle with ground fault interrupter, mounted internally within a stamped steel device box with appropriate cover. Convenience receptacle shall not be powered from a UPS and shall be protected by a dedicated fuse or circuit breaker.
13. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for all signal and shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations.
Packet Pg. 797 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-8
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
14. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code.
15. Each panel shall have control, signal, and communication line surge suppression.
16. All microprocessor-based electronic devices in the panel that are powered by 120VAC shall be powered by the UPS (refer to appropriate Section in Division 13).
17. Each panel shall be provided with a circuit breaker to interrupt incoming power. Provide a minimum of two (2) spare 20-amp breakers.
18. Additional electrical components including transformers, motor starters, switches, circuit breakers, etc. shall be in compliance with the requirements of Division 16.
B. Relays required for properly completing the control function specified in Division 13 or shown on the Drawings shall be provided under this Section.
C. The orientation of all devices including PLC and I/O when installed shall be per the manufacturerís recommendations. No vertical orientation of PLC racks shall be allowed unless specifically indicated by the manufacturer as an acceptable mounting alternative and also approved by the engineer.
2.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A. The control panel shall be provided with a lightning and surge protection unit on the line side of the main circuit breaker. Unit shall be 600 Volt, 3 Phase, General Electric "Tranquell" Series, or equal.
B. Specific control devices, control descriptions and other data are specified under the detailed specification for the mechanical equipment with which the control panel is supplied.
2.7 24 VDC Power Supplies
A. Provide a 24 VDC power supply in the control panel to power field instruments, panel devices, etc., as required. Equip the power supply with a power on/off circuit breaker.
B. The 24 VDC power supply shall meet the following requirements:
1. Input power: 115 VAC, plus or minus 10 percent, 60 Hz.
2. Output voltage: 24 VDC.
3. Output voltage adjustment: 5 percent.
4. Line regulation: 0.05 percent for 10 volt line change.
5. Load regulation: 0.15 percent no load to full load.
6. Ripple: 3 mV RMS.
7. Operating temperature: 32 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Size the 24 VDC power supply to accommodate the design load plus a minimum 25 percent spare capacity.
Packet Pg. 798 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13330-9
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
D. If power supply on/off status signal is shown, provide a relay contact (internal to the power supply or external if the power supply is not so equipped) to indicate on/off status of the power supply.
E. Provide output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices with the power supply to protect instruments from damage due to power supply failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure.
F. Mount the 24 VDC power supply such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other panel components.
2.8 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A. The Filter Control Panel and all control components shall be connected to the existing uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The panels shall be installed at locations as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Refer to Section 13300.
3.2 TESTS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 799 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 800 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13341-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13341
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ñ FLOW DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the flow related instruments.
B. Refer to Section 13300.
1.2 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.3 ACCESSORIES
A. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided.
B. Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer installed stainless steel tag identifying the instrument tag number.
1.4 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS
A. Instruments specified herein shall meet at a minimum, the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) rating for non-hazardous locations listed with each instrument. Those instruments that are submerged in a liquid or are located in submersible area shall also meet NEMA 6 ratings approval. All instruments that are located in hazardous areas as indicated on the Electrical Classification Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule shall meet the Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC Class, Division and Group approvals and certifications listed for that area. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Magnetic Flowmeter
A. Flow Element
1. Type:
a. Pulsed DC type.
2. Function/Performance:
Packet Pg. 801 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13341-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
a. Operating Temperature: Process liquid temperatures of 0 to 140 degrees F or greater dependent upon liner and an ambient of minus 30 to 150 degrees F.
b. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) protection: RFI protection shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer.
c. Pressure rating: Equal to piping system where meter is installed. d. Additional: Meter shall be capable of running empty indefinitely without damage to any component.
3. Physical:
a. Metering Tube: 304 stainless steel or equivalent.
b. Flanges: ANSI 150 lb. or DIN PN 16 carbon steel, as required by the piping system, unless otherwise indicated. ANSI 150 lb. or DIN PN 16 stainless steel flanges shall be used on all SS process pipes. c. Liner: Polyurethane or composite elastomer unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
d. Electrodes: 316 stainless steel standard minimum requirements. All electrodes to be compatible with process fluid as indicated on the Drawings or specified in this Section.
For sludge, polymer, or any slurry application where the electrodes will be coated, a self cleaning or a removable electrode option must be provided with that meter.
e. Housing: Meters below grade shall be suitable for submergence for up to 48 hours to a depth of 30 ft (9m). Meters above grade shall be NEMA 4X (IP65). Where hazardous areas are indicated on the Drawings, the equipment shall be rated for that area.
f. Finish: All external surfaces shall have a chemical and corrosion resistant finish.
4. Power Requirements:
a. Meter shall be 24 VDC powered instrument, receiving its power from transmitter.
5. Accessories/Documentation Required:
a. Factory calibration: All meters shall be factory calibrated. A copy of the report shall be included in the O&M manual.
b. Grounding: Meter shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturerís recommendation. Provide ground ring, ground wires, gaskets, etc., as required. All materials shall be suitable for the liquid being measured and must be compatible with process fluid and with the process pipe.
c. Signal cable for installation between the flowtube and the transmitter.
Length shall be as required by installation indicated on the Drawings.
B. Flow Converter/Transmitter
1. Type:
a. Micro processor based, intelligent transmitter compatible with flowtube provided.
b. Mounted remote from the flowtube.
2. Functional/Performance:
a. Accuracy (including flowtube): Plus/minus 0.5 percent of flowrate. b. Operating Temperature: ñ20 to 140 degrees F.
Packet Pg. 802 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13341-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
c. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA with HART protocol. Current output adjustable over the full range of the instrument. A dry contact rated for 120 VAC, 2A to indicate reverse flow.
d. Diagnostics: Self diagnostics with on screen display of faults. e. Display: Digital indicator displaying flow in engineering units indicated in this Section.
f. Totalizer: A fully configurable totalizer integral to the transmitter.
Totalized flow shall be displayed.
g. Empty Tube Zero: The transmitter shall include a feature that will lock the output at zero when no flow is detected. The empty tube zero feature shall be enabled automatically when the transmitter detects no flow or manually through a contact input.
h. Provide electrode cleaning unit to match flow element requirements.
3. Physical:
a. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. b. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (IP65).
4. Power Requirements:
a. The transmitter shall be a 24VDC powered instrument.
5. Accessories/ Required:
a. Keypad where required for transmitter configuration.
C. Meter size and service:
1. Tag Number: FE/FIT 2170
a. Meter size: 4î
b. Service: Backwash Reclaim Water
c. Calibration Range: 0-250 gpm
D. Manufacturer:
1. Endress and Hauser Proline ProMag 500.
2. No equal to match Ownerís standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See execution requirements in Section 13300.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 803 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13341-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 804 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13342-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13342
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - LEVEL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor and materials required and installed complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
B. This Section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the field-mounted instruments as detailed on the Drawings.
C. Refer to Section 13300.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.7 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.9 ACCESSORIES
A. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided.
Packet Pg. 805 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13342-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer-installed stainless steel tag identifying the instrument tag number. Refer to Section 13300.
1.10 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.11 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS
A. Instruments for hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instrument specifications in Part 2 state the Class, Division, and gas groups for FM/CSA approval, followed in parenthesis by the CENELEC certification; however, instruments provided are only required to have the approval/certification stated above. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RADAR LEVEL METER
A. Type
1. Non-contact, microwave type level meter.
B. Function/Performance
1. Measuring Range: Range as indicated below.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.3 percent or plus or minus 1.2 inches (30mm), whichever is greater.
3. Operating Temperature: ñ40 to 60 degrees C.
4. Output: Isolated 4-20 mA output.
5. Display: Digital indicator displaying level or volume in engineering units or percent, as indicated on the Drawings. Display shall be external to the level sensor
6. Diagnostics: On-screen instructions and display of self-diagnostics.
C. Physical
1. Instrument shall be provided with a stainless steel three-inch Class 150 pound (DN 80, PN16) mounting flange.
2. Housing shall be NEMA 4X (IP66).
3. Two-wire loop powered with HART communcations.
D. Accessories Required
1. Where required for calibration/programming, a hand-held programmer shall be provided.
2. External display and HART signal cable
Packet Pg. 806 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13342-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
E. Calibration:
1. Tag Number: LE/LIT_02160
a. Service description: Backwash Reclaim Tank Level
b. Calibration Range: 0-20 ft
2. Tag Number: LE/LIT_07200
a. Service description: Ferric Chloride Tank Level
b. Calibration Range: 0-10 ft
F. Manufacturer(s)
1. Vega VEGAPULS 62 radar transmitter with VEGADIS external display US31204295
2. No equal to match Ownerís standards.
2.1 ULTRASONIC LEVEL METER FOR FLOW MEASUREMENT
A. Transducer
1. Type
a. Non-contact, ultrasonic level transducer.
2. Function/Performance
a. Measuring Range: Transducer range shall be suitable for the installation indicated on the Drawings, up to 50 ft (15m).
b. Temperature Range: ñ20 to 60 degrees C.
c. Relative Humidity: Zero to 100 percent.
d. Temperature Compensation: Transducers shall be provided with integral temperature sensors for temperature compensation at temperature ranges from -50° to 150° C.
3. Physical
a. Transducers shall be potted/encapsulated in a Kynar or other chemical and corrosion-resistant housing. Where indicated on the Drawings, transducers shall be approved for installation in Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D (Zone 0) environments.
b. The surface of transducers shall be Teflon-coated where mounted on chemical tanks and exposed to vapors in the tanks that are not compatible with the transducer material.
c. Transducers shall be capable of being completely submerged without damage.
d. Transducers shall be suitable for surface, pipe, or flange mounting as indicated on the Drawings or Instrument Device Schedule. Appropriate mounting hardwired shall be provided. Flanges shall be six inch (150 mm) and resistant to attack by the medium being metered or, where required, shall be protected by corrosion- resistant coatings and facings.
4. Options/Accessories Required
a. Transducers located in areas where freezing condensation may occur shall be provided with special heaters or other type of transducer protection designed to prevent sensor icing.
b. Signal cable as recommended by the manufacturer, for installation between the transducer(s) and the transmitter. Length, up to 1200 feet (365 m), shall be as required by installation indicated on the Drawings.
Packet Pg. 807 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13342-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
5. Manufacturer(s)
a. Siemens.
b. Or Equal.
B. Transmitter/Converter
1. Type
a. Microprocessor based compatible with the transducer(s) provided.
2. Functional/Performance
a. Resolution (including transducer): Plus or minus 0.1 percent of range or
0.08 inches (2 mm), whichever is greater.
b. Accuracy (including transducer): Plus or minus 0.25 percent of range or
0.24 inches (6 mm).
c. Range: As required by the installation indicated on the Drawings. d. Temperature Range: -20 to 50 degrees C.
e. Output: Two isolated 4-20 mA output and one, three, or six alarm contacts adjustable to trip at any point in the instrument range. Output contacts shall be rated 5 A at 230 VAC.
f. Temperature Compensation: Compensation over the temperature range of the sensor.
g. Display: Digital indicator displaying level/differential level or volume in engineering units or percent as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule.
h. Diagnostics: On-screen instructions and display of self- diagnostics. i. Loss of Signal: Transmitter shall ignore momentary loss-of-echo signals and shall indicate loss of echo on the transmitter unit. j. Configuration Protection: Programmable parameters shall be protected using E2PROM. Battery backup protection is not acceptable.
3. Physical
a. Transmitter shall be suitable for surface or pipe stand mounting. b. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (IP65).
c. A/C power will be as specified in Section (40 9000) (13300).
4. Accessories Required
a. Hand-held programmer where required for configuration and calibration of the instrument.
5. Manufacturer(s)
a. Siemens Model HydroRanger 200
b. Or Equal.
C. Calibration:
1. Tag Numbers: LE/LIT_06230
a. Service description: Wastewater Flowrate, Parshall Flume Level b. Calibration Range: 0.6 to 18 inches (7 to 835 gpm)
Packet Pg. 808 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13342-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH
A. Type: Ultrasonic point level switch.
B. Function/Performance
1. Pulsed signal technology where ultrasonic energy is used to detect the presence of liquid in a sump for leak detection.
2. Switch includes ultrasonic transducer with a liquid sensing gap at tip of transducer. Ultrasonic bursts are transmitted across the gap. When level is present across the gap, the switch actuates energizing a relay to indicate an alarm.
3. Switch: One DPDT level relay, 5 amps at 120VAC.
4. Loop powered 24VDC.
5. FM/CSA approved intrinsically safe, non-incendive and explosion-proof C. Physical
1. Switch/electronics housing: stainless steel.
2. Transducer material shall be suitable for contact with the following liquids:
a. Ferric chloride (for instrument tag number LSH_07300) D. Manufacturers:
1. Magnetrol Echotel.
2. Gems Sensors.
3. Or Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See execution requirements in Section 13300.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 809 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13342-6
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 810 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13343-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 13343
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS ñ PRESSURE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the field-mounted instruments as detailed on the Drawings.
B. Refer to Section 13300.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.4 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.8 NOMENCLATURE AND IDENTIFICATION.
A. Refer to Section 13300.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 13300.
Packet Pg. 811 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13343-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.10 ACCESSORIES
A. All mounting hardware required for pipe stand, surface, or other mounting shall be provided.
B. Each instrument shall be provided with a manufacturer installed stainless steel tag identifying the instrument tag number.
1.11 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATIONS
A. Instruments for hazardous locations shall have Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and CENELEC approvals and certifications as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings or in the Instrument Device Schedule. The instrument specifications in Part 2 state the Class, Division, and gas groups for FM/CSA approval, followed in parenthesis by the CENELEC certification; however, instruments provided are only required to have the approval/certification stated above. The instrument shall have a stainless steel tag identifying the relevant approval or certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Diaphragm Seal - Threaded
A. Type:
1. Thread attached.
2. Welded Metal Diaphragm.
B. Function/Performance:
1. Maximum Pressure: Two times the maximum process pressure.
2. Operating Temperature: -40 to 100 degrees C.
C. Physical:
1. All 316L stainless steel construction.
2. Teflon gaskets and O rings on process connection.
3. Bleeding connection provided. NOTE: filling screw not recommended since it provides poor quality measurement if done incorrectly in the field.
D. Accessories Required:
1. Stainless steel armored capillary tubing as required for the installation.
E. Manufacturer(s):
1. Rosemount.
2. Ashcroft.
3. Ronningen-Petter Company.
4. Siemens 7MF4861
5. Equal.
Packet Pg. 812 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13343-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.2 Pressure Sensing Level Transmitter
A. Type:
1. Microprocessor based, intelligent type.
B. Function/Performance:
1. Range: Range of the transmitter shall be the standard range of the manufacturer closest to the pressure range to be metered.
2. Accuracy: 0.4 percent of span.
3. Operating Temperature: -13 to 176 degrees F.
4. Output: 4-20 mA DC linear with pressure or level with HART protocol. Zero adjustable over the range of the instrument provided calibrated span is greater than the minimum calibrated span.
5. Stability: 0.05 percent of upper range limit for 1 year.
6. Display: Digital indicator displaying level in the engineering units indicated in this Section.
7. Diagnostics:
a. Self-diagnostics with transmitter failure driving output to above or below out of range limits.
b. Simulation capability for inputs and loop outputs.
c. Test terminals available to ease connection for test equipment without opening the loop.
d. Registers to record minimum and maximum pressure and temperatures transmitter has been exposed to shall be available.
e. Run-time clock available to determine usage for warranty purposes. 5- year warranty on this clock reading is included.
8. Over Range Protection: Provide positive over range protection to 150 percent of the maximum pressure of the system being monitored by the instrument.
C. Physical:
1. Enclosure: NEMA 4X (IP66)
2. Process Wetted Parts: Isolating diaphragm and other wetted metal parts shall be 316L stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated in the device schedule.
Gaskets and O rings shall be Teflon.
3. Power supply shall be 24 VDC loop power.
4. Sensor Fill Fluid: Silicone.
D. Accessories Required:
1. Provide span and zero adjustment at each transmitter and through the handheld programming unit.
a. Configuration of the transmitter may be accomplished using the local display and pushbuttons without the use of an external programming device.
E. Calibration:
1. Tag Number: PIT_2170
a. Service: Backwash Reclaim Pump Discharge Pressure
b. Calibration Range: 0-200 psi
Packet Pg. 813 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 13343-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Manufacturer(s):
1. IFM Efector Pressure Transmitter with Display PN2693 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. See execution requirements in Section 13300.
++ END OF SECTION ++
Packet Pg. 814 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15010-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15010
PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Details of each pipe support type used.
2. Structural calculations see Section 01610, General Equipment Requirements, for pipe support design criteria. Coordinate anchorage with supporting substrates and members shown on the Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT SYSTEMS:
A. Channel-type support systems
1. 304 Stainless Steel
a. Unistrut
b. B-Line
c. Or Equal.
2. Non-metallic
a. Aikenstrut
b. CLIC
c. Or Equal.
B. Hanger- and Clevis-type support systems
1. B-line
2. Anvil
3. Or Equal
C. Stanchion-type support systems
1. B-Line
2. Anvil
3. Or Equal
D. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Support
1. B-Line, Figure B-3092
2. Or Equal
E. Wall Bracket (14-inch to 24-inch pipe)
1. B-Line Figure B-3067 Heavy Duty Angle Bracket
2. Or Equal
F. Wall Bracket (8-inch to 12-inch pipe)
1. B-Line Figure B-3066 Medium Duty Angle Bracket
2. Or Equal
Packet Pg. 815 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15010-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
G. Wall Bracket (4-inch to 6-inch pipe)
1. B-Line Figure B-3068 Light Duty Angle Bracket
2. Or Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. In addition to the pipe supports specifically called for on the drawings, CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe supports as required to fully support all piping systems.
B. CONTRACTOR shall design, supply and install pipe support system using manufacturerís standard available pipe support hardware.
C. Pipe supports shall, at a minimum, be installed at the following locations:
1. On both sides of each valve, piece of equipment or other appurtenance, such that allowance is made for removal of the valve, piece of equipment, or other appurtenance while leaving the pipe system fully supported. Support piping connections to equipment by pipe support and not by the equipment.
2. Along straight runs of pipe, the maximum distance between supports shall be as listed below:
Pipe Diameter Maximum Distance
Between Supports
Minimum Hanger Rod Diameter
(if Hanger Rods are used)
2î and smaller 6-feet ½î
2-1/2î to 6î 8-feet æî
8î to 12î 10-feet 2 @ æî
14î to 18î 10-feet 2 @ 1î
Over 18î Custom Design
3. Directly supporting valves 8-inch in diameter and larger.
4. At least two supports on each side of flexible couplings or flanged coupling adapters to provide that no load is applied to the flexible coupling.
5. On the pipe within two pipe diameters of each side of elbows and each branch of tees and crosses.
6. Where piping passes through walls, such that no load is transferred to the wall.
D. Install support systems in accordance with MSS SP 69, Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application and MSS SP 89, Pipe Hangers and Supports-Fabrication and Installation, unless shown otherwise.
1. Support no pipe from the pipe above it.
2. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access areas or bridge crane runs.
E. Bracing and lateral support:
1. Provide vertical sway bracing on 10-foot maximum centers a. Brace hanging pipes against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway bracing.
2. Install lateral supports for seismic loads at all changes in direction.
Packet Pg. 816 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15010-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
F. Thermal expansion and thrust restraint
1. Install pipe anchors where required to withstand expansion thrust loads and to direct and control thermal expansion.
G. Support types:
1. Horizontal Suspended Piping:
a. Single Pipes: Adjustable swivel-ring, splint-ring or clevis hangers. b. Grouped Pipes: Trapeze hanger systems.
c. For insulated piping, furnish galvanized steel protection shields, welding insulation saddles, or precut sections of rigid insulation (with vapor barrier) at all hanger locations.
2. Horizontal Piping Supported From Walls:
a. Single Pipes: Wall brackets or wall clips attached to wall with anchors. Clips attached to wall-mounted framing also acceptable.
b. Stacked Piping:
1) Wall-mounted framing system and clips acceptable for piping smaller than 3-inch minimal diameter.
2) Piping clamps that resist axial movement of pipe through support not acceptable.
c. Insulated piping shall have the insulation removed in the vicinity of wall brackets and piping clips to allow only direct pipe wall contact with the support system.
3. Horizontal Piping Supported From Floors:
a. Stanchion Type:
1) Pedestal type; adjustable with stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange. 2) Use yoked saddles for piping whose centerline elevation is 18 inches or greater above the floor and for all exterior installations. 3) Provide neoprene waffle isolation pad under anchoring flanges, adjacent to equipment or where otherwise required to provide vibration isolation. b. Floor-Mounted Channel Supports:
1) Use for piping smaller than 3-inch nominal diameter running along floors and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using pedestal pipe supports.
2) Attach channel framing to floors with anchor bolts.
3) Attach pipe to channel with clips or pipe clamps.
c. Concrete Cradles:
1) Use for piping larger than 3-inch along floor and in trenches at piping elevations lower than can be accommodated using stanchion type.
4. Vertical Pipe:
a. Support with wall brackets and base elbow or riser clamps on floor penetrations. b. Insulated piping shall have the insulation removed in the vicinity of wall brackets and riser clamps, to allow only direct wall contact with the support system.
H. Standard Attachments:
1. To Concrete Ceilings: Concrete inserts.
2. To Steel Beams: I-beam clamp or welded attachments.
3. To Wooden Beams: Lag screws and angle clips to members not less than 2-1/2 inches thick.
4. To Concrete Walls: Concrete inserts or brackets or clip angles with anchor bolts.
5. Existing Walls and Ceilings: Install as specified for new construction, unless shown otherwise.
6. Repair mounting surfaces to original condition after attachments are made.
Packet Pg. 817 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15010-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
I. Isolation:
1. Install elastomeric inserts designed to isolate piping from pipe supports where copper pipe is run in stainless steel supports, or where other dissimilar metals are in contact with pipe supports.
J. Materials:
1. Channel-type, hanger-type and trapeze-type support systems and pipe racks constructed of channel systems:
a. Provide non-metallic support systems in all chemical storage and feed areas.
Provide type 316 stainless steel fasteners.
b. Provide type 304 stainless steel support systems and fasteners in all other areas.
2. Stanchion-type support systems
a. Provide steel and ductile iron stanchion components
b. Coat stanchions after assembly per specification Section 09900, Painting. + + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 818 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15080-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15080
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Manufacturerís data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings, overall lengths, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE INSULATON
A. INS-01: Flexible Elastomeric Pipe Insulation (up to 6î diameter)
1. Material: Flexible elastomeric pipe insulation, closed cell structure
2. Provide a minimum of æ-inch thickness
3. Temperature Rating: -40 degrees to 200 degrees Fahrenheit
4. Nominal Density: 6 pcf
5. Conductivity in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and minimum of 0.27 BTU-in/hr-ft2 degrees F at 75 degrees F per ASTM C177 or ASTM C518.
6. Minimum water vapor transmission of 0.10 perm-inch per ASTM E96
7. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25 per ASTM E84
8. Joint sealant and tape per manufacturer
9. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Rubatex: R-180-FS
b. Armstrong: Armaflex AP
c. Or Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Where called for in the drawings or pipe schedule, provide heat tracing between pipe and insulation.
1. Install heat tracing per manufacturerís instructions
2. Provide electrical service to heat tracing from nearest 120V panelboard or receptacle, whether shown on the electrical drawings or not. Electrical service shall be in accordance with all codes and regulations for the installation.
B. Insulate all piping, valves and fittings for the piping systems (Flow Stream IDs) where insulation is called for in 15100 PS - Piping Schedule
C. Install insulation according to manufacturerís instructions
1. Install insulation only after piping system has passed pressure testing.
Packet Pg. 819 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15080-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2. Requirement for insulation does not negate the requirement for coating of the piping system. Apply piping coating system as called for in 15100 PS ñ Piping Schedule. Allow coating system to completely cure prior to installation of pipe insulation.
3. If heat tracing is required on piping system, do not install pipe insulation until after heat tracing has been installed and successfully tested.
4. Do not ìgapî insulation at pipe supports. Trim insulation to allow for pipe support while providing continuous insulation of piping in those parts of the pipe not in contact with pipe support.
5. Install removable/replaceable insulation sections and cover panels over fittings or valves which require maintenance access.
6. Use accessories, adhesives and tapes per manufacturerís recommendations.
D. Finishing
1. Overall installation shall result in smooth, straight, neat and clean piping insulation system. No frayed ends, irregular lumps or other unsightly installation result will be acceptable.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 820 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100
PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Product data sheets for each piping system.
a. Include information on pipe, fittings and joint systems.
2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
3. Complete descriptions and data for all coatings and linings.
4. Tests and inspection data for pipe and coatings/linings.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with manufacturerís directions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEETS
A. Piping system data sheets (PSDS) have been attached to this Specification and are incorporated herein by reference. Provide piping systems in accordance with piping system data sheets.
2.2 THRUST RESTRAINT
A. Provide rigid or restrained joints and fittings for all piping systems specified with a test pressure in the Pipe Schedule.
B. Unless otherwise specified in the Pipe Schedule or shown on the Drawings, thrust blocks shall not be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE SCHEDULE
A. A Pipe Schedule has been attached to this Specification and is incorporated herein by reference. Install piping systems in accordance with Pipe Schedule.
B. For pipe which is shown on the Drawings, but not referenced in the Pipe Schedule, CONTRACTOR to provide pipe material and fittings which are appropriate for the intended service and acceptable to the ENGINEER.
Packet Pg. 821 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Inspect pipe and fittings before installation, clean ends thoroughly, and remove foreign matter and dirt from inside.
B. Repair any coatings or linings which were damaged during shipping and handling using manufacturer-approved coating and lining repair materials in accordance with manufacturerís instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Join pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturerís instructions, unless otherwise shown or specified.
B. Joint Assembly:
1. Flanged Joints (FLG):
a. Bolt Holes: Straddle vertical centerlines, aligned with connecting equipment flanges or as shown.
b. Follow a bolt tightening pattern which produces uniform bearing pressure. c. Do not over-tighten bolts. Follow manufacturerís recommendation for bolt torque. d. Provide gasket at every flanged joint.
e. Provide insulating flange kit where indicated on Drawings and required in this Specification.
2. Threaded and Coupled Joints (THR):
a. Conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
b. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when screwed home in fittings.
c. Ream pipe ends and clean chips and burrs after threading. d. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed. e. Lubricate male threads only with thread lubricant or tape as specified on Piping Data Sheets.
f. PVC Threaded Joints:
1) Provide Schedule 80 threaded nipple where necessary to connect to threaded valve or fitting.
2) Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not overtighten fittings.
g. Provide dielectric union or insulating coupling where indicated on Drawings and required in this Specification.
3. Grooved-End Joints (GRV):
a. Type: Rigid, except where joints are used to correct misalignment, to provide flexibility, and where shown otherwise, in which case provide flexible type.
4. Soldered Joints (SLD):
a. Before soldering, remove stems and washers from solder joint valves. b. Use only solder specified for particular service.
c. Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs.
d. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage during soldering. 1) Protect from high temperatures due to flame
2) Protect from damage due to dripping flux or solder
e. After thoroughly cleaning pipe and fitting of oil and grease using solvent and emery cloth, apply noncorrosive flux to the male end only. f. Solder Joint
Packet Pg. 822 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
g. Wipe excess solder from exterior of joint before hardened.
5. Solvent Welded Joints (SLV):
a. Use only solvent cement which is rated for use in the service intended. Check compatibility of solvent cement with service, especially in pipelines which carry chemicals.
b. Observe all manufacturerís requirements for environmental conditions for use of solvent cement.
c. Cut pipe ends square and remove fins and burrs.
d. Apply appropriate primer.
e. Apply solvent cement and assemble joint.
1) Hold in place long enough for solvent cement to set-up and hold joint, as assembled, until solvent cement has cured.
f. Wipe excess solvent cement from exterior of joint before hardened.
6. Proprietary Restrained Mechanical Joints (PRJ):
a. PRJ piping shall be furnished with factory-fabricated retainer weldment on spigot end.
b. If PRJ piping is field cut, the pipe joint shall be restrained using Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ) Glands as specified in Section 15120, Piping Specialties.
Field welding of retainer weldment will not be allowed.
7. Insulating Flanges, Couplings, and Dielectric Unions:
a. Applications: Provide insulating flange, coupling or di-electric union for all joints at the following locations:
1) Dissimilar metal piping connections.
2) Cathodically protected piping penetration to buildings. 3) Submerged to unsubmerged metallic piping connections. 4) Where required for electrically insulated connection. b. Installation:
1) Insulating joints connecting immersed piping to non-immersed piping shall be installed above maximum water surface elevation.
2) Align and install insulating joints according to manufacturer's recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials.
C. Exposed Piping Installation:
1. Piping Runs:
a. Parallel to building or column lines and perpendicular to floor, unless shown otherwise.
b. Piping upstream and downstream of flow measuring devices shall provide straight lengths as required for accurate flow measurement.
2. Supports: As specified in Section 15010, PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS.
3. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations; install to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and other work.
4. Provide unions or flanges at each piping connection to equipment or instrumentation on equipment side of each block valve to facilitate installation and removal.
5. Install piping so that no load or movement in excess of that stipulated by equipment manufacturer will be imposed upon equipment connection;
6. Install piping to allow for contraction and expansion without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
7. Piping clearance, unless otherwise shown:
a. Over Walkway and Stairs: Minimum of 7 feet 6 inches, measured from walking surface or stair tread to lowest extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
Packet Pg. 823 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
b. Between Equipment or Equipment Piping and Adjacent Piping: Minimum 3 feet 0 inch, measured from equipment extremity and extremity of piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
c. From Adjacent Work: Minimum 1 inch from nearest extremity of completed piping system including flanges, valve bodies or mechanisms, insulation, or hanger/support systems.
d. Do not route piping in front of or to interfere with access ways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, or windows.
e. Headroom in front of openings, doors, and windows shall not be less than the top of the opening.
f. Do not install piping containing liquids or liquid vapors in transformer vaults or electrical equipment rooms.
g. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work.
D. Buried Pipe Installation:
1. Pipe Placement:
a. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. b. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage to pipe.
c. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 1) Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of dayís work.
d. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. e. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical closure of spigot into bell. Utilize a maximum of 75 percent of manufacturerís recommended allowable joint deflection.
1) If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment, provide:
a) Shorter pipe lengths.
b) Fittings/bends.
f. Secure pipe which has been placed from movement or damage while placing the next section of pipe.
g. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.
E. Cleaning:
1. Following assembly and testing, and prior to disinfection and final acceptance, flush pipelines with water at 2.5 fps minimum flushing velocity until foreign matter is removed. At a minimum, flush for a period of time which will flush the entire pipeline volume three times.
a. If impractical to flush large diameter pipe at 2.5 fps, clean in-place from inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush line at lower velocity. If lower velocity is used, flush the entire pipeline volume five times.
2. Provide temporary means of removing flushing water from pipeline during flushing.
3. Provide means for removal/screening of debris from the flushing water, disposal of debris and disposal of flushing water.
Packet Pg. 824 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
3.4 TESTING
A. Pressure test piping in accordance with the Pipe Schedule, and Section 15990, Pressure Testing of Piping Systems.
3.5 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The following supplements are attached to this Specification section and incorporated herein by reference:
1. 15100 PS ñ Pipe Schedule
2. 15100 PSDS CHE ñ Chemical Tubing and Pipe System
3. 15100 PSDS CPVC ñ Solvent Welded Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
4. 15100 PSDS DIP ñ Ductile Iron Pipe
5. 15100 PSDS GSP ñ Galvanized Steel Pipe
6. 15100 PSDS PVC1 ñ Solvent Welded Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
7. 15100 PSDS PVC3 ñ Polyvinyl Chloride Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe
8. 15100 PSDS RCP ñ Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Packet Pg. 825 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100-
6 City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 826 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PS-1
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PS
PIPE SCHEDULE
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. This schedule is provided for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR. Some flow streams may be shown on the drawings, but not listed here.
B. Flow Stream IDs:
1. BWW ñ Backwash Waste
2. BYP - Bypass
3. DR ñ Drain
4. FECL ñ Ferric Chloride
5. FTW ñ Filter to Waste
6. FW ñ Finished Water
7. OF ñ Overflow
8. PTW ñ Pump to Waste
9. REC ñ Backwash Recycle
10. RW ñ Raw Water
11. SA ñ Sample
12. SD ñ Storm Drain
13. SLD - Sludge
14. SW ñ Surface Wash
15. V - Vent
C. Pipe Materials:
1. CHE ñ Chemical Tubing
2. CPVC ñ Solvent Welded Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
3. DIP ñ Ductile Iron Pipe
4. GSP ñ Galvanized Steel Pipe
5. HDPE ñ Fusible High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
6. PVC1 ñ Solvent Welded Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe
7. PVC3 ñ Polyvinyl Chloride Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe
8. RCP ñ Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe
D. Joint Types:
1. B&S ñ Bell and Spigot
2. FLG ñ Flanged
3. RMJ ñ Restrained Mechanical Joint
4. SLV ñ Solvent Welded Socket
5. THR ñ Threaded
6. WLD ñ Butt Welded
E. Lining Systems:
1. CM ñ Cement Mortar
2. CE ñ Ceramic Epoxy
Coating Systems: As described in Section 09900
Packet Pg. 827 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PS-2
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
1.2 PIPE SCHEDULE
Contractor shall install piping systems in accordance with the following pipe schedule:
FLOW
STREAM
I.D.
DESCRIPTION SERVICE EXPOSURE SIZE
RANGE
MATERIAL JOINT
TYPE
TEST
PRESSURE
LINING COATING
SYSTEM/
COLOR
NOTES
Buried 12î DIP RMJ 200 psi CM Asphaltic +
Poly Wrap
BWW Backwash
Waste
Backwash
Water
Exposed 12î DIP FLG 200 psi CM No. 300 / Tan
BYP Bypass Water Exposed 12î DIP FLG 200 psi CM No. 300 / Tan Exposed > 1/2î PVC3 SLV 10 psi None No. 301/Tan Note 1
Buried > 1/2î PVC3 SLV 10 psi None None Note 1
DR Drain Water
Exposed Indoor <1/2î CHE Barbed 10 psi None None Note 1 Exposed/Buried
(Pump Discharge)
3/8î CHE Barbed 200 psi None Green Tubing Note 2
Exposed/Buried
(Pump Discharge)
2î PVC Elect.
Conduit
SLV 10 psi None No. 301 /
Green
Note 2.
INS-01
(Exposed)
FECL Ferric
Chloride
38%
Ferric
Chloride
Exposed (Pump
Suction/Chem
Facility Piping)
2î CPVC SLV 10 psi None No. 301 /
Green
INS-01
FTW Filter to
Waste
Water Exposed 12î DIP FLG 200 psi CM No. 300 / Tan
Buried 12î DIP RMJ 200 psi CM Asphaltic +
Poly Wrap
Exposed 12î DIP FLG 200 psi CM No. 300 / Tan
Buried <2î GSP THR 200 psi None None
FW Finished
Water
Water
Exposed <2î GSP THR 200 psi None No. 300/Tan INS-O1
OF Overflow Chemical Exposed < 6î CPVC SLV 5 psi None No. 301/Tan Water Exposed ≥ 6î DIP FLG 5 psi CM No. 300/Tan
PTW Pump to
Waste
Water Buried 8î DIP RMJ 200 psi CM Asphaltic +
Poly Wrap
Packet Pg. 828 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment 15100 PS-3
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
FLOW
STREAM
I.D.
DESCRIPTION SERVICE EXPOSURE SIZE
RANGE
MATERIAL JOINT
TYPE
TEST
PRESSURE
LINING COATING
SYSTEM/
COLOR
NOTES
Buried 6î DIP RMJ 200 psi CM Asphaltic +
Poly Wrap
REC Backwash
Recycle
Water
Exposed ≤6” DIP FLG 200 psi CM Asphaltic +
Poly Wrap
RW Raw Water Water Exposed >10î DIP FLG 200 psi CM No. 300 / Tan SA Sample Water Exposed 1î PVC1 SLV 200 psi None No. 301 / Grey
SD Storm Drain Water Buried 4î PVC3 SLV 10 psi None None Buried 15î RCP B&S 20 psi None None
SW Surface Wash Water Exposed 3î ñ 6î DIP FLG 200 psi CM No. 300 / Tan Buried 4î DIP RMJ 20 psi CE Asphaltic +
Poly Wrap
SLD Sludge Backwash
Waste
Water Exposed 4î DIP FLG 20 psi CE No. 300 /
Black
Exposed (nonchemical)3/4î -
3î
PVC3 SLV 5 psi None No. 301 /
Grey
V Vent Vent Lines
Exposed
(Chemical)
All CPVC SLV 5 psi None No. 301 /
Grey
1. Provide PVC3 or chemical tubing with conduit as required for drain connection to vertical mixer housing.
2. For the Chemical Metering Pump discharge lines, chemical tubing shall be installed in an electrical conduit system per 15100 PSDS CHE and DIV 16000.
Packet Pg. 829 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment 15100 PS-4
City of Redding May 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Packet Pg. 830 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment 15100 PSDS CHE-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PSDS CHE
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET ñ CHEMICAL TUBING AND CONDUIT
ITEM DESCRIPTION
General For liquid chemical service, provide color-coded LLDPE tubing, colors as listed in the Pipe Schedule. For gas chemical service, provide HDPE tubing, natural color (semi-opaque white). Install tubing in electrical conduit for ease of installation/replacement as well as non-pressure rated secondary containment. Tubing manufacturer shall confirm chemical compatibility of tubing with chemical system being served.
Tubing Tubing size references on the Drawings or in the Specifications refer to outside diameter, unless noted otherwise. Provide tubing with the following corresponding inside diameter and pressure rating where outside diameter is called for:
PRESSURE RATING
AT 70 DEG. F OUTSIDE
DIAMETER
INSIDE
DIAMETER
LLDPE HDPE
3/8î ºî 214 psi 272 psi
½î 3/8î 153 psi 194 psi
5/8î ½î 119 psi 151 psi
æî 5/8î 97 psi 123 psi
1î æî 154 psi 195 psi
HDPE tubing shall be suitable for full vacuum service (14 psi vacuum)
LLDPE Characteristics:
Specific Gravity (ASTM D792): <0.920
Tensile strength (ASTM D638): 2800 psi @ 73 deg. F
Elongation (ASTM D638): 530%
Hardness (ASTM D785): 44D Rockwell Durometer
Heat Distortion (ASTM D648): 120 deg. F @ 66 psi
Color:
3/8î I.D. and smaller - red, green, blue, white, gray, yellow, orange, purple, or black
Larger than 3/8î I.D. - semi-opaque or black
Packet Pg. 831 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS CHE-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
ITEM DESCRIPTION
HDPE Characteristics:
Specific Gravity (ASTM D792): 0.955
Tensile strength (ASTM D638): 3900 psi @ 73 deg. F
Elongation (ASTM D638): >500%
Hardness (ASTM D785): 65D Rockwell Durometer
Heat Distortion (ASTM D648): 151 deg. F @ 66 psi
Color: Semi-Opaque or Black
For all tubing runs, use continuous lengths of tubing with no splices.
Tubing Manufacturers: Hudson Extrusions, or equal
Conduit Conduit for chemical tubing shall be PVC electrical conduit, as specified in Division 16. Sizes shall be as listed below:
TUBING OUTSIDE
DIAMETER
CONDUIT SIZE
3/8î 2î
½î 2î
5/8î 2î
æî 3î
1î 3î
Fittings Provide all necessary fittings, clamps and adapters for connection of tubing at the chemical metering pump outlet, chemical feed point, and any other connections shown on the Drawings. Provide barbedor compression-style fittings, specifically designed for use with the tubing being provided, and compatible with the service (both with the fluid being carried in pipe and pressure rating). Fittings shall be located so that they are accessible at all times. No fittings shall be located in the carrier pipe.
All connections shall be constructed per tubing manufacturerís recommendations to provide a connection which is equal to or greater than tubing pressure rating. All parts or fittings in contact with the fluid in the tubing shall be compatible with the chemical being carried.
Packet Pg. 832 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS CPVC-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PSDS CPVC
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET ñ SOLVENT WELDED CHLORINATED POLYVINYL
CHLORIDE PIPE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pipe Schedule 80 CPVC: Type IV, Grade I or Class 23447-B conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM F441. Manufactured with 2 percent titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.
Threaded nipples shall be schedule 80.
Fittings Schedule 80 CPVC as Specified Under Pipe Above: Conforming to the requirements of ASTM F439 Rev A for socket-weld type and ASTM F437 for threaded type. Manufactured with 2 percent titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.
Joints Solvent socket-weld except where connection to valves and equipment may require future disassembly.
Flanges One piece, molded hub Type CPVC flat face flange in accordance with Fittings above; 125-pound ANSI B16.1 drilling.
Bolting Flat Face Mating Flange or In Corrosive Areas: ASTM A193/A193M Rev A Type 316 stainless steel Grade B8M hex head bolts and ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts.
Raised Face Mating Flange: Carbon steel ASTM A307 Grade B square head bolts and ASTM A563 Grade A heavy hex head nuts.
Gaskets Flat-Face Mating Flange: Full faced 1/8-inch thick EPDM rubber.
Raised-Face Mating Flange: Flat ring 1/8-inch EPDM rubber, with filler gasket between OD of raised face and flange OD to protect the flange from bolting moment.
Solvent Cement As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to ASTM F493 Rev A.
Thread
Lubricant
Teflon tape.
Packet Pg. 833 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 834 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS DIP-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PSDS DIP
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET ñ DUCTILE IRON PIPE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pipe Buried Piping: Pressure class as indicated in the pipe schedule. If not indicated:
All pipe 12î diameter and smaller shall be pressure class 350. All pipe 14î through 20î shall be pressure class 250. All pipe larger than 20î shall be pressure class 200.
Flanged Piping: Special Thickness Class 53
Pressure class shall be per AWWA C150/A21.50 and
AWWA C151/A21.51
All buried pipes designed to carry recycled water shall be distinctively wrapped in purple tape.
Lining Water and Reclaimed Water: Cement-Mortar: AWWA C104/A21.4.
Wastewater: Ceramic epoxy as follows:
1. Amine cured novalac epoxy containing at least 20% by volume of ceramic quartz pigment.
2. Permeability rating of 0.00 when tested per Method A of ASTM E 96, Procedure A with a test duration of 30 days.
3. Minimum lining thickness: 40 mils nominal dry film thickness.
4. The following tests must be run on coupons from factory lined Ductile Iron pipe:
a. ASTM B 117 Salt Spray (scribed panel). Results to equal
0.0 undercutting after two years.
b. ASTM G 95 Cathodic Disbondment (1.5 volts at 77ºF).
Results to equal no more than 0.5 mm undercutting after 30 days.
c. Immersion Testing rated using ASTM D 714.
i. 20% Sulfuric Acid: No effect after two years.
ii. 140ºF 25% Sodium Hydroxide: No effect after two
years.
iii. 160ºF Distilled Water (scribed panel): No effect after two years.
iv. 120ºF Tap Water (scribed panel): 0.0 undercutting after two years with no effect.
v. Abrasion Resistance: Less than .075 mm (3 mils) loss after one million cycles on a ±22.5º sliding aggregate
slurry abrasion tester using a sharp natural siliceous
gravel with a particle size between 2mm and 10 mm
(European Standard SN598).
Packet Pg. 835 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS DIP-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
ITEM DESCRIPTION
5. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Protecto 401 Ceramic Epoxy Lining; Or Equal.
Wastewater, Sludge, Scum, as noted in Pipe Schedule: Glass lining as follows:
1. The glass powder shall be specially formulated to prevent the adherence of grease and crystalline metal salt deposits in sludge, scum, and sewage pipelines, and shall be hard,
smooth, vitreous and inorganic.
2. Minimum lining thickness: 10 mils nominal dry film thickness.
3. Glass lining shall be exposed to a maturing temperature of approximately 1400 degrees F.
4. Hardness: 5-6 on the Mohs scale.
5. Density: 2.5 to 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter per ASTM D 792.
6. The following tests must be run on coupons from factory lined Ductile Iron pipe:
a. Per the recommended industry standards under ASTM
D-5162-01, NACE RP 0188-99, and SSPC Coating
Manual, Volume 1, Section XIV, the glass lining shall be tested by ìlow voltage, wet sponge, non-destructive
holiday detection unitî, with only isolated voids
permitted due to casting anomalies. Test procedure and
acceptance criteria shall be per the attachment ìMP-9.2, Porcelain Enamel Continuity Testingî, and
documentation shall be furnished with each shipment of
material listing the test results by identifying ìmarkî or ìtagî numbers.
b. The glass lining shall be capable of withstanding an instantaneous thermal shock of 350 degrees F.
c. The finished lining shall be able to withstand a strain of
0.001 inch/inch (the yield point of the base metal)
without damage to the glass.
d. The glass lining shall be capable of withstanding an instantaneous thermal shock of 350 degrees F
differential without crazing, blistering or spalling.
e. The glass lining shall be resistant to corrosion of
between PH-3 and PH-10 at 125 degrees F.
f. There shall be no visible loss of surface gloss to the lining after immersing a production sample in an 8%
sulfuric acid solution at 148 degrees F for a period of 10 minutes.
g. When tested according to ASTM C-283, it shall show a weight loss of not more than 3 milligrams per square
inch.
Packet Pg. 836 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS DIP-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
ITEM DESCRIPTION
6. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Ferrock MEH-32
b. VITCO SG-14
c. Ceramic Coating Company SL-31
d. Or Equal.
Coating Unless otherwise specified in the Pipe Schedule, piping shall be coated as follows:
Buried Piping:
AWWA C151/A21.51: Minimum 1-mil asphaltic coating.
AWWA C105/A21.5: Polyethylene encasement, 4-mil highdensity cross laminated or 8-mil linear-low density, color as required by local/state regulations.
Exposed/Immersed Piping:
Primer Coating: Where shop primer is applied to protect pipe during shipping, storage and handling, primer shall be
compatible with pipe coating requirements of Section 09900, Painting.
Fittings Lined and coated same as pipe.
Push-On (PO): AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11, gray or ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Fastite Joint; U.S. Pipe and Foundry, Tyton Joint.
Mechanical (MJ): AWWA C110/A21.10, C111/A21.11, and
C153/A21.53 gray or ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure.
Follower glands shall be ductile iron.
Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ): Standard MJ Fittings with RMJ Gland conforming to requirements of Section 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES.
Proprietary Restrained (PRJ): AWWA C111/A21.11 and
C153/A21.53, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Clow Corp., Super-Lock Joint; American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring Joint; U.S. Pipe, TR Flex.
Grooved End (GRV): AWWA C606 and C110/A21.10, ductile iron, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Victaulic.
Flange (FLG): AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile iron, faced and drilled, 125-pound flat face. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.
Joints Push-On (PO): 250 psi minimum working pressure,
AWWA C110/A21.10 and C111/A21.11. American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Fastite Joint; U.S. Pipe and Foundry, Tyton Joint.
Mechanical (MJ): 250 psi minimum working pressure.
Restrained Mechanical Joint (RMJ): Standard MJ Joint with RMJ gland conforming to requirements of Section 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES.
Proprietary Restrained (PRJ): 250 psi minimum working pressure.
Clow Corp., Super-Lock; American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex-Ring or U.S. Pipe, TR Flex.
Packet Pg. 837 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS DIP-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Grooved End (GRV): Rigid type radius cut conforming to
AWWA C606, 250 psi minimum working pressure. Victaulic.
Flange (FLG): 125-pound flat face, ductile iron, threaded conforming to AWWA C115/A21.15. Gray cast iron will not be allowed.
Branch connections 3 inches and smaller, shall be made with service saddles as specified in Section 15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES.
Couplings Grooved End: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per ASTM A47 or ductile iron per ASTM A536. Victaulic.
Grooved End Adapter Flanges: 250 psi minimum working pressure, malleable iron per ASTM A47 or ductile iron per ASTM A536. Victaulic.
Bolting T-Bolts and other specialty bolts: Manufacturer's standard.
Hex Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade B carbon steel hex head bolts Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A carbon steel hex head nuts.
Gaskets Push-On, Mechanical, and Proprietary Restrained Joints: Red Rubber (SBR) conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11.
Grooved End Joints: Halogenated butyl conforming to ASTM D2000 and AWWA C606.
Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8 inch-thick, red rubber (SBR), hardness 80 (Shore A), rated to 200 degrees F, conforming to ANSI B16.21, AWWA C207, and ASTM D1330, Grades 1 and 2.
Full face for 125-pound flat-faced flanges, flat-ring type for 250-pound raised-face flanges. Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the entire inside face with the gasket cemented to the blind flange.
Gasket pressure rating to equal or exceed the system hydrostatic test pressure.
Joint
Lubricant
Manufacturer's standard.
Packet Pg. 838 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS GSP-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PSDS GSP
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET ñ GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE
ITEM SIZE DESCRIPTION
Pipe Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A106, Grade B
seamless or ASTM A53 Rev A, Grade B seamless or
ERW.
2 inch & smaller Schedule 80.
2-1/2 thru 6 inch Schedule 40.
8 thru 12 inch Schedule 30.
14 inch Standard weight.
Joints 3 inch & smaller Threaded or flanged at valves and equipment, or grooved end meeting the requirements of AWWA C606.
4 inch & larger Flanged at valves and equipment, or grooved end meeting the requirements of AWWA C606.
Fittings Threaded: 150- or 300-pound malleable iron, ASTM A197 or ASTM A47, dimensions in accordance with
ANSI B16.3.
Grooved End: Malleable iron ASTM A47 or ductile iron
ASTM A536, 250 psi working pressure, grooved ends to
accept couplings without field preparation. Victaulic or equal.
Branch
Connections
2 inch & smaller Tee or reducing tee in conformance with Fittings, above, galvanized 2,000-pound WOG threadolet or
welding boss; galvanize after welding.
2-1/2 inch &
larger
Branch Same Size as Run: Grooved end tee in
accordance with Fittings, above.
Branch One or More Sizes Smaller Than Run: Grooved
end reducing tee in accordance with Fittings, above.
Flanges Galvanized forged carbon steel, ASTM A105/A105M, ANSI B16.5 Class 150 or Class 300, threaded, 1/16-
inch raised face.
Grooved end adapter flange, malleable iron ASTM A47
or ductile iron ASTM A536. Victaulic or equal.
Unions Threaded malleable iron, ASTM A197 or A47, 300-
pound WOG, brass to iron seat, meeting the
requirements of ANSI B16.3.
Couplings Grooved End: Rigid joint malleable iron, ASTM A47 or ductile iron, ASTM A536, 250 psi working pressure.
Victaulic or equal.
Plugs Forged carbon steel, ASTM A181/A181M Rev A, Grade II, round head, threaded, galvanized.
Bolting Grooved End Couplings: Carbon steel, ASTM A183 bolts and nuts, 110,000 psi minimum tensile strength.
Flanges: Carbon steel ASTM A307, Grade A hex head
bolts and ASTM A563,Grade A hex head nuts.
Packet Pg. 839 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS GSP-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
Gaskets All Flanges Flanged, Water and Sewage Service: 1/8-inch thick, red rubber (SBR), hardness 80 (Shore A), rated to 200
degrees F., conforming to ANSI B16.21, AWWA C207,
and ASTM D1330, Grades 1 and 2.
Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the entire
inside face with the gasket cemented to the blind
flange.
Grooved end
Couplings
EPDM or chlorinated butyl per ASTM D2000 for water
and air to 230 degrees F, dimensions conforming to
AWWA C606.
Thread
Lubricant
2 inch & smaller Teflon tape or joint compound that is insoluble in water.
Packet Pg. 840 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS PVC1-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PSDS PVC1
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET ñ SOLVENT WELDED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pipe Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), unless indicated otherwise.
Type I, Grade I or Class 12454-B conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM D1785. Pipe shall be manufactured with 1% titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.
All pipes designed to carry recycled water shall be colored purple or distinctively wrapped in purple tape.
Fittings Schedule to match pipe above, ASTM D2466 and ASTM D2467 for socket weld type and Schedule 80 ASTM D2464 for threaded type.
Fittings shall be manufactured with 1% titanium dioxide for ultraviolet protection.
Joints Solvent socket weld except where connection to threaded valves and equipment may require future disassembly.
Flanges One piece, molded hub type PVC flat face flange in accordance with Fittings above, 125-pound ANSI B16.1 drilling
Bolting Hex Bolts: ASTM A193 B8, Type 304 stainless steel Nuts: ASTM A194 Grade 8, Type 304 stainless steel
Gaskets Flat-Face Mating Flange: Full-faced 1/8-inch thick EPDM rubber.
Solvent Cement As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to ASTM D2564, except solvent weld cement for PVC pipe joints in sodium hypochlorite service shall be free of silica filler and shall be certified by the manufacturer to be suitable for that service.
Certification shall be submitted.
Thread Sealant Teflon Tape.
Packet Pg. 841 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 842 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15100 PSDS PVC3-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15100 PSDS PVC3
PIPING SYSTEM DATA SHEET ñ POLYVINYL CHLORIDE DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
Pipe PVC Drain Waste and Vent type, ASTM D1785, Type 2110, Schedule
40. Fittings Schedule to match pipe above, ASTM D2665 Drain, Waste and Vent Type
Joints Solvent socket weld except where connection to threaded valves and equipment may require future disassembly.
Solvent Cement As recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer conforming to ASTM D2564.
Thread Sealant Teflon Tape.
Special
Installation
Instructions for
DWV Piping
1. Approximate routing as shown on drawings. Provide drain waste and vent piping to produce a complete, codecompliant drain, waste and vent system.
2. Provide and install all required fittings, adapters, etc. to produce a complete system.
3. Set piping above floor slab true and plumb.
4. Set risers in CMU walls where possible, set exposed risers as close to walls as possible.
5. Where vent stacks pass through roof, fit with flashing sleeve secured to roof.
6. Extend vents minimum 1 foot above roof.
Packet Pg. 843 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) Packet Pg. 844 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-1
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
SECTION 15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Manufacturerís data on materials, construction, end connections, ratings, overall lengths, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SERVICE SADDLES
A. Double-Strap Iron:
1. Pressure Rating: Capable of withstanding 150 psi internal pressure without leakage or over stressing.
2. Run Diameter: Compatible with outside diameter of pipe on which saddle is installed.
3. Taps: Iron pipe threads.
4. Materials:
a. Body: Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Straps: Galvanized steel.
c. Hex Nuts and Washers: Steel.
d. Seal: Rubber.
5. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Smith-Blair; Series 313 or 366.
b. Dresser; Style 91.
c. Or Equal
2.2 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS
A. Flexible Couplings (FC)
1. Features:
a. Description: Sleeve-type flexible couplings
b. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping.
c. Sleeve material: Carbon steel for carbon steel and ductile iron piping systems, or stainless steel for stainless steel piping systems.
d. Coating and Lining: All cast and carbon steel components shall be epoxy lined and coated, minimum 16 mils thickness. For potable water service, lining shall be NSF-61 certified.
e. Gasket: EPDM
f. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, prime coated. Buried couplings shall have Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 153.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 411.
3) Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 845 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-2
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Flanged Coupling Adapters (FCA)
1. Features:
a. Description: One end of adapter shall be flanged and the other end shall have a sleeve type flexible coupling.
b. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping.
c. Adapter body material: Cast iron or steel.
d. Gasket: EPDM
e. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, prime coated. Buried couplings shall have Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Style 227.
2) Smith-Blair, Inc.; Style 127.
3) Or Equal.
C. Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapters (RFCA)
1. Features:
a. Description: One end of adapter shall be flanged and the other end shall have a sleeve type flexible coupling.
b. Pressure and Service: Same as connected piping.
c. Adapter body material: Cast iron or steel.
d. Gasket: EPDM
e. Bolts and Nuts: Alloy steel, corrosion-resistant, prime coated. Buried couplings shall have Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts.
f. Restraining lug.
2. Manufacturers and Products:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1) Romac Industries; RFCA
2) Or Equal.
D. Restraint Rods for Flexible Couplings: As shown on the Drawings
2.3 RESTRAINED COUPLINGS
A. Restrained Mechanical Joint Glands (RMJ)
1. Pressure Rating:
a. Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 150 psi. b. Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall be supported by manufacturerís proof testing.
2. RMJ gland shall be designed for use with standard mechanical joint pipe. Pipe restraint products designed for use with push-on joints will not be acceptable.
3. Thrust Restraint:
a. Provide hardened steel wedges that bear against and engage outer pipe surface, and allow articulation of pipe joint after assembly while wedges remain in their original setting position on pipe surface.
b. Products employing set screws that bear directly on pipe will not be acceptable.
4. Manufacturer and Product:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe Only
1) EBAA Iron Sales Co.; Megalug.
2) Romac Industries Inc.: RomaGrip
3) Or Equal.
Packet Pg. 846 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-3
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
B. Dismantling Joint
1. Pressure Rating
a. Minimum Working Pressure Rating: Not less than 150 psi b. Pressure rating to be no less than test pressure for piping system in which the Restrained Dismantling Joint is used.
c. Safety Factor: Not less than two times working pressure and shall be supported by manufacturerís proof testing.
2. Thrust Restraint
a. Provide steel tie rods, ASTM A 193 GR B7
b. Number and arrangement of tie rods to provide dismantling joint assembly which meets pressure rating requirement.
3. Materials of Construction
a. Flanged Adapter Body: Steel
b. Follower Flange: Ductile Iron
c. Gasket: Buna-N, NSF-61 approved
d. Flange: Steel, per AWWA C207
e. Spigot: Steel
f. Studs: Type 304 stainless steel
g. Coating: NSF-61 approved epoxy
4. Manufacturer and Product
a. Smith-Blair, Model 975 or 972, as required for pressure rating b. Romac Industries, Style DJ400
c. Or Equal.
2.4 ELASTOMER BELLOWS:
A. Type: Reinforced, molded wide-arch elastomer bellows B. Features:
1. End Connections: Flanged, drilled 125# ANSI B16.1 standard with split hot-dip galvanized steel retaining rings.
2. Washers: Use with retaining rings to provide leak-proof joint at twice the rated pressure.
3. Thrust Protection: Control rods with gusset connection shall prevent over-extension.
4. Bellows Arch lining shall be Buna-N, nitrile, or butyl.
5. Rated Temperature: 250 deg F.
6. Rated Deflection and Pressure:
a. Lateral deflection shall be æ-inch minimum.
b. Burst Pressure: Four times the working pressure.
c. Compression deflection and minimum working pressure as follows:
Size
(inch)
Deflection
(inch)
Pressure
(psig)
2-1/2 to 12 1.06 150
14 1.65 130
16 to 20 1.65 110
C. Manufacturers and Products:
1. General Rubber Corp.; Style 1015 Maxijoint.
2. Mercer; Flexmore Style 450.
3. Goodall Rubber Co.; Specification E-711.
4. Or equal.
Packet Pg. 847 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-4
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.5 MODULAR MECHANICAL SEAL
A. Type: Interconnecting synthetic rubber links shaped and sized to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, blockout, or core-drilled opening in concrete slabs or walls.
B. Features:
1. Links: EPDM
2. Bolts and nuts: Type 316 stainless steel
3. Pressure plates: composite
4. Temperature range: -40 to 250 degrees Fahrenheit
5. Pressure rating: guaranteed by the manufacturer to provide a water-tight seal with a differential hydrostatic head of 40-feet of water
C. Manufacturers and Products:
1. PSI-Thunderline; Link-seal, Type S-316
2. Or equal
2.6 FLEXIBLE EXPANSION JOINT
A. Use: A flexible ductile iron fitting developed to accommodate pipeline forces that would otherwise result in damaged pipe or loss of service. Design to accommodate for expansion, contraction, rotation, bending and settlement of your pipeline all at the same time, with one fitting. For buried applications or above ground service.
B. Materials
1. Casing, ball and sleeve
a. Ductile Iron meeting or exceeding ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12
2. Flange
a. Compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles.
3. Lock Ring
a. Series 400 stainless steel. Limits expansion and contraction of FJ-Restraint up to maximum working pressure.
4. Ring Gaskets
a. Dual Ethylene Propylene Diene Methylene (EPDM) compounded for water and sewer service.
5. Coatings
a. Lined and coated with fusion bonded epoxy, applied and tested in accordance with AWWA C213. All exposed exterior surfaces are 12 to 18 mils.
6. Protective Sleeve
a. Polyethylene Sleeve, 8 mils thick per AWWA C105 to cover entire assembly after installation. Provided with flexible rubber bands to secure to pipe ends and restraint.
C. Pressure
1. Allow for working pressures up to 350 psi.
D. Manufacturers and Products
1. Romac Industries, Inc.; FJ Restraint Flexible Expansion Joint Packet Pg. 848 Attachment: Specifications and Special Provisions (4.11(c)--Award BS No. 5381 Well 12 Water Treatment Plant) 15120-5
City of Redding March 2023
Well 12 WTP Project
21-065 Final
2.7 PIPE TO MANHOLE CONNECTORS
A. Type: Resilient rubber male-to-female wedge-style flexible connector between a circular gravity pipe and a circular opening core-drilled into a precast or cast-in-place concrete structure.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Able to hold 10 psi head pressure for 10 minutes with no leakage
2. Load Rating: 150 lbs per inch pipe diameter
C. Materials:
1. Body: resilient rubber material conforming to ASTM C923
2. Hardware: 300 Series Stainless Steel conforming to ASTM C923, ASTM A666 and ASTM A240
D. Manufacturer and Products
1. Trelleborg Pipe Seals Milford, Inc., Model Kor-N-Seal I ñ 106 Series for pipes up to 18î diameter and Kor-N-Seal II ñ 206 Series for pipes from 20î to 54î in diameter.
2. Or Equal
2.8 CHEMICAL CONNECTION
A. Type: Lockable Male Cam-lock